WO2020218542A1 - Optical information reading device - Google Patents

Optical information reading device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020218542A1
WO2020218542A1 PCT/JP2020/017775 JP2020017775W WO2020218542A1 WO 2020218542 A1 WO2020218542 A1 WO 2020218542A1 JP 2020017775 W JP2020017775 W JP 2020017775W WO 2020218542 A1 WO2020218542 A1 WO 2020218542A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
unit
decoding
code
reading
image
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/017775
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
伊藤 誠
光司 鴻巣
栄竣 中村
嘉一 寺内
史浩 金原
内田 実
雅史 大脇
敏生 森本
光一 矢野
隆雄 牛嶋
伊藤 史朗
通 凌
亨 藤田
信幸 藤原
Original Assignee
株式会社デンソーウェーブ
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2020073549A external-priority patent/JP2021093110A/en
Application filed by 株式会社デンソーウェーブ filed Critical 株式会社デンソーウェーブ
Publication of WO2020218542A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020218542A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K7/00Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
    • G06K7/10Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K7/00Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
    • G06K7/10Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
    • G06K7/14Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation using light without selection of wavelength, e.g. sensing reflected white light

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an optical information reading device that optically reads an information code such as a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code.
  • bar code scanners that use line sensors as light receiving means are often used to read one-dimensional codes such as bar codes displayed on products.
  • the barcode scanner is provided with a reading port long in one direction to facilitate reading of the barcode. Therefore, by bringing the reading port into contact with the bar code so that the longitudinal direction of the reading port is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the bar code, the bar code can be read.
  • This optical information reading device is mainly a gun-type reading device formed so as to hold the grip portion in an upright state when the reading port is directed to the information code displayed on the vertical surface.
  • An extension portion is provided around the reading port of the reading device, and the extension portion is formed with an opening for visually recognizing the information code at a portion different from the grip portion side. As a result, the information code can be visually recognized from above through the opening even when the information code is read while the extension bottom wall portion on the grip portion side of the extension portion is in contact with the vertical surface. Can be done.
  • a reading operation in which a reading port is brought into contact with the display surface so as to cover the information code is read. Either touch reading) or a reading operation in which the reading port is pointed at the information code while away from the display surface is adopted.
  • the information code and the reading port are separated from each other when reading the information code, so that ambient illumination light, sunlight, etc. The extraneous light is reflected by the information code or the display surface (specular reflection), and the information code may not be readable.
  • the illumination light radiated through the reading port is reflected by the information code and the display surface, so that the person facing the reading port is dazzled. You may feel.
  • the present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a configuration capable of suppressing the influence of external light and the glare felt by people around when reading an information code. To provide.
  • Imaging units (28, 27) that image the information codes (C, C1, C2) displayed or arranged on the display surface (R), and
  • the image pickup unit and the illumination unit are housed inside, and a reading port (50) is provided to emit the illumination light from the illumination unit and introduce the light from the information codes (C, C1, C2) into the inside.
  • a reading port (50) is provided to emit the illumination light from the illumination unit and introduce the light from the information codes (C, C1, C2) into the inside.
  • With the housing (11) With An optical information reading device (10) that captures and reads the information code (C, C1, C2) by the imaging unit with the reading port separated from the display surface.
  • the housing is A reading unit (12) on which the reading port (50) is formed, A grip portion (13) that is gripped when the reading port is directed toward the information code (C, C1, C2) and is integrally formed with the reading portion (12).
  • the reading portion (12) extends diagonally downward in the longitudinal direction (LT) from the end portion (13 TIP ) on one side in the longitudinal direction of the grip portion (13), and extends to the tip thereof at the extending end portion (12a).
  • the extending end portion (12a) has the reading port (50).
  • the reading port (50) has a peripheral edge (51) directed to the information code (C, C1, C2).
  • the peripheral edge (51) has a side edge (52) away from the grip (13) in the longitudinal direction (LT).
  • the one side edge portion (52) is provided with a wall portion (56) projecting diagonally downward.
  • the housing has a reading unit formed with a reading port for emitting illumination light from the lighting unit and introducing the light from the information code into the inside of the housing, and the reading port is an information code. It is provided with a grip portion that is gripped by a user or the like when facing the light.
  • the reading unit has an extending end portion that extends continuously and integrally diagonally downward in the longitudinal direction from the end portion on one side in the longitudinal direction of the grip portion (that is, the tip portion in the longitudinal direction).
  • the reading unit is connected to the grip portion by positioning the reading port at the extending end portion.
  • the reading port has a peripheral edge directed to the information code, which peripheral edge has a side edge away from the grip in the longitudinal direction. A wall portion that projects diagonally downward is provided on this one side edge portion.
  • the wall portion is located behind the information code when viewed from the user who grips the grip portion. Since the user himself / herself is located on the front side of the information code, it is possible to make it difficult to capture the external light reflected by the information code or the like without impairing the visibility of the information code. Further, since it is difficult for the wall portion to reflect the reflected light of the information code or the like due to the illumination light through the reading port to the back side of the information code, the direction in which the reading port is directed (the direction corresponding to the back side) It is possible to suppress the glare felt by the person.
  • a pair of facing portions facing each other via the reading port and connected to the wall portion are provided on the peripheral edge of the reading port.
  • the illumination unit is arranged so as to irradiate the illumination light toward the wall unit.
  • the angle of the illumination light irradiation direction (optical axis) with respect to the desired display surface is brought close to 90 °, the specular reflection caused by the illumination light tends to affect the reading, while the angle of the illumination light is simply reduced. Then, it becomes difficult for the information code with the reading port to be irradiated with the illumination light. Therefore, by arranging the illumination unit so that the illumination light is emitted toward the wall portion through the reading port, the information code in which the wall portion is brought close to the wall portion is illuminated by the reflected light reflected by the wall portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the influence of mirror reflection caused by the illumination light on the reading of the information code while ensuring the necessary illuminance.
  • the protrusion length from one side edge portion to the protruding end portion is a distance suitable for imaging an information code displayed on the display surface of the object in contact with the protruding end portion. It is formed so as to have a length corresponding to.
  • the information code suitable for reading can be imaged by directing the reading port toward the information code so that the protruding end portion is in contact with the display surface, so that the reading success rate of the information code can be increased.
  • the illumination unit includes first and second illumination units that irradiate the illumination light, and the image pickup unit collects incident light incident through a light receiving sensor and a reading port.
  • An imaging lens for forming an image on the light receiving surface of the light receiving sensor is provided, and the imaging lens is arranged so as to be offset from the light receiving surface of the light receiving sensor in a direction away from the first illumination unit and the second illumination unit. Will be done.
  • the first illumination unit and the second illumination unit it becomes difficult for the first illumination unit and the second illumination unit to enter the folded field view (imaging range captured by being reflected by the display surface or the like) from the display surface or the like on which the information code is displayed. From this point as well, specular reflection caused by illumination light can be suppressed.
  • the reading port is provided with a protective member that protects the image pickup unit and the illumination unit, and the protection member transmits the first transmission unit through which the illumination light is transmitted and the reflected light from the information code.
  • a second transparent portion is formed, and the housing is provided with a holding portion that holds the protective member so as to surround it from the outer surface side, and the holding portion has an exposure width that exposes the first transparent portion to the outer surface side. And the exposure width that exposes the second transmissive portion to the outer surface side are formed so as to be smaller than the width of the user's finger.
  • the reading port is provided with a protective member that protects the image pickup unit and the illumination unit, and the protective member surrounds the first transmission portion through which the illumination light is transmitted and the first transmission portion in an annular shape.
  • the first annular portion projecting outward, the second transmitting portion through which the reflected light from the information code is transmitted, and the second annular portion projecting outward so as to surround the second transmitting portion in an annular shape are formed. It is formed.
  • the invention according to claim 8 relates to a marker light irradiation unit that irradiates a marker light indicating an imaging field of view by the imaging unit, and whether or not the marker light is imaged in a predetermined state in the image captured by the imaging unit.
  • a marker imaging determination unit for determination and a lighting control unit for controlling the illumination unit according to the determination result of the marker imaging determination unit are provided.
  • the reading port is not directed to the display surface or the like to which the information code is attached, the irradiated marker light is not reflected by the display surface or the like, so that the marker light is not captured. That is, since it is not necessary to irradiate the illumination light when the marker light is not imaged, it is possible to suppress the irradiation of unnecessary illumination light by controlling the illumination unit according to the determination result of the marker imaging determination unit. ..
  • the illumination control unit controls the illumination unit so that the illumination light is irradiated, and the marker imaging determination unit determines the marker imaging state. If it is determined that this is not the case, the illumination unit is controlled so as to stop the irradiation of the illumination light.
  • ON / OFF can be switched appropriately.
  • the illumination control unit controls the illumination unit so that the illumination light is irradiated, and the marker imaging determination unit determines the marker imaging state. If it is determined that the lighting unit is not, the illumination unit is controlled so that the illumination light is irradiated in a darker state than in the case where it is determined that the marker is in the imaging state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the irradiation of unnecessarily bright illumination light.
  • the marker light irradiation unit irradiates the marker light when it is determined by the image change determination unit that the image captured by the image pickup unit has changed.
  • the marker imaging determination unit determines whether or not the marker light is in a marker imaging state in which the marker light is imaged in a predetermined state in a range of the captured image where the marker light may be imaged. To do. In this way, since the range in which the marker light is captured in the captured image is predetermined, the range for determining whether or not the captured image is in the marker imaging state can be limited, and the processing load required for the determination process or the like can be reduced. The processing speed can be improved.
  • the thirteenth aspect of the present invention there is one decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code of the captured image captured by the imaging unit, and one decoding unit because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged.
  • a selection unit for selecting the decoding result to be output is provided. Then, the selection unit selects the decoding result to be output based on whether or not the selection determination information registered in advance is included in the decoding result.
  • the selection determination can be performed by selecting the decoding result including the selection determination information from the plurality of decoding results. It is possible to prevent the decoding result of the non-reading information code that does not include the information from being output. Further, for example, when the information code to be excluded from reading includes the selection determination information, the selection can be made by selecting the decoding result that does not include the selection determination information from the plurality of decoding results. It is possible to prevent the decoding result of the non-reading information code including the determination information from being output.
  • the decoding result to be output can be appropriately selected, and the information code read unintentionally can be selected.
  • the output of the decoding result can be limited.
  • the selection determination information is at least one of a characteristic character string included in a predetermined URL and a characteristic character string included in a predetermined address. Therefore, for example, when a URL or an address is recorded in an information code that should be excluded from reading, it is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code from being output, and the URL or address can be recorded in the information code that should be read. When the address is recorded, it is possible to prevent the decoding result that does not include the URL and the address from being output.
  • one decoding unit performs a decoding process for decoding an information code for an image captured by the imaging unit, and one decoding unit because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged.
  • a selection unit for selecting the decoding result to be output is provided. Then, the selection unit selects the decoding result to be output based on the code type of the information code that has been successfully decoded.
  • the above-mentioned predetermined code can be selected by selecting the decoding result decoded from the information code of the above-mentioned predetermined code type from a plurality of decoding results. It is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code not to be read, which is not the type, from being output. That is, even when a plurality of decoding results are obtained because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged, the decoding result to be output can be appropriately selected, and the information code read unintentionally can be selected. The output of the decoding result can be limited.
  • a decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding an information code on an image captured by the imaging unit and a processing unit that performs predetermined processing using the decoding result by the decoding unit. And, when a plurality of decoding results can be obtained from one captured image by the decoding unit because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged, the decoding result that once determines whether or not two or more same decoding results are obtained. The same difference determination unit and is provided. When it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit, the processing unit performs predetermined processing on one of the two or more same decoding results.
  • a storage unit is provided in which the decoding result of the predetermined processing performed by the processing unit is stored. Then, the processing unit determines that two or more same decoding results have been obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit, and the decoding that matches the same decoding result based on the information stored in the storage unit. When the predetermined processing is not performed by the processing unit within the predetermined number of readings of the result, the predetermined processing is performed on the decoding result.
  • the predetermined processing is performed. If it is not the decoding result used in, it is assumed that the user intentionally reads two or more information codes in which the same data is recorded, and the same decoding result can be used to perform the above-mentioned predetermined processing. ..
  • a storage unit is provided in which the decoding result by the decoding unit is stored together with the decoding time when the decoding process is completed. Then, the processing unit stores in the storage unit in association with the decoding results that match the same decoding results in the case where it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit. When the elapsed time from the decoding time is longer than the predetermined time, the predetermined processing is performed on the decoding result.
  • the same decoding result can be used to perform the above-mentioned predetermined processing.
  • the counting unit counts the number of times the information code successfully decoded by the decoding unit is removed from the imaging field of the imaging unit and reenters the imaging field as the number of times of imaging, and the processing unit performs the above-mentioned predetermined processing.
  • a storage unit is provided in which the decoding result in which the above is performed is stored in association with the number of imaging times counted by the counting unit.
  • the processing unit stores in the storage unit in association with the decoding results that match the same decoding results in the case where it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit.
  • the same decoding is performed by repeating the imaging state in which the information code is put in the imaging field of view and the imaging state in which the information code is removed from the imaging field of view.
  • the above-mentioned predetermined processing can be performed for each of the results.
  • the time when the information code is removed from the imaging field of the imaging unit is the code exclusion time as the decoding result.
  • a storage unit is provided which is associated with and stored in. Then, the processing unit stores in the storage unit in association with the decoding results that match the same decoding results in the case where it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit.
  • the processing unit stores in the storage unit in association with the decoding results that match the same decoding results in the case where it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit.
  • the information codes are removed from the imaging field of view for a certain period of time and then put back into the imaging field of view, so that the same decoding results are obtained.
  • the above-mentioned predetermined processing can be performed.
  • a posture detection unit for detecting the posture of the housing is provided. Then, when the processing unit determines that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit, the posture of the housing detected by the posture detection unit is in a predetermined posture state. In some cases, a predetermined process is performed on the above-mentioned decoding result.
  • the housing is held so as to be in the predetermined posture state, and the same decoding result is obtained for each of the above predetermined states. Can be processed.
  • the same information code is used in a plurality of continuously captured images continuously captured by the imaging unit by the code image detecting unit that detects the code image for decoding the information code from the image captured by the imaging unit.
  • the code image is detected, and the reading target determination unit determines whether or not the code image is a reading target according to the state in which the detected code image occupies the captured image. Then, when the decoding result is obtained by successfully decoding the code image determined to be the reading target by the reading target determination unit, the processing unit performs a predetermined process using this decoding result. Then, a predetermined notification is performed by the notification unit.
  • the code image of the information code can be captured by pointing the reading port at the information code to be read by the user.
  • a predetermined condition for example, when the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is equal to or larger than the predetermined range, it can be determined that the code image is the reading target. This is because the information code that the user intends to read tends to have a range of the code image occupied in the captured image, such as a predetermined range or more.
  • the trigger switch or the like is not used at all times. It is possible to realize an optical information reading device capable of aiming and reading an information code in the reading process to be performed.
  • the reading target determination unit is a code image in the imaging field of view even when a portion corresponding to a part of the code image detected by the code image detection unit is out of the imaging field of view of the imaging unit.
  • the state of the remaining portion satisfies a predetermined condition, it is determined that the code image is the reading target.
  • the code image is not immediately determined to be out of the reading target, so that the code image can be more accurately read. It can be determined whether or not it is a reading target.
  • the decoding process of the code image when the reading target determination unit determines to be the reading target is not successful and the decoding process of the code image is successful after the determination, after the determination.
  • a predetermined process is performed by the processing unit using the obtained decoding result, and a predetermined notification is performed by the notification unit.
  • a decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding an information code for an image captured by the imaging unit, an output unit for outputting the decoding result decoded by the decoding unit, and an output unit.
  • the output unit includes an image of one information code obtained by the decoding unit for a predetermined reading area provided so as to occupy a part of the captured image, and another information code. When the image of is not included, the decoding result of the above one information code is output.
  • the decoding result of the information code is output only when only the image of the information code to be read is included in the predetermined reading area. It is possible to limit the output of the decoding result of the information code read unintentionally, such as the decoding result of another information code captured while pointing the reading port at the information code to be read.
  • the output unit includes all the images of one information code for which the decoding result is obtained by the decoding unit with respect to the predetermined reading area, and the output unit is an image of another information code. When at least a part is not included, the decoding result of the above one information code is output.
  • the reading target is The decoding result of the external information code is not output.
  • the predetermined reading area even if all the images of the information code not to be read are included in the predetermined reading area, at least a part of the images of the information code to be read is included in the predetermined reading area. If so, each decoding result will not be output. Therefore, even when another information code is arranged near the information code to be read, it is possible to easily output the decoding result of the information code to be read.
  • the output unit includes an image of a specific pattern of one information code for which a decoding result has been obtained by the decoding unit for a predetermined reading area, and has a specific pattern of another information code.
  • the decoding result of the above one information code is output.
  • the marker light irradiation unit that irradiates the marker light toward the imaging field of view by the imaging unit
  • the decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code for the captured image captured by the imaging unit. And, it is determined whether or not the output unit for outputting the decoding result decoded by the decoding unit and the information code decoded by the decoding unit are located in the decoding target area corresponding to a part of the captured image.
  • a code position determination unit is provided. Then, when the marker light is not imaged by the imaging unit, the output unit outputs the decoding result of the information code determined by the code position determination unit to be located in the decoding target area.
  • the reading port of the reading device over the screen so that only the information code to be read is located in the decoding target area among the plurality of information codes displayed on the screen, the information code is displayed on the same screen. It is possible to output the decoding result of the information code to be read without outputting the decoding result of the information code of.
  • the output unit when one decoding result is obtained from one captured image by the decoding unit, the output unit does not need to determine whether or not the information code is the reading target. One decoding result is output regardless of whether or not the marker light is imaged.
  • the output unit is an information code determined by the code position determination unit to be located in the decoding target area when the marker light is not imaged by the imaging unit, and is set in advance. Outputs the decoding result of the information code that is the code type.
  • the code type of the information code not to be read is set in advance. By different from the code type, it is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code not to be read from being output.
  • the marker light irradiation unit that irradiates the marker light toward the imaging field of view by the imaging unit and the decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code for the captured image captured by the imaging unit.
  • the marker irradiation state determination unit that determines whether or not the marker light is being irradiated toward the information code for which the decoding result has been obtained, and the marker irradiation state determination unit that is irradiating the marker light. Whether or not the output unit for outputting the decoding result of the information code determined to be and the decoding result obtained by the decoding unit are in the decoding result matching state that matches the decoding result previously output from the output unit.
  • the double-reading prevention setting is set to prevent the decoding result that matches the previously output decoding result from being output.
  • a reading prevention setting unit is provided. Then, the double-reading prevention setting unit determines that the marker light is not irradiated toward the information code for which the decoding result is obtained by the marker irradiation state determination unit after the decoding result is output from the output unit. Then, the double-reading prevention setting is canceled.
  • the output unit excludes the decoding result determined by the decoding result judgment unit to be in the decoding result matching state, and twice. When the read prevention setting is canceled, even the decoding result determined by the decoding result determination unit to be in the decoding result matching state is output.
  • the double-reading prevention setting unit is in a state in which the marker light is irradiated toward the code peripheral area including the code area constituting the information code. Otherwise, if the marker irradiation state determination unit determines, the double-reading prevention setting is canceled.
  • the double-reading prevention setting is canceled just because the marker light is removed from the information code that outputs the decoding result, the information code that was once removed from the marker light due to camera shake etc. is irradiated again, so the user does not intend to read it twice. May occur. Therefore, by canceling the double-reading prevention setting when the marker light is not radiated toward the code peripheral area based on the code peripheral area including the code area constituting the information code, camera shake, etc. It is possible to prevent the double-reading prevention setting from being accidentally canceled due to the above, and it is possible to improve the robustness against camera shake and the like.
  • the code peripheral region is set so that the size of the information code changes according to the size of the information code occupying the captured image.
  • the size of the information code and the code peripheral area in the captured image becomes large, the user's operation required for the operation of removing the marker light from the code peripheral area may become large. Therefore, for example, when the information code is imaged relatively large, the size of the code peripheral area is set to be relatively small, and the code peripheral area is set according to the size of the information code occupying the captured image. By changing the size, it is possible to prevent the user's movement required for the release operation from becoming large.
  • a decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding an information code for an image captured by the imaging unit, an output unit for outputting the decoding result decoded by the decoding unit, and an output unit.
  • An image state determination unit for determining whether or not a partial image matching state in which the image is considered to have not changed is provided for a partial image corresponding to a part of the image captured by the imaging unit is provided. Then, when the decoding result is output by the output unit, the decoding unit does not perform the decoding process until the image state determination unit determines that a part of the image matches.
  • the decoding process is not performed unless it is considered that a part of the image has changed. Therefore, the decoding result is performed for each image capture to prevent double reading. There is no need to perform the process of comparing. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load and the processing time for preventing double reading and the like.
  • the range occupied by the captured image may be set in the central portion of the captured image.
  • the range occupied by the captured image may be set based on the position of the marker light in the captured image.
  • the range occupied by the captured image of some images is set based on the information code that was successfully decoded last time.
  • the part of the image changes based on the brightness of each cell constituting the information code. Since it can be determined whether or not the image is present, the determination accuracy can be improved.
  • a protective member for elastically sandwiching the edge portion constituting the reading port from both the outside and the inside is provided, and the protective member covers the outside of the edge portion. It has a protective portion, an inner protective portion that covers the inside of the edge portion, and a connecting portion that elastically connects the outer protective portion and the inner protective portion. Then, on the outside of the edge portion, an adhesive portion to which the outer protective portion is adhered and a protruding portion located on the tip side of the adhesive portion and protruding from the adhesive portion are provided, and the outer protective portion is adhered. It is formed so as to have a portion to be adhered to the portion and a thin-walled facing portion facing the protruding portion when the portion to be adhered and the bonded portion are adhered to each other.
  • the edge portion constituting the reading port is protected by the protective member, the edge portion is inserted between the outer protective portion and the inner protective portion so that the bonded portion and the protruding portion are in contact with each other.
  • the bonded portion gets over the protruding portion and then is bonded to the bonded portion.
  • the bonded portion is not adhered to the bonded portion until it gets over the protruding portion, so that even in the assembling work in which the protective member is pressed into the edge portion, the bonded portion is adhered in the middle of pushing. Since there is no such thing, the assembly work can be easily carried out.
  • the protruding portion is formed so that the protruding height becomes higher as it approaches the bonded portion, the bonded portion can easily get over the protruding portion, and the assembling work is further facilitated. Can be achieved.
  • the protruding portion is formed so that the end face on the adhesive portion side is close to perpendicular to the assembling direction in which the protective member is assembled to the edge portion.
  • a protruding portion is provided, and the inner protective portion is a thin wall that faces the second protruding portion when the second bonded portion to be bonded to the second bonded portion and the second bonded portion and the second bonded portion are bonded to each other. It is formed so as to have a second opposed portion having a shape.
  • FIG. 4A is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged cross section of X1-X1 of FIG. 1
  • FIG. 4B is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged cross section of X2-X2 of FIG.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram schematically illustrating an electrical configuration of the optical information reader of FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 6A is an explanatory view showing a state in which the first opening area of the reading port is directed to the barcode
  • FIG. 6A is an explanatory view showing a state in which the first opening area of the reading port is directed to the barcode
  • FIG. 6B is an explanatory view showing a state in which the first opening area of the reading port is directed to the QR code. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state. It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 1st modification of 1st Embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading device according to the second modification of the first embodiment
  • FIG. 8 (B) is the first embodiment of the first embodiment. 3
  • FIG. 12 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading device according to the second modification of the second embodiment
  • FIG. 12 (B) is the second embodiment of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading device according to the fourth modification of the second embodiment
  • FIG. 13 (B) is the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading device according to the sixth modification of the second embodiment
  • FIG. 14 (B) is the second embodiment. 7
  • FIG. 20 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the wall portion of the optical information reading device according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment
  • FIG. 20 (B) is the fifth embodiment of the fifth embodiment. 2
  • 21 (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the wall portion of the optical information reading device according to the third modification of the fifth embodiment
  • FIG. 21 (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the wall portion of the optical information reading device according to the third modification of the fifth embodiment, and FIG.
  • FIG. 21 (B) is the fifth embodiment of the fifth embodiment. 4 It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the wall part of the optical information reading device which concerns on the modification, and FIG. 21C is the wall part of the optical information reading device which concerns on the 5th modification of the 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity. It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the wall part of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 6th modification of 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 1st modification of 7th Embodiment.
  • FIG. 29 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the degree of contact of the finger when the exposure width and the exposure depth are changed
  • FIG. 29 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the exposure width and the exposure depth. .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 1st modification of 8th Embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 (A) is an explanatory view showing a main part of the optical information reading device according to the third modification of the eighth embodiment
  • FIG. 32 (B) is an X3-X3 cross section of FIG. 32 (A). Is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing.
  • FIG. 42 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a continuously captured image in which a decodeable code image is detected, and FIG. 42 (A) shows a state in which the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is less than a predetermined range, and FIG. 42 (B) shows. Indicates a state in which the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is larger than that of FIG. 42 (A) but less than the predetermined range, and FIG. 42 (C) shows that the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is the above. Indicates a state of being above a predetermined range.
  • FIG. 43 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a continuously captured image in which a code image is detected, FIG.
  • FIG. 43 (A) shows a state in which the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is less than a predetermined range
  • FIG. 43 (B) is an image capture.
  • a state in which the range of the code image occupied in the image is larger than that of FIG. 43 (A) but less than the predetermined range is shown
  • FIG. 43 (C) shows that the rest of the code image in the undecodable captured image is the above. Indicates a state of being above a predetermined range.
  • 45 (A) shows the state that the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is less than a predetermined range, and decoding has failed.
  • 45 (B) shows a state in which the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is larger than that of FIG. 45 (A) but less than the above-mentioned predetermined range, and decoding fails.
  • FIG. 45 (C) shows. , The range of the code image occupied in the captured image is equal to or more than the above-mentioned predetermined range and decoding has failed.
  • FIG. 45 (D) shows that the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is less than the above-mentioned predetermined range. Indicates the state in which decoding is successful.
  • FIG. 56 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the marker light is irradiated to the QR code Cf, and FIG.
  • FIG. 56 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the marker light deviates from the QR code Cf.
  • 56 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the QR code Cg is irradiated with the marker light. It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in 16th Embodiment.
  • FIG. 58 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the marker light is irradiated to the cord region
  • FIG. 58 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the marker light is irradiated to the cord peripheral region.
  • FIG. 58 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the marker light is out of the cord peripheral region.
  • FIG. 59 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a code peripheral region when the size of the information code occupying the captured image is large
  • FIG. 59 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the code peripheral region when the size of the information code occupying the captured image is small. It is explanatory drawing explaining the code peripheral area in the case of. It is explanatory drawing explaining the table which the code ratio and the peripheral distance are related. It is a timing chart explaining the conventional reading cycle. It is explanatory drawing explaining the position of a part image with respect to the captured image in 17th Embodiment, FIG. 62 (A) shows the captured image, and FIG. 62 (B) is with respect to the captured image of FIG. 62 (A). Shows some images to be set.
  • FIG. 67A shows the state which the edge part is inserted between the outer protection part and the inner protection part
  • FIG. 67 (C) shows the state in which the bonded portion is adhered to the bonded portion.
  • the optical information reading device 10 is an information code that optically and non-contactly reads an information code such as a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code displayed on a display surface of an object to be read. It is configured as a reader.
  • the one-dimensional code for example, a so-called bar code composed of JAN code, EAN, UPC, ITF code, CODE39, CODE128, NW-7, etc. is assumed.
  • the two-dimensional code for example, a square information code such as a QR code, a data matrix code, a maxi code, or an Aztec code is assumed.
  • the optical information reading device 10 has an outer shell formed by a housing 11 formed by assembling an upper case 11a and a lower case 11b made of a synthetic resin such as ABS resin, and the housing 11
  • a circuit unit 20a made of various electric parts and the like is mounted and housed on a circuit board 20 and the like.
  • the housing 11 is integrally and continuously formed with the reading unit 12 on which the reading port 50 is formed, and is gripped by the user when the reading port 50 is directed toward the information code. It includes a grip portion 13.
  • the grip portion 13 is a body portion formed so as to be easily gripped by the user, and has a longitudinal LT as shown in FIG.
  • the reading unit 12 is integrally and continuously from the end portion 13 TIP (that is, the end portion on the tip end side) on one side of the longitudinal LT of the grip portion 13.
  • the extension end portion 12a extending diagonally downward while being slightly curved from the direction LT is provided.
  • the extending end portion 12a is provided with a reading port 50 as an optical passage for reading the information code.
  • the reading unit 12 is integrally connected to the gripping unit 13. That is, when viewed from the lateral direction, the housing 11 is formed in a neck-bent shape in which the required portion on the tip end side where the reading port 50 is formed is greatly tilted forward diagonally downward, as shown in FIG. ..
  • diagonally downward means having an oblique angle ⁇ with respect to the longitudinal direction LT, and downward means when the user grips the grip portion 13 in a normal gripping method for reading a code ( (See FIGS. 2 and 3), the reading unit 12 points in the downward direction.
  • the angle of bending diagonally downward is set to a desired value capable of ensuring the required intensity of the illumination light with respect to the longitudinal LT and suppressing specular reflection caused by the illumination light.
  • the information code C displayed on the display surface R of the object is displayed in a state where the user grips the grip portion 13 from the upper case 11a side so as to be sandwiched between the fingers. It makes it easier to point the reading port 50.
  • a cable mounting portion 14 is formed on the other end side of the housing 11 (the other side (hand side) of the grip portion 13 in the longitudinal direction LT).
  • the housing 11 is formed of, for example, a resin material into a tubular shape
  • the housing 11 is located on the tip side of the housing 11 from the portion corresponding to the tip end 13 TIP of the longitudinal LT of the grip portion 13.
  • the portion (that is, the tubular portion corresponding to the reading portion 12) is curved along the diagonally downward direction, that is, the entire portion is curved and processed so as to form a housing 11 bent in a dogleg shape. You may.
  • the grip portion 13 and the reading portion 12 may be formed as linear tubular members, and they may be connected (connected) to each other so as to form the above-mentioned "V" -shaped housing 11. ..
  • the joint between the grip portion 13 and the reading portion 12 may have a structure that is gradually curved as in the embodiment (a "dogleg" shape having a rounded curved portion MG), or a mutual structure.
  • Cylindrical members (13, 12) may be connected (connected) so as to have an unrounded bend that intersects linearly at an obtuse angle with each other.
  • the peripheral edge 51 constituting the reading port 50 is the farthest (that is, the farthest) from the grip portion 13 in the longitudinal direction LT.
  • the one side edge 52 (located on the tip side) is the lower bottom, and the other side edge 53, which is the edge facing the one side edge 52 and is shorter than the one side edge 52, is the upper bottom. It is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape. More specifically, the peripheral edge 51 is formed in a substantially isosceles trapezoidal shape so that the legs 54 and 55 have symmetrical shapes.
  • the opening region (hereinafter, also referred to as the first opening region S1) that is long in one direction near the one-side edge portion 52 is an information code that is long in one direction, that is, one-dimensional. It can be used as an opening area for reading the code.
  • a rectangular opening region (hereinafter, also referred to as a second opening region S2) having a part of the one side edge portion 52 and the other side edge portion 53 as opposite sides is defined as a square information code, that is, two-dimensional. It can be used as an opening area for reading the code.
  • the one side edge portion 52 is provided with a wall portion 56 that projects in a thin plate shape along the diagonally downward portion.
  • this wall portion 56 only one side edge portion 52 of the peripheral edge 51 is projected obliquely downward with its thickness, and the protrusion length H from the one side edge portion 52 to the protruding end portion 56a is the protruding end portion 56a. Is formed so as to have a length corresponding to a distance suitable for imaging of the information code C displayed on the display surface R in contact with the above.
  • the wall portion 56 has, for example, such that the protruding length H becomes the best focus or approaches the best focus with respect to the imaging of the information code C displayed on the display surface R in which the protruding end portion 56a is in contact. , Is formed.
  • the wall portion 56 does not necessarily have to follow the diagonally downward direction, and conforms to the diagonally downward direction, and if the conditions relating to the length are satisfied, the angle of the diagonally downward direction with respect to the longitudinal direction is satisfied. May be a wall structure in which a predetermined value is adjusted along the longitudinal direction.
  • the protruding end portion 56a of the wall portion 56 is viewed from the user with the information code C.
  • the reflected light from the information code C can be taken in.
  • the circuit unit 20a housed in the housing 11 mainly includes an optical system such as an illumination light source 21, a light receiving sensor 28, and an imaging lens 27, a memory 35, and a control circuit 40. It is equipped with a microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "microcomputer") system.
  • microcomputer hereinafter referred to as "microcomputer"
  • the optical system is divided into a floodlight optical system and a light receiving optical system.
  • the illumination light source 21 constituting the floodlight optical system functions as an illumination unit capable of emitting illumination light Lf, and is composed of, for example, a red LED 21a and a lens 21b provided on the emission side of the LED 21a.
  • the illumination light source 21 is arranged so as to irradiate the illumination light Lf so as to be inclined with respect to the imaging optical axis L2. This is because if the illumination light Lf is irradiated parallel to the imaging optical axis L2, specular reflection occurs.
  • FIG. 5 conceptually shows an example of irradiating the illumination light Lf through the reading port 50 toward the display surface R on which the information code C is displayed.
  • the light receiving optical system is composed of a light receiving sensor 28, an imaging lens 27, a reflecting mirror (not shown), and the like.
  • the light receiving sensor 28 is configured as an area sensor in which light receiving elements, which are solid-state imaging elements such as C-MOS and CCD, are arranged two-dimensionally, and has a light receiving surface 28a as a rectangular light receiving region. It is configured.
  • the light receiving sensor 28 is mounted on the circuit board 20 so as to be able to receive the incident light incident through the reading port 50, the protective plate 26, and the imaging lens 27.
  • the imaging lens 27 functions as an imaging optical system capable of condensing incident light incident from the outside through the reading port 50 and forming an image on the light receiving surface 28a of the light receiving sensor 28.
  • the imaging lens 27 does not have the imaging optical axis L2 orthogonal to the display surface R when the protruding end portion 56a is brought into contact with the display surface R.
  • the imaging lens 27 has, as shown in FIG. 4B,
  • the imaging field of view AR in the X2-X2 cross section of FIG. 1 of the light receiving sensor 28 having the rectangular light receiving surface 28a has a trapezoidal shape with a gap of about 5 mm from the peripheral edge 51 and slightly narrower than the peripheral edge 51. Have been placed. Then, the imaging lens 27 prevents the illumination light source 21 from entering the folded field of view of the imaging system from the display surface R (the imaging range imaged by being reflected by the display surface R).
  • the light receiving surface of the light receiving sensor 28 is arranged so as to be eccentric by shifting in a direction away from the illumination light source 21 (left direction in FIG. 1).
  • the light receiving sensor 28, the imaging lens 27, and the like can correspond to an example of the “imaging unit”.
  • the microcomputer system includes an amplifier circuit 31, an A / D conversion circuit 33, a memory 35, an address generation circuit 36, a synchronization signal generation circuit 38, a control circuit 40, a trigger switch 42, a buzzer 44, a vibrator 45, a light emitting unit 46, and a communication interface 48. It is composed of etc. As the name implies, this microcomputer system is composed mainly of a control circuit 40 and a memory 35 that can function as a microcomputer (information processing device), and hardware the image signal of the information code captured by the above-mentioned optical system. It can process signals in terms of hardware and software. The control circuit 40 also controls the entire system of the optical information reading device 10.
  • the image signal (analog signal) output from the light receiving sensor 28 of the optical system is amplified by a predetermined gain by being input to the amplifier circuit 31, and then input to the A / D conversion circuit 33 from the analog signal. Converted to a digital signal. Then, when the digitized image signal, that is, image data (image information) is input to the memory 35, it is stored in the image data storage area.
  • the synchronization signal generation circuit 38 is configured to be capable of generating a synchronization signal for the light receiving sensor 28 and the address generation circuit 36, and the address generation circuit 36 is based on the synchronization signal supplied from the synchronization signal generation circuit 38. Therefore, the storage address of the image data stored in the memory 35 can be generated.
  • the memory 35 is a semiconductor memory device, and for example, a RAM (DRAM, SRAM, etc.) or a ROM (EPROM, EEPROM, etc.) corresponds to this.
  • the RAM of the memory 35 is configured to be able to secure a work area and a read condition table used by the control circuit 40 at each process such as arithmetic operation and logical operation. ..
  • the ROM stores in advance a system program or the like capable of controlling each hardware such as the illumination light source 21 and the light receiving sensor 28.
  • the control circuit 40 is composed of a computer system capable of controlling the entire optical information reading device 10, includes a CPU, a system bus, an input / output interface, and the like, and constitutes an information processing device together with a memory 35. Therefore, the control circuit 40 has an information processing function provided by the information processing device.
  • the control circuit 40 is configured to be connectable to various input / output devices (peripheral devices) via a built-in input / output interface. In the case of this embodiment, the trigger switch 42, the buzzer 44, the vibrator 45, and light emission.
  • the unit 46, the communication interface 48, and the like are connected.
  • the control circuit 40 performs drive control, lighting of the light emitting unit 46, non-lighting, and communication control of the communication interface 48 that enables communication with an external device.
  • the control circuit 40 that is, the computer system described above performs the reading process as follows.
  • the protruding end portion 56a of the wall portion 56 When reading the barcode C1 as a one-dimensional code long in one direction, the protruding end portion 56a of the wall portion 56 is brought into contact with the position of the display surface R near the back side of the barcode C1 to be brought into contact with FIG. 6 (A). ), The barcode C1 can be imaged through the first opening region S1. Further, even when the QR code C2 is read as a two-dimensional code, the protruding end portion 56a of the wall portion 56 is brought into contact with the position of the display surface R near the back side of the QR code C2 to be shown in FIG. 6 (B). As described above, the QR code C2 can be imaged through the second opening region S2.
  • the illumination light source Illumination light Lf is emitted from 21 through the reading port 50, and the reflected light Lr reflected by the information code C is received by the light receiving sensor 28 via the reading port 50.
  • the illumination light Lf is irradiated in this way, the light does not leak because the protruding end portion 56a of the wall portion 56 is in contact with the display surface R, so that the external light from the back side as seen from the user.
  • the code image corresponding to the information code C among the image data is known.
  • Decoding processing reading processing
  • the character data or the like encoded as the information code C is decoded.
  • At least one of the ringing of the buzzer 44, the vibration of the vibrator 45, the light emission of the light emitting unit 46, and the like is performed as the processing of the notification unit for notifying the success of the decoding. If the decoding is successful based on the image data generated based on a part of the signals output from the light receiving sensor 28, the remaining signals are unnecessary. In this case, by interrupting the processing after the generation of the image data based on the remaining signal, not only the processing load related to decoding (optical reading) can be reduced, but also the processing time can be shortened.
  • the housing 11 emits the illumination light Lf from the illumination light source 21 and emits the light from the information code C into the housing 11. It includes a reading unit 12 in which a reading port 50 to be introduced is formed, and a gripping unit 13 that is gripped when the reading port 50 is directed toward the information code C.
  • the reading unit 12 is gently curved from the tip of the grip portion 13 on one side in the longitudinal direction LT, extends continuously and diagonally downward, and is integrally connected to the grip portion 13.
  • the reading port 50 is located at the extending end 12a of the reading unit 12. Of the peripheral edge 51 of the reading port 50, the one side edge portion 52 farthest from the grip portion 13 (that is, the farthest and located on the tip side) is provided with a wall portion 56 projecting diagonally downward.
  • the wall portion 56 is located behind the information code C when viewed from the user who grips the grip portion 13. Since the user himself / herself is located on the front side of the information code C, it is possible to make it difficult to image the external light reflected by the information code C or the like without impairing the visibility of the information code C. Further, since the reflected light from the information code C or the like by the illumination light Lf passing through the reading port 50 is less likely to be reflected by the wall portion 56 to the back side of the information code C, the direction in which the reading port 50 is directed (the back side). It is possible to suppress the glare felt by a person in the direction corresponding to).
  • the protruding end portion 56a which is the tip end side of the wall portion 56, is brought into contact with the display surface R, the influence of external light and the glare felt by surrounding people can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, when reading the information code C, it is possible to realize an optical information reading device 10 capable of suppressing the influence of external light and the glare felt by surrounding people without impairing the visibility of the information code C. ..
  • the wall portion 56 has a protruding length H from the one side edge portion 52 to the protruding end portion 56a at a distance suitable for imaging the information code C displayed on the display surface R in which the protruding end portion 56a is in contact. It is formed so as to have a corresponding length.
  • the information code C suitable for reading can be imaged by directing the reading port 50 toward the information code C so that the protruding end portion 56a is in contact with the display surface R, so that the reading success rate of the information code C is increased. be able to.
  • the imaging lens 27 is arranged so as to be displaced from the light receiving surface of the light receiving sensor 28 in a direction away from the illumination light source 21, it becomes difficult for the illumination light source 21 to enter the folded field from the display surface R. Therefore, it is possible to suppress specular reflection caused by illumination light.
  • the one side edge portion 52 and the wall portion 56 are formed so as to have an arc shape when the reading port 50 is viewed in a plan view, as illustrated in FIG. May be good. That is, the peripheral edge 51 may be formed so that at least a part thereof has an arc shape when the reading port 50 is viewed in a plan view.
  • the imaging field AR at the position corresponding to the X2-X2 cross section of FIG. 1 is a wall as illustrated in FIG. 8 (A). It may be arranged so that the inner surface of the portion 56 is the imaging range. Further, as a third modification of the first embodiment, the imaging lens 27 or the like is at a position corresponding to the X2-X2 cross section of FIG. 1 even when the wall portion 56 is formed in an arc shape as described above. As illustrated in FIG. 8B, the imaging field AR may be arranged so that at least a part of the inner surface of the arcuate wall portion 56 is the imaging range.
  • the optical information reading device according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.
  • the shape of the reading unit 12 in the vicinity of the reading port 50 is mainly different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the components substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the peripheral edge 51 of the reading port 50 is provided with a pair of facing portions 57a and 57b facing each other via the reading port 50 and connected to the wall portion 56, respectively.
  • the facing portion 57a projects the leg 54 diagonally downward with its thickness, and the protrusion length becomes longer as it gets closer to the one side edge portion 52, and the protrusion length becomes the wall portion 56 in the vicinity of the one side edge portion 52. It is formed so as to be equal to the protrusion length H of.
  • the leg 55 is projected diagonally downward with its thickness, and the protruding length becomes longer as it gets closer to the one side edge portion 52, and the protruding length becomes a wall in the vicinity of the one side edge portion 52. It is formed so as to be equal to the protruding length H of the portion 56. That is, in the present embodiment, the wall portion having a substantially U-shaped cross section is formed so as to project diagonally downward from the peripheral edge 51.
  • the facing portions 57a and 57b are symmetrically formed so that the width becomes narrower toward the protruding end side.
  • the wall portion 56 and the pair of facing portions 57a and 57b are provided in this way, the wall portion 56 is reinforced by utilizing the pair of facing portions 57a and 57b, and only the influence of the external light from the back side is obtained. It is also possible to suppress the influence of external light from the left and right directions.
  • the pair of facing portions 57a and 57b are substantially parallel to each other when the reading port 50 is formed so as to open in a square shape, as illustrated in FIG. It may be formed so as to be.
  • the imaging lens 27 and the like are X2-X2 in FIG.
  • the imaging field of view AR at a position corresponding to the cross section may be arranged so that the inner surface of the wall portion 56 is the imaging range, as illustrated in FIG. 12 (A).
  • the imaging lens 27 and the like have an X2-X2 cross section of FIG.
  • the imaging field of view AR at the position corresponding to may be arranged so that the inner surface of the wall portion 56 is the imaging range as illustrated in FIG. 12 (B).
  • the one side edge portion 52 and the wall portion 56 have an arc shape when the reading port 50 is viewed in a plan view, as illustrated in FIG. 13 (A). May be formed in. That is, the peripheral edge 51 may be formed so that at least a part thereof has an arc shape when the reading port 50 is viewed in a plan view.
  • the pair of facing portions 57a and 57b are formed in an arc shape as described above when the wall portions 56 are formed in an arc shape as illustrated in FIG. 13B. It may be formed so as to be substantially parallel to each other.
  • the imaging lens 27 and the like have the X2-X2 cross section of FIG. 1 even when the one side edge portion 52 and the wall portion 56 are formed in an arc shape as described above. As illustrated in FIG. 14A, the imaging field of view AR at the position corresponding to the above may be arranged so that the inner surface of the arcuate wall portion 56 is the imaging range. Further, as a seventh modification of the second embodiment, in the imaging lens 27 and the like, as described above, the one side edge portion 52 and the wall portion 56 are formed in an arc shape, and the pair of facing portions 57a and 57b are mutually formed.
  • the imaging field of view AR at the position corresponding to the X2-X2 cross section of FIG. 1 covers the inner surface of the arcuate wall portion 56 as illustrated in FIG. 14 (B). It may be arranged so as to cover the imaging range.
  • the optical information reading device according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
  • the irradiation direction of the illumination light Lf emitted from the illumination light source 21 is mainly different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the components substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the angle of the illumination light Lf with respect to the display surface R that is, the angle of inclination between the display surface R and the illumination light axis L1 is close to 90 °
  • the specular reflection caused by the illumination light Lf tends to affect the reading.
  • the angle in the irradiation direction is simply reduced, it becomes difficult for the illumination light Lf to irradiate the information code C with the reading port 50 directed.
  • the illumination light source 21 is arranged so as to irradiate the illumination light Lf toward the inner surface 56b of the wall portion 56.
  • the illumination light Lf emitted from the illumination light source 21 in a state where the protruding end portion 56a is in contact with the position of the display surface R near the back side of the information code C passes through the reading port 50 and then the wall portion.
  • the information code C is irradiated by reflecting on the inner surface 56b of 56.
  • the illumination light source 21 by arranging the illumination light source 21 so that the illumination light Lf is emitted toward the inner surface 56b of the wall portion 56 through the reading port 50, the information code C that brings the wall portion 56 closer is the wall portion. Since it is illuminated by the reflected light reflected by 56, it is possible to suppress the influence of the mirror surface reflection caused by the illumination light Lf on the reading of the information code C while ensuring the necessary illuminance.
  • the fourth embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that a marker light irradiation unit for irradiating a marker light for indicating the center of the imaging field AR is provided. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the components substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the marker light irradiation unit 29 that irradiates the circular marker light Lm for indicating the center of the imaging field AR (imaging optical axis L2) through the reading port 50. , Is provided in the housing 11.
  • the marker light irradiation unit 29 includes a marker light source 29a, an aperture 29b, a marker lens 29c, and the like, and while reducing the angle difference between the marker optical axis L3 of the marker light Lm and the imaging optical axis L2, the marker light source 29a Is arranged so as to be close to the light receiving sensor 28.
  • the illumination light Lf and the marker light Lm are alternately irradiated in a state where the information code C can be read, and the user can use the illumination light Lf and the marker light Lm. Is visually recognized as being irradiated at the same time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, red is adopted as the color of the illumination light Lf, and green, which has a wavelength close to 555 nm, which is the maximum visual sensitivity, is adopted as the color of the marker light Lm in consideration of Color Universal Design. ing.
  • the colors of the illumination light Lf and the marker light Lm described above are merely examples.
  • the marker light Lm when the illumination light Lf is irradiated in white, the marker light Lm may be irradiated in red, or the illumination light Lf is red.
  • the marker light Lm may be irradiated in orange when irradiated with, or the marker light Lm may be irradiated in green when the illumination light Lf is irradiated in white.
  • the marker light irradiation unit 29 When the marker light irradiation unit 29 is provided as described above and the illumination light Lf is irradiated to read the information code C, as shown in FIG. 17, a marker indicating the center of the imaging field AR is shown.
  • the light Lm is visually recognized.
  • the user can easily visually recognize the imaging field AR by the position of the marker light Lm, and can appropriately point the reading port 50 with respect to the information code C.
  • the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment that irradiates the marker light Lm for indicating the center of the imaging field AR can be applied to other embodiments and the like.
  • the fifth embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that a guide portion for facilitating the reading of the two-dimensional code is provided on the wall portion. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the components substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the reading port 50 in the first embodiment is opened in a substantially trapezoidal shape in order to read both the one-dimensional code long in one direction and the two-dimensional code having a square shape.
  • a wall portion 56 is provided on the one side edge portion 52 with the one side edge portion 52 farthest from the grip portion 13 as the lower bottom in the direction LT. Therefore, when the reading port 50 is directed toward the two-dimensional code while looking at the outer surface 56c of the wall portion 56, the two-dimensional code is hidden by the wall portion 56, and the second opening region S2 is accurately defined as the two-dimensional code. It may not be possible to turn to.
  • a guide portion 60 that functions as a guide when reading the two-dimensional code is provided on the outer surface 56c near the protruding end portion 56a of the wall portion 56.
  • the guide unit 60 includes a pair of guides 61 and 62.
  • the guide 61 is formed in a protruding shape at a position where one end of the other side edge 53 is projected perpendicularly to the one side edge 52
  • the guide 62 is formed in a protruding shape.
  • the other end of the portion 53 is formed in a protruding shape at a position projected perpendicularly to the one side edge portion 52.
  • the two-dimensional code is located between the guide 61 and the guide 62, so that the second opening region S2 Can be directed to the two-dimensional code, so that the reading operation of the two-dimensional code can be easily performed.
  • the pair of guides 61 and 62 are not limited to being provided on the wall portion 56 protruding in a thin plate shape, as in the first modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 20 (A). It may be provided on the wall portion 56 shown in FIG. 10, or it may be provided on the wall portion 56 shown in FIG. 11 as in the second modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 20 (B). .. Further, the pair of guides 61 and 62 may be provided on the wall portion 56 shown in FIG. 7 as in the third modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 21 (A), or may be provided on the wall portion 56 shown in FIG. 21 (B). Like the fourth modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the wall portion 56 may be provided, or the fifth modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 21 (C). As described above, it may be provided on the wall portion 56 shown in FIG. 13 (B).
  • the imaging lens 27 and the like may be arranged so that the imaging field of view AR at the position corresponding to the X2-X2 cross section of FIG. 1 has the inner surface of the wall portion 56 as the imaging range as described above. ..
  • the pair of guides 61 and 62 protrudes as in the sixth modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 22 in order to make it easier to imagine the position of the second opening region S2 for reading the two-dimensional code.
  • the guide 61 and the guide 62 may be arranged so as to be closer to the end portion 56a.
  • the pair of guides 61 and 62 is not limited to being formed in a protruding shape so as to be integrated with the outer surface 56c of the wall portion 56, but is formed in a shape that is easy to see by using a notch or the like. It should be done. Further, the pair of guides 61 and 62 may be displayed on the outer surface 56c by printing or the like, or may be displayed by using a light emitting unit such as an LED. Further, by adopting a display unit such as a liquid crystal display as the guide unit 60, the pair of guides 61 and 62 may be displayed by utilizing the display state of the display unit. Further, the above-mentioned various guides 61 and 62 may be provided on the attachment detachably attached to the outer surface 56c of the wall portion 56.
  • the sixth embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that the signal taken from the light receiving sensor 28 and used for the decoding process is selected according to the reading target. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the components substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the light receiving sensor 28 responds to the light received from the information code C taken in through the first opening region S1 and the second opening region S2. Received light according to the state of decoding (reading) the information code based on the signal output from (information code reading mode) and the reception of the reflected light from the one-dimensional code captured through the first opening region S1. A state (one-dimensional code reading mode) in which the one-dimensional code is decoded (read) based on the signal output from the sensor 28 is prepared.
  • the information code reading mode is set by default, and the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 can read the information code including both the one-dimensional code and the two-dimensional code.
  • the control circuit 40 switches to the one-dimensional code reading mode.
  • the reading port 50 is brought into contact with the display surface R on which the one-dimensional code is displayed so that the protruding end portion 56a is brought into contact with the one-dimensional code in the first opening region S1. Not only can the reading port 50 be easily pointed at the position where the one-dimensional code is read, but also the reading target becomes clear, so that the load of the decoding process (reading process) can be reduced and the time can be shortened. it can.
  • the two-dimensional code is decoded based on the signal output from the light receiving sensor 28 in response to the reception of the reflected light from the two-dimensional code taken in through the second opening region S2.
  • a state two-dimensional code reading mode
  • the two-dimensional code is read in the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 in response to a predetermined operation or reading of the information code for mode switching.
  • the reading port 50 may be directed to the two-dimensional code in the second opening region S2 so that the protruding end portion 56a is brought into contact with the display surface R on which the two-dimensional code is displayed.
  • the seventh embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that the imaging center (optical center) P is arranged so as to be located at the center of the first aperture region S1. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the components substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the imaging lens 27 that forms an image of the reflected light from the information code on the light receiving sensor 28 is as shown in FIG.
  • the image formation center P is arranged so as to be located at the center of the first aperture region S1 by adjusting the inclination of the image formation optical axis L2.
  • the illumination light source 21 is configured to irradiate band-shaped light (substantially line-shaped light) as illumination light Lf toward the first opening region S1. There is.
  • the illumination light Lf functions as a guide light, so that the reading port 50 is one-dimensional in the first opening region S1. It's easier to point at the code. As a result, it becomes easier to receive the reflected light Lr from the one-dimensional code directed to the first opening region S1, so that the reading accuracy of the one-dimensional code can be further improved.
  • the illumination light Lf having a rectangular cross section is generated from the illumination light source 21 as in the first modification of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. It may be configured to be irradiated through the second opening region S2.
  • the light receiving sensor 28 can easily receive the reflected light Lr from the two-dimensional code directed to the second opening region S2, so that the reading accuracy of the two-dimensional code can be improved.
  • the illumination light Lf having a rectangular cross section functions as a guide light, it becomes easy to direct the reading port 50 toward the two-dimensional code in the second opening region S2.
  • the light emitting state of the illumination light source 21 may be controlled according to a predetermined input operation. For example, when reading the two-dimensional code in a state where the band-shaped illumination light Lf is irradiated through the first opening region S1, the illumination light Lf may be turned off or the illumination light Lf having a rectangular cross section may be turned off. May be irradiated through the second opening region S2. Further, when reading the one-dimensional code in a state where the illumination light Lf having a rectangular cross section is irradiated through the second opening region S2, the illumination light Lf may be turned off or the band-shaped illumination light Lf may be turned off. May be irradiated through the first opening region S1.
  • the optical information reading device according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
  • the shape and the like of the protective plate provided in the reading port for protecting the image pickup unit and the illumination unit are mainly different from those in the first embodiment.
  • the optical information reader capable of reading a two-dimensional code has a larger opening shape than that of a device capable of reading a one-dimensional code. Therefore, the finger of the user who grips the housing may erroneously touch the protective plate provided in the reading port to protect the imaging unit and the lighting unit. In such a case, there is a problem that the reading performance is deteriorated due to the adhesion of dirt such as sebum to the protective plate.
  • the imaging unit and the lighting unit housed in the housing 211 are provided in the housing 211 having a large opening of the reading port 250.
  • a protective plate 226 is provided on the reading port 250 as a protective member for protection.
  • the protective plate 226 is held by a holding portion 215 provided in the vicinity of the reading port 250 of the housing 211 so as to surround the protective plate 226 from the outer surface side.
  • the protective plate 226 is configured as a plate-shaped member having a predetermined thickness, and is a translucent (light transmissive) plate (for example, light transmissive) capable of transmitting light from the outside of the housing 211 and light from the inside of the housing 211. It is composed of transparent acrylic resin, transparent glass, etc.). As shown in FIG. 28, in the protective plate 226, each portion through which the illumination light is transmitted functions as the first transmission portion 226a and 226b, and the portion through which the reflected light from the information code is transmitted is designated as the second transmission portion 226c. The portion that functions and transmits the marker light functions as the third transmitting portion 226d.
  • the holding portion 215 is formed so that the exposure widths Xa and Xb for exposing both the first transmission portions 226a and 226b, the second transmission portion 226c and the third transmission portion 226d are smaller than the width of the user's finger.
  • FIGS. 29 (A) and 29 (B) show the relationship between the exposure width and the depth to the protective plate 226 (exposure depth: the thickness of the holding portion 215) and the degree of contact of the finger with the protective plate 226.
  • the finger width is 14.1 mm and the finger width is 11.1 mm, and the degree of contact of the finger when the exposure width and the exposure depth are changed is shown. “2” indicates the finger pad.
  • the holding portion 215 is set so that the above-mentioned exposure widths Xa and Xb and the exposure depth approach the contact degree “0” in FIG. 29 (A).
  • the protective plate 226 By holding the protective plate 226 on the holding portion 215 configured in this way, even if a user's finger touches the holding portion 215 when gripping the housing 211, the finger touches both first transmission portions. It becomes difficult to accidentally touch the 226a, 226b, the second transmission portion 226c, and the third transmission portion 226d. For this reason, dirt such as sebum is less likely to adhere to both the first transmission portions 226a and 226b, the second transmission portion 226c, and the third transmission portion 226d, so that the reading performance deteriorates due to the stains adhering to the protective plate 226. It can be suppressed.
  • both first transmission portions 226a and 226b, second transmission portion 226c, and third transmission portion 226d are exposed ports 215a to 215d, respectively, as in the first modification of the present embodiment shown in FIG. It may be formed so as to be individually exposed via.
  • the pair of first transmission portions 226a and 226b, the second transmission portion 226c, and the third transmission portion 226d are individually separated as in the second modification of the present embodiment shown in FIG. They may be individually held by the holding unit 215.
  • FIG. 32 (A) is an explanatory view showing a main part of the optical information reading device according to the third modification of the eighth embodiment
  • FIG. 32 (B) is an X3-X3 cross section of FIG. 32 (A). Is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing.
  • the protective plate 226 includes a first annular portion 226e and a first transparent portion 226b that project outward so as to surround the first transmission portion 226a in an annular shape.
  • a third annular portion 226h and a third annular portion 226h projecting outward may be formed respectively.
  • the optical information reading device according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
  • the trigger switch 42 is abolished and the marker light irradiation unit 29 is adopted to change the irradiation conditions of the illumination light according to the imaging state of the marker light Lm. Different from.
  • the trigger switch 42 is abolished and the marker light irradiation unit 29 is adopted, and in the reading process performed by the control circuit 40, the irradiation conditions of the illumination light are set according to the imaging state of the marker light Lm. change. This is because if the marker light Lm is imaged, it can be estimated that the marker light Lm is reflected by the information code or the like to which the reading port 50 is directed.
  • step S101 the determination process of step S101 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the captured image is changed.
  • the image captured by the imaging unit does not change, so that the determination of No is repeated in step S101, and the marker light Lm.
  • the control circuit 40 or the like that performs the determination process in step S101 may correspond to an example of the “image change determination unit”.
  • the marker light is controlled by the control circuit 40 and the marker light is emitted from the marker light irradiation unit 29. Lm is irradiated (S103).
  • the image acquisition process for detecting the marker light in step S105 is performed, and the image pickup unit acquires the captured image for detecting the marker light Lm.
  • the determination process of step S107 it is determined whether or not the marker light Lm is in the marker imaging state in which the image captured by the imaging unit is imaged in a predetermined state.
  • the predetermined state for example, when the marker light Lm is circular, an imaging state in which the diameter of the imaged marker light Lm is equal to or larger than a predetermined value is adopted.
  • the control circuit 40 or the like that performs the determination process in step S107 may correspond to an example of the “marker imaging determination unit”.
  • the reading port 50 is directed to a nearby information code or a display surface to which the information code is attached, the marker light Lm irradiated is reflected by the information code, the display surface, or the like.
  • the illumination light irradiation process in step S109 is performed.
  • the illumination unit is controlled by the control circuit 40, and the illumination light is emitted from at least one of the first illumination unit 21 and the second illumination unit 22. Therefore, in the decoding image acquisition process performed in step S111, the captured image is captured and acquired by the imaging unit while being irradiated with the illumination light.
  • step S113 a process for decoding the information code included in the captured image is performed, and when this decoding process succeeds (Yes in S115), the main reading process ends, and as described above. Processing or the like using the obtained decoding result is performed. On the other hand, if the decoding process fails (No in S115), the process from step S101 is performed.
  • the control circuit 40 can correspond to an example of the “lighting control unit”.
  • the reading port 50 is not directed to the information code or the display surface to which the information code is attached and the marker light is irradiated toward a distant space, the reflected light of the marker light Lm cannot be imaged. Therefore, it is determined that the marker is not in the imaging state (No in S107). In this case, the illumination light irradiation is stopped (S117) in which the illumination light is not irradiated, the captured image is captured by the imaging unit without being irradiated with the illumination light (S111), and the captured image is decoded. It is done (S113).
  • the reading port 50 when the reading port 50 is directed to a screen or the like on which an information code is displayed, the screen itself emits light, so that the reflected light of the marker light Lm cannot be easily recognized and imaged. It is determined that it is not (No in S107). In this way, when the information code displayed on the screen is read, the illumination light irradiation is stopped (S117), but since the screen itself is emitting light, the information code can be imaged decodably.
  • the marker light irradiation unit 29 that irradiates the marker light Lm indicating the imaging field of view by the imaging unit is provided, and the image pickup unit performs the reading process.
  • the image pickup unit performs the reading process.
  • the captured image it is determined whether or not the marker light Lm is in the marker imaging state in which the marker light Lm is imaged in a predetermined state, and the illumination unit is controlled according to the determination result.
  • the reading port 50 When the reading port 50 is not directed to the display surface or the like to which the information code is attached, the irradiated marker light Lm is not reflected by the display surface or the like, so that the marker light Lm is not imaged. That is, since it is not necessary to irradiate the illumination light when the marker light Lm is not imaged, it is possible to suppress the irradiation of unnecessary illumination light by controlling the illumination unit according to the above determination result.
  • step S107 when it is determined in the determination process of step S107 that the marker is in the imaging state (Yes in S107), the illumination unit is controlled so that the illumination light is irradiated, and it is determined that the marker is not in the imaging state. (No in S107), the illumination unit is controlled so as to stop the irradiation of the illumination light.
  • the illumination unit is controlled so as to stop the irradiation of the illumination light.
  • the marker light irradiation unit 29 irradiates the marker light Lm when it is determined that the image captured by the image pickup unit has changed (Yes in S101).
  • the optical information reading device 10 is placed on a desk or the like, that is, when it is not in use, the image captured by the imaging unit does not change and the marker light Lm is not irradiated, so that unnecessary illumination light is emitted. Irradiation can be suppressed more reliably.
  • the illumination unit When it is determined that the marker imaging state is present (Yes in S107), the illumination unit is controlled so that the illumination light is irradiated, and when it is determined that the marker imaging state is not present (No in S107), the marker imaging state is determined.
  • the illumination unit may be controlled so that the illumination light is irradiated in a state where it is darker than the case where it is determined to be. Even in this way, it is possible to suppress the irradiation of unnecessarily bright illumination light.
  • the marker light Lm is determined in the range in the captured image where the marker light Lm may be captured. It may be determined whether or not the marker image is captured in a predetermined state. For example, when the marker light Lm indicates the center of the imaging field of view, it may be determined whether or not the marker imaging state is performed only in the central range of the captured image. As a result, it is possible to limit the range for determining whether or not the captured image is in the marker imaging state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load required for the determination process and improve the processing speed. Further, when the captured image obtained by capturing the marker light Lm is sequentially stored in the memory 35, the amount of stored information can be reduced.
  • the marker light Lm is not limited to being irradiated in a circular shape so as to indicate the center of the imaging field of view by the imaging unit, and is, for example, irradiated so as to indicate both the four corners and the center of the imaging field of view by the imaging unit. May be good.
  • the tenth embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that when a plurality of decoding results can be obtained from one captured image, the decoding result to be output is selected from the plurality of decoding results.
  • an optical information reading device capable of reading both a one-dimensional code and a two-dimensional code is increasing at retail stores and the like.
  • a two-dimensional code for providing the product information may be displayed on the product.
  • an optical information reading device that reads a two-dimensional code using an area sensor or the like has a planar reading field of view (imaging field of view). Therefore, when a plurality of information codes are included in the reading field of view at the time of accounting, the information code unrelated to the accounting may be unintentionally read.
  • the characteristic character string included in the predetermined URL is adopted as the selection determination information, and the decoding result not including this characteristic character string is the decoding result to be output. Is selected as.
  • a scheme name such as "http:” or "https:” and a delimiter colon (hereinafter, simply referred to as a scheme name or the like) attached to the end of the scheme name are assumed, and the memory 35 is preliminarily used. It is remembered in.
  • step S201 When the reading process is started in response to a predetermined operation or the like, the image pickup process of step S201 shown in FIG. An image is taken to decode the code. Subsequently, in the decoding process shown in step S203, a process for decoding the information code included in the captured image is performed. Then, when one decoding result is obtained from the captured image (No in S205), the decoding result is output to the outside via the communication interface 48 (S209).
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the decoding process can correspond to an example of the "decoding unit".
  • the selection process in step S207 is performed.
  • the decoding result that does not include the selection determination information for example, the characteristic character string included in the predetermined URL
  • the bar code Ca for accounting in which the product price information and the like are recorded and the QR code Cb for providing the product information in which the URL of the site introducing the product is recorded are simultaneously imaged.
  • the decoding result of the barcode Ca is selected as the decoding result to be output.
  • the decoding result selected in this way is output to the outside via the communication interface 48 (S209).
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the selection process may correspond to an example of the “selection unit”.
  • the optical information reading device 10 in the reading process, a decoding process for decoding an information code from the captured image captured by the imaging unit is performed, and a plurality of information codes are used.
  • the decoding results to be output are selected by the selection process. Then, in the above selection process, the decoding result to be output is selected based on whether or not the selection determination information registered in advance is included in the decoding result.
  • the selection determination can be performed by selecting the decoding result including the selection determination information from the plurality of decoding results. It is possible to prevent the decoding result of the non-reading information code that does not include the information from being output. Further, for example, when the information code to be excluded from reading includes the selection determination information, the selection can be made by selecting the decoding result that does not include the selection determination information from the plurality of decoding results. It is possible to prevent the decoding result of the non-reading information code including the determination information from being output.
  • the decoding result to be output can be appropriately selected, and the decoding result of the information code read unintentionally can be selected. You can limit the output.
  • the selection determination information is registered as a characteristic character string included in a predetermined URL. Therefore, when the URL is recorded in the information code to be excluded from the reading target, it is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code from being output. On the other hand, when the URL is recorded in the information code to be read, it is possible to prevent the decoding result including the URL from being output.
  • the selection determination information is not limited to being set in a characteristic character string included in a predetermined URL such as a scheme name such as "http:” or "https:”, for example, "file:” or It may be set to another scheme name such as "mail to:”. Further, the selection determination information may be distinguished by, for example, "http:” and “https:” and “file:” and "mailto:”. In this case, a protocol such as "file:” may be used for a two-dimensional code for business use, so only the two-dimensional code for guiding to the website by the "http:” or "https:” protocol is read. By targeting the output restriction, it is possible to avoid a decrease in business efficiency.
  • the selection determination information may be set in a characteristic character string included in a predetermined address such as an IP address.
  • a characteristic character string included in a predetermined address such as an IP address.
  • the above selection determination information may be set to, for example, a top-level domain such as ".com” or “.jp” and a dot of the delimiter attached immediately before the top-level domain.
  • a top-level domain such as ".com” or “.jp”
  • a dot of the delimiter attached immediately before the top-level domain.
  • the selection determination information may be set according to, for example, a combination of 1 or 2 or more predetermined number strings, or may be set according to a combination of 1 or 2 or more predetermined character strings. Good.
  • the decoding result to be output may be selected based on the code type of the information code that has been successfully decoded. For example, the decoding result of the barcode can be selected, and the decoding result of the information code of the code type other than the barcode can be prevented from being selected.
  • the decoding result decoded from the information code of the above-mentioned predetermined code type can be selected from a plurality of decoding results, and the above-mentioned predetermined code type can be used. It is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code not to be read from being output. Even in this way, even when multiple decoding results are obtained because multiple information codes are captured at the same time, the decoding results to be output can be appropriately selected and read unintentionally. It is possible to limit the output of the decoding result of the information code.
  • the eleventh embodiment is mainly different from the tenth embodiment in that duplicate processing is suppressed when two or more same decoding results are obtained from one captured image.
  • the payment is double-processed based on the decoded result read.
  • the decoding result can also include the code type of the read information code.
  • the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
  • the image pickup process of step S301 shown in FIG. An image is taken to decode the code.
  • the determination process shown in step S303 it is determined whether or not the captured image has a code image that can be recognized as an information code.
  • the code image acquisition process is performed in step S305, and one code image is extracted and acquired from the captured image.
  • step S307 the code image acquired as described above is decoded, and if the decoding process is successful, the decoding result is obtained. Subsequently, the data reference process shown in step S309 is performed, and the memory 35 is referred to with respect to the accumulated decoding results as described later.
  • step S311 it is determined whether or not the data matching the decoding result obtained in the decoding process is stored in the memory 35.
  • the matching decoding result is not stored (No in S311)
  • the decoding result is output to a higher-level device or the like as a predetermined process (S315), and the decoding result is stored in the memory 35. (S317).
  • the control circuit 40 that performs the determination process in step S311 can correspond to an example of the "decoding result same / different determination unit" that once determines whether or not the same decoding result is obtained.
  • the control circuit 40 that performs the process (S315) of outputting the decoding result can correspond to an example of a "processing unit" for performing a predetermined process using the decoding result.
  • step S319 it is determined whether or not there is another code image that has not been decoded because the captured image contains two or more code images.
  • the next code image is acquired (S321).
  • decoding processing is performed on the acquired code image (S307), and the memory 35 is referred to with respect to the decoding result (S309).
  • the matching decoding result is read a predetermined number of times in the determination process in step S313. It is determined whether or not the output is within.
  • the reading number is the number of times counted once for one captured image
  • the predetermined reading number is, for example, the decoding result decoded by the captured image captured this time or the previous time. It is determined that the decoding result decoded by the captured image is output within the predetermined reading number, and the decoding result decoded by the captured image captured two times before is output within the predetermined reading number. It is set so that it is determined that there is no such thing.
  • a decoding process for decoding an information code with respect to the captured image captured by the imaging unit is performed, and a plurality of information codes are used.
  • a plurality of decoding results can be obtained from one captured image because they are simultaneously imaged, it is determined whether or not two or more of the same decoding results are obtained. Then, when it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained, the decoding result output processing is performed as a predetermined process for one of the two or more same decoding results.
  • the decoding result is stored as a storage unit together with the decoding time when the decoding process is completed. It is stored in the functioning memory 35 (S317a).
  • the determination shown in step S313a is performed.
  • the decoding result is output to a higher-level device or the like (S315), and when it is less than the predetermined time. (No in S313a), the processing after step S319 is performed without outputting the decoding result.
  • the same decoding result can be used to perform the above-mentioned predetermined processing.
  • the information code in which the data matching the decoded decoding result is stored in the memory 35 the information code is removed from the imaging field of the imaging unit and the imaging field is displayed again.
  • the number of times of entering the inside is counted as the number of imaging times N and it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained
  • the number of imaging times N of the decoding results matching the same decoding result is the predetermined number of times Nth or more. In that case, a predetermined process is performed on the above-mentioned decoding result.
  • the control circuit 40 that counts the number of times of imaging N can correspond to an example of the “counting unit”.
  • the decoding result to be counted is read again (Yes in S311) and the number of imaging times N becomes Nth or more a predetermined number of times (Yes in S325), the decoding result is output to a higher-level device or the like. (S315), after being stored in the memory 35 (S317), the count target setting is cleared (S333).
  • the same decoding is performed by repeating the imaging state in which the information code is put in the imaging field of view and the imaging state in which the information code is removed from the imaging field of view.
  • the above-mentioned predetermined processing can be performed for each of the results.
  • the number of imaging times N is only increased to some extent, and the image is not captured for a moment. It is possible to prevent the above-mentioned predetermined processing from being performed for each of the decoding results.
  • the time when the information code whose data matching the decoded decoding result is stored in the memory 35 is removed from the imaging field of the imaging unit is decoded as the code exclusion time. It is stored in the memory 35 in association with the result, and it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained, and the elapsed time from the code exclusion time of the decoding result matching the same decoding result is predetermined. When the time is longer than that, a predetermined process is performed on the above-mentioned decoding result.
  • the imaging process (S337), the determination of No is repeated in the determination process of step S339 until there is no code image that can be recognized as an information code from this captured image. Then, when the code image is no longer included in the captured image (Yes in S339), the time when the information code targeted for timekeeping is removed from the imaging field of view of the imaging unit is set as the code exclusion time, and the decoding result is set. It is associated and stored in the memory 35 (S341).
  • the information codes are removed from the imaging field of view for a certain period of time and then put back into the imaging field of view, so that the same decoding results are obtained.
  • the above-mentioned predetermined processing can be performed.
  • the optical information reading device 10 includes a posture sensor as a posture detecting unit for detecting the posture of the housing 11 including a gyro sensor and an acceleration sensor, and a detection signal from the posture sensor. In response to this, the control circuit 40 grasps the posture state of the housing 11.
  • the predetermined posture state is set to, for example, a state in which the posture is significantly changed from the posture when decoding is successful.
  • the decoding result Is output to a higher-level device or the like (S315).
  • the reading port 50 since the reading port 50 remains directed to the information code, if it is determined that the posture of the housing 11 is not in the predetermined posture state (No in S313b), the decoding result is not output and the above-mentioned The processing after step S319 is performed.
  • the housing 11 is gripped so as to be in the predetermined posture state, and the same decoding result is obtained for each of the above.
  • a predetermined process can be performed.
  • the twelfth embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that the information code can be easily aimed and read in the reading process that is always performed by eliminating the trigger switch.
  • the operation method is to align the position of the point marker at the center of the reading area and the information code to perform aim reading. ..
  • the operation method is to align the position of the point marker at the center of the reading area and the information code to perform aim reading. ..
  • it is necessary to perform an operation of adjusting to the center position of the area and it is not possible to realize aim reading utilizing a wide reading area.
  • a code image having the same information code is detected in a plurality of continuously captured images continuously captured by the imaging unit, and the detected code image is used as the captured image. It is determined whether or not the code image is a reading target according to the occupied state. Specifically, when the state in which the code image occupies the captured image is a predetermined state, or more specifically, in the present embodiment, when the range of the code image occupying the captured image is equal to or greater than the predetermined range. Determine that the code image is the reading target. This is because the information code that the user intends to read tends to have a range of the code image occupied in the captured image, such as a predetermined range or more.
  • the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
  • the imaging process of step S401 shown in FIG. 41 is performed, and the light receiving sensor 28, the imaging lens 27, and the like function as an imaging unit, whereby the information code is decoded by this imaging unit.
  • the image to be taken is taken.
  • the code image detection process shown in step S403 is performed, and a process for detecting a code image for decoding the information code from the captured image captured by the imaging unit is performed.
  • the captured information code is a QR code (registered trademark)
  • a process of detecting a code image is performed based on a finder pattern (position detection pattern) arranged at each of the three corners of the code area.
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the code image detection process may correspond to an example of the “code image detection unit”.
  • step S409 The process for decoding the information code is performed.
  • the process from step S401 is performed.
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the decoding process can correspond to an example of the "decoding unit".
  • step S415 whether or not the state occupied by the code image in the captured image is a predetermined state, specifically, as described above, the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is a predetermined range. It is judged whether or not it is the above.
  • the reading port 50 since the reading port 50 has just been pointed at the information code C to be read, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), even if the code image of the information code C is imaged so that it can be decoded. If the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is less than the predetermined range, it is determined as No in step S415. In this case, the process from step S401 is performed, and the imaging process for decoding the information code is continued. After that, even if the decoding process of the captured information code code image is successful (Yes in S411), since the reading port 50 is in the process of being brought close to the information code C to be read, for example, FIG.
  • step S415. if the range of the code image occupying the captured image is less than the predetermined range even if it is larger than the previous code image, it is determined as No in step S415. In this case as well, the processing from step S401 is performed, and the imaging process for decoding the information code is continued. That is, a code image having the same information code is detected in a plurality of continuously captured images continuously captured by the imaging unit, and the code image is read according to the state in which the detected code image occupies the captured image. It is judged whether or not it is a target.
  • step S415 is performed. Is determined to be Yes.
  • the decoding result output process shown in step S417 is performed, and the decoding result is output to a higher-level device or the like as a predetermined process using the decoding result.
  • the notification process of step S419 is performed, and the light emitting unit 46 functioning as the notification unit is brought into a predetermined lighting state as a predetermined notification according to the success of the decoding process.
  • the control circuit 40 that performs the process (S417) of outputting the decoding result can correspond to an example of a "processing unit" for performing a predetermined process using the decoding result.
  • the predetermined notification according to the success of the decoding process may be performed by using the sound of the buzzer 44 or the vibration of the vibrator 45.
  • the buzzer 44 or the vibrator 45 is an example of the "notification unit”. Can correspond to.
  • code images having the same information code are detected in a plurality of continuously captured images continuously captured by the imaging unit, and these are detected.
  • the reading target determination unit determines whether or not the code image is the reading target. Then, when the decoding result is obtained by successfully decoding the code image determined to be the reading target (Yes in S411 and S415), the processing unit uses this decoding result to determine. Processing is performed, and a predetermined notification is performed by the notification unit.
  • the code image of the information code can be displayed.
  • a predetermined condition in the present embodiment, the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is equal to or larger than the predetermined range
  • the trigger switch or the like is not used at all times. It is possible to realize an optical information reading device capable of aiming and reading an information code in the reading process to be performed.
  • the state occupied by the code image in the captured image is not limited to the affirmative determination as the predetermined state. For example, when the detected code image is continuously detected for a predetermined time without moving substantially, the state in which the code image occupies the captured image may be positively determined as a predetermined state. Further, in the determination process of step S415, when the length of one side of the detected code image is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, a positive determination may be made as the state occupied by the code image in the captured image is a predetermined state. ..
  • the code image is read.
  • the decoding result can be output assuming that the state occupied by the code image in the captured image is a predetermined state (Yes in S415).
  • the code image is not immediately determined to be out of the reading target, so that the code image can be more accurately read. It can be determined whether or not it is a reading target.
  • step S421 it is determined whether or not the state in which the code image occupies the captured image is a predetermined state.
  • the code image that failed to be decoded is in the above-mentioned predetermined state (Yes in S421), and if the code image has never been successfully decoded (No in S423), the code image is in the above-mentioned predetermined state.
  • the flag Fc indicating that the state has been reached is set to "1" (S425), and the process from step S401 is performed.
  • the decoding result is output.
  • the notification unit such as the light emitting unit 46 is brought into a predetermined notification state (S419).
  • the flag Fc is set to "1" as described above, if the newly captured code image of the same information code is successfully decoded (Yes in S411), the flag Fc of the code image is set to "1". Therefore, it is determined as Yes in the determination process of step S427, the decoding result is output (S417), and the notification unit such as the light emitting unit 46 is in a predetermined notification state (S419).
  • the range of the code image occupying the captured image is the above. It is assumed that the decoding result is not output because it is less than the predetermined range (No in S421). In this case, after that, as shown in FIG. 45 (C), when the code image that cannot be decoded but can be detected by recognizing the finder pattern or the like exceeds the above-mentioned predetermined range in the captured image (Yes, S423 in S421). No), the flag Fc is set to "1" (S425), and thereafter, the process for detecting the code image from the continuously captured images is continued.
  • the decoding result obtained after the determination is used for processing.
  • a predetermined process is performed by the unit, and a predetermined notification is performed by the notification unit.
  • the thirteenth embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that even if a plurality of information codes are imaged at the same time so that they can be decoded, it is easy to output the decoding result of the information code to be read.
  • the information code to be read is decoded. It is necessary to output the result and not to output the decoding result of other information codes.
  • the decoding result of the above one information code is output.
  • the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 47, taking the case of reading the barcode Cd shown in FIG. 46 as an example.
  • the captured image P captured by the imaging unit is 640 pixels ⁇ 480 pixels
  • the reading area Ps is 320 pixels ⁇ 240 pixels. It is set so that P and the center match.
  • step S501 When the reading process is started in response to a predetermined operation or the like, the imaging process of step S501 shown in FIG. 47 is performed, and the captured image P for decoding the information code is captured by the imaging unit. Subsequently, in the decoding process shown in step S503, a process for decoding the information code included in the captured image P is performed, and the process from step S501 is repeated until the decoding is successful (No in S505). ..
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the decoding process in step S503 can correspond to an example of the “decoding unit”.
  • step S507 it is determined in the determination process of step S507 whether or not the image of the information code for which the decoding result is obtained is included in the reading area Ps. To. In the present embodiment, specifically, it is determined whether or not all the images of the information code for which the decoding result is obtained are included in the reading area Ps, and the image of the information code for which the decoding result is obtained is determined. When only a part of the reading area Ps is included, No is determined in step S507, and the processing from step S501 is performed without outputting the decoding result.
  • step S509 the determination process in step S509 is performed.
  • an image of one information code for which the decoding result was obtained is included, and an image of another information code is not included (hereinafter, also referred to as a single code imaging state). It is determined whether or not it is.
  • the reading area Ps includes all of the images of one information code for which the decoding result is obtained, and at least a part of the images of the other information codes. If there is no state, it is determined that the single code imaging state is in effect.
  • the reading port 50 since the reading port 50 is being brought closer to the barcode Cd to be read, as illustrated in FIG. 49, all the images of the barcode Cd to be read are included in the reading area Ps, and the reading area Ps is included. If a part of the barcode Cc image or a part of the barcode Ce image that is not to be read is included in the reading area Ps, it is determined that the reading area is not in the single code imaging state, and No is determined in step S509. Then, the processing from step S501 is performed without outputting the decoding result.
  • the reading port 50 since the reading port 50 has been brought close to the barcode Cd to be read, as illustrated in FIG. 50, all the images of the barcode Cd to be read are included in the reading area Ps, and other information.
  • the single code imaging state is in step S509. Is determined as Yes.
  • the decoding result of the barcode Cd included in the reading area Ps is output to the host device or the like.
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the decoding result output process in step S511 may correspond to an example of the “output unit”.
  • one information code for which a decoding result is obtained for a predetermined reading area Ps provided so as to occupy a part of the captured image P is output (S511).
  • the decoding result of the information code is not output. That is, even if a plurality of information codes are imaged so that they can be decoded, the decoding result of the information code is output only when only the image of the information code to be read is included in the reading area Ps. It is possible to limit the output of the decoding result of the information code read unintentionally, such as the decoding result of another information code captured while the reading port 50 is directed to the information code to be the target.
  • the decoding result of the information code not to be read is not output. Further, even if all the images of the information code not to be read are included in the reading area Ps, if at least a part of the images of the information code to be read is included in the reading area Ps, respectively. The decoding result of is not output. Therefore, even when another information code is arranged near the information code to be read, it is possible to easily output the decoding result of the information code to be read.
  • the read area Ps includes all the images of one information code for which the decoding result is obtained, and the images of other information codes. When not all are included, it may be determined that the single code imaging state is in effect. Further, when the reading area Ps includes at least a part of the image of one information code for which the decoding result is obtained and at least a part of the image of the other information code is not included. , It may be determined that it is in the single code imaging state.
  • step S509 when an information code having a specific pattern arranged at a specific position in a code area where various cells are arranged is targeted for reading, such as an FP pattern of a QR code, the above In the determination process of step S509, it may be determined whether or not the image is in the single code imaging state by using the image of the specific pattern. That is, when the image of the specific pattern of one information code for which the decoding result is obtained is included in the reading area Ps and the image of the specific pattern of another information code is not included, the above-mentioned one information The decoding result of the code may be output.
  • the reading area Ps includes all the images of the specific pattern of the information code for which the decoding result is obtained, and does not include any image of the specific pattern of the other information code.
  • it may be determined that it is in the single code imaging state.
  • the images of all the specific patterns FP1 to FP3 of the QR code Cf are included in the reading area Ps, and the images of the specific patterns FP1 and FP2 of the QR code Cg are included.
  • the state including it is determined that the state is not a single code imaging state.
  • step S509 it can be determined whether or not the image of the information code is included in the predetermined reading area based on the specific pattern of the information code that is easy to recognize, so that the determination can be made easily and accurately. be able to.
  • the 14th embodiment is mainly different from the 4th embodiment in that when the marker light is not captured, the decoding result of the information code located in the decoding target area in the captured image is output.
  • the information code to be read is decoded.
  • the result may be output, and the decoding result of other information codes may not be output.
  • the distributed information code for the coupon is displayed on the screen on a smartphone or the like so as to be adjacent to another information code, the marker light is not imaged, so that the information code for the coupon is decoded. It may not be possible to obtain only the results.
  • the decoding target area Pd is preset in an area on the back side of the entire captured image P when viewed from the user.
  • the designated code type can be set to, for example, EAN-13.
  • the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 54.
  • the imaging process of step S601 shown in FIG. 54 is performed, and the captured image P for decoding the information code is captured by the imaging unit.
  • the marker light detection process of step S603 a process for detecting the marker light Lm from the captured image P is performed, and then in the decoding process of step S605, the information code included in the captured image P is decoded.
  • the process from step S601 is repeated until the process is performed and the decoding is successful (No in S607).
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the decoding process in step S605 may correspond to an example of the “decoding unit”.
  • step S609 it is determined in the determination process of step S609 whether or not a plurality of decoding results are obtained according to the decoding process.
  • the first decoding result output process of step S617 is performed, and all the decodings obtained by the decoding process are performed.
  • the result is output to the host device.
  • the one decoding result is output to a higher-level device or the like in the first decoding result output process.
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the first decoding result output processing and the second decoding result output processing may correspond to an example of the “output unit”.
  • control circuit 40 that executes the determination process in step S613 can correspond to an example of a "code position determination unit" that determines whether or not the decoded information code is located in the decoding target area Pd.
  • step S613 when one information code for which the decoding result is obtained is located in the decoding target area Pd, it is determined as Yes in step S613.
  • the determination process of step S615 it is determined whether or not the code type of the information code located in the decoding target area Pd is a preset code type (designated code type).
  • the code type of the information code located in the decoding target area Pd is the specified code type (for example, EAN-13), it is determined as Yes in step S615, and the second decoding result in step S619. Output processing is done.
  • the decoding results of the information code of the designated code type and located in the decoding target area Pd are output to the host device or the like.
  • the decoding result of the code Cc located in the decoding target area Pd is output to the host device or the like.
  • the marker light Lm when the marker light Lm is not imaged by the imaging unit (No in S611), it is placed in the decoding target area Pd by the determination process in step S613.
  • the decoding result of the information code determined to be located and determined to be the designated code type in the determination process of step S615 is output (S619).
  • the decoding result of the information code determined to be located in the decoding target area Pd is output.
  • the decoding result of the information code outside the decoding target area Pd is not output. That is, by holding the reading port 50 over the screen so that only the information code to be read is located in the decoding target area Pd among the plurality of information codes displayed on the screen, other information codes displayed on the same screen. It is possible to output the decoding result of the information code to be read without outputting the decoding result of the information code.
  • the code type of the information code not to be read is set in advance. By different from the code type, it is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code not to be read from being output.
  • one decoding result is obtained from one captured image by the decoding process (No in S609), it is not necessary to determine whether or not the information code is the reading target, so that the marker light Lm is used.
  • One of the decoding results is output regardless of whether or not the image is captured. This eliminates the need for processing for determining whether or not the marker light Lm is detected from the captured image, and can reduce the processing load on the output of the decoding result.
  • the fifteenth embodiment is mainly different from the fourth embodiment in that the double-reading prevention setting cancellation condition is changed.
  • the store clerk needs to repeat the operation of pointing the reading port at a plain background where the information code is not imaged and the operation of pointing the reading port at the barcode of the product, and the operation that is not expected in the original operation must be performed. There was a problem that did not become.
  • the decoding result read from the information code is output in a state where the marker light is irradiated toward the information code (hereinafter, also referred to as a code irradiation state). If it is determined that the code is not in the code irradiation state after the decoding result is output, the double reading prevention setting is canceled. As a result, the double-reading prevention setting is canceled by the operation of removing the marker light from the information code in which the decoding result is output, so that the user's operation required for the cancellation operation can be reduced.
  • the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 55.
  • the image pickup process of step S701 shown in FIG. 55 is performed, and the information code is decoded by the image pickup unit including the light receiving sensor 28 and the imaging lens 27.
  • the captured image P is captured.
  • a process for decoding the information code included in the captured image P is performed, and the process from step S701 is repeated until the decoding is successful (No in S705).
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the decoding process in step S703 can correspond to an example of the “decoding unit”.
  • step S707 the decoding result obtained in the above decoding process matches the previously output decoding result (hereinafter, , Also referred to as the decoding result matching state).
  • the determination process in step S707 determines No.
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the determination process in step S707 may correspond to an example of the “decoding result determination unit”.
  • step S709 it is determined whether or not the marker light Lm is in the code irradiation state of being irradiated toward the information code, and the marker is within the code region occupied by the information code in the captured image P. Since at least a part of the light Lm is contained, it is determined as Yes in the code irradiation state. Then, the decoding result output processing of step S711 is performed, and the decoding result obtained by the decoding processing is output to a higher-level device or the like.
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the decoding result output process can correspond to an example of the “output unit”.
  • the read prevention setting process is performed twice in step S713, and then the process from step S701 is performed.
  • the marker light Lm is not included in the code region occupied by the information code in the captured image P, it is assumed that the code is not irradiated (No in S709), and the decoding result is not output, and the above step S701 is performed. Processing is done.
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the double-reading prevention setting process can correspond to an example of the “double-reading prevention setting unit”.
  • the marker light Lm is used as the information code in the determination process in step S715. It is determined whether or not the code irradiation state is irradiated toward. Here, if the marker light Lm does not deviate from the information code that outputs the decoding result, it is determined that the code irradiation state is Yes in step S715. In this case, in the determination process of step S717, it is determined whether or not the double-reading prevention is being set, and if it is determined as Yes because the double-reading prevention is set, the decoding result is output. The process from step S701 is performed without being performed.
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the determination process in step S715 may correspond to an example of the “marker irradiation state determination unit”.
  • the decoding result is in the decoding result matching state that matches the previously output decoding result, and while the code irradiation state in which the marker light Lm is irradiated toward the information code continues (Yes in S707 and S715). , The decoding result will not be output unless the read protection is canceled twice.
  • the double-reading prevention setting is canceled and the double-reading prevention setting is canceled. In this way, after the double-reading prevention setting is canceled, the processing from step S701 is performed, and when the information code from which the decoding result is output is irradiated with the marker light Lm again (Yes in S715), it is twice. Since the read prevention setting is canceled (No in S717), the decoding result is output (S711).
  • QR codes Cf and Cg to be read are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other and the same information is recorded.
  • the double-reading prevention setting is made (S713).
  • the decoding result of the QR code Cf is not output again while the code irradiation state in which the marker light Lm is irradiated to the QR code Cf continues.
  • the double-reading prevention setting is canceled (S719).
  • the double reading prevention setting is canceled. (S719). Then, when the double-reading prevention setting is set (Yes in S717), the decoding result determined to be in the decoding result matching state is excluded from the output target, and when the double-reading prevention setting is canceled (S717). No), even if the decoding result is determined to be in the decoding result matching state, it is output as an output target (S711).
  • the double reading prevention setting is canceled, and the marker light Lm is read twice by removing the marker light Lm from the information code in which the decoding result is output. Since the prevention setting is canceled, the user's operation required for the release operation can be reduced.
  • the 16th embodiment is mainly different from the 15th embodiment in that the double-reading prevention setting cancellation condition is changed so as not to be canceled unnecessarily.
  • the information code for which the marker light Lm is once removed due to camera shake or the like is irradiated again. As a result, double reading may occur unintentionally by the user.
  • the marker light Lm is not irradiated toward the code peripheral area Ac with reference to the code peripheral area Ac including the code area constituting the information code, and the double reading is prevented.
  • the double reading is prevented.
  • the outer edge of the code peripheral area Ac is separated from the outer edge of the code area constituting the information code by a distance corresponding to a preset number of cells (hereinafter, also referred to as a peripheral distance Ad).
  • a peripheral distance Ad a distance corresponding to a preset number of cells
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be set so as to be separated from the outer edge of the code area by a distance corresponding to a preset pixel amount.
  • the reading process is started in the same manner as in the fifteenth embodiment, the decoding is successful (Yes in S705 of FIG. 57), and the decoding result obtained by the decoding process matches the previously output decoding result. If it is in the matching state (Yes in S707), whether or not the marker light Lm is irradiated toward the cord peripheral region Ac in the determination process in step S715a (hereinafter, also referred to as the cord peripheral irradiation state). It is judged.
  • step S715a if at least a part of the marker light Lm is not deviated from the code peripheral region Ac set for the information code that outputs the decoding result, it is determined that the code peripheral irradiation state is Yes in step S715a. , The processing after step S717 is performed.
  • step S715a if the marker light Lm deviates from the code peripheral region Ac set for the information code that outputs the decoding result, it is determined as No in step S715a as not in the code peripheral irradiation state, and the double reading prevention setting is canceled. (S719).
  • the marker light Lm irradiates the code peripheral region Ac including the code region constituting the information code.
  • the double-reading prevention setting is canceled (S719).
  • the code peripheral region Ac may be set so that the size of the information code changes according to the size of the information code occupying the captured image P.
  • the size of the information code and the code peripheral area Ac occupying the captured image becomes large, the user's operation required for the operation of removing the marker light Lm from the code peripheral area Ac may become large. Therefore, for example, when the information code is imaged in a relatively large size, the size of the code peripheral area Ac is set to be relatively small, and the code peripheral area is set according to the size of the information code in the captured image P. By changing the size of the Ac, it is possible to prevent the user's movement required for the release operation from becoming large.
  • the peripheral distance Ad is shortened so that the code peripheral region Ac with respect to the information code Can be made smaller.
  • the peripheral distance Ad is lengthened to be around the code with respect to the information code. The region Ac can be increased.
  • the code peripheral area Ac can be set so that the peripheral distance Ad corresponds to the obtained code ratio Ap.
  • the code ratio Ap is 7%
  • the code peripheral area Ac is set so that the peripheral distance Ad is the number of “15” cells
  • the code ratio Ap is 18%
  • the peripheral distance Ad is set.
  • the code peripheral area Ac is set so that the number of cells is "5".
  • the 17th embodiment is mainly different from the 1st embodiment in that the necessity of decoding processing is determined according to the presence or absence of an image change in a part of the image.
  • the image captured in the second imaging includes a decodeable information code
  • the third imaging time t12 in FIG. 61
  • the decoding result is not output, and a different decoding result is obtained and output from the captured image at the fourth imaging (time t13 in FIG. 61). ing.
  • the image changes for a part of the image Pb corresponding to a part of the image P captured by the imaging unit (a predetermined range set in advance). It is determined whether or not it is in a state deemed not to be performed (hereinafter, also referred to as a partial image matching state), and if it is in a partial image matching state, the decoding process is not performed.
  • a state deemed not to be performed hereinafter, also referred to as a partial image matching state
  • the decoding process is not performed.
  • the range occupied by the light color system and the dark color system are defined with respect to the partial image Pb captured in the imaging process this time and the partial image Pb captured in the previous imaging process.
  • the ratios to the occupied range are calculated and compared, and when the difference between the calculated values is within a predetermined value, it is determined that the image is partially matched.
  • the determination regarding the partial image matching state is not limited to the determination based on the ratio between the range occupied by the light color system and the range occupied by the dark color system, and may be determined based on other image feature points. ..
  • a part of the image Pb is set so that the range occupied by the captured image P corresponds to the central portion of the captured image P. Therefore, when the QR code Cf is imaged as in the captured image P illustrated in FIG. 62 (A), the partial image Pb is set as shown in FIG. 62 (B), for example.
  • the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
  • the partial image imaging process of step S801 shown in FIG. 63 is performed, and the imaging unit including the light receiving sensor 28, the imaging lens 27, etc., as described above.
  • a part of the image Pb is imaged according to the capture in the range set to.
  • the partial image Pb changes from the previous partial image Pb in the determination process of step S805. It is determined whether or not there is a partial image matching state that is considered not to be present.
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the determination process in step S805 can correspond to an example of the “image state determination unit”.
  • step S805 In the state where the decoding result is not output in the first imaging, it is determined that No in step S805 because it is not in the partial image matching state, and the double reading prevention setting is canceled (S807).
  • the whole image imaging process of step S809 is performed, and the captured image P is captured.
  • the entire image analysis process of step S811 is performed, and it is confirmed whether or not the captured image P includes a decodable information code.
  • step S813 determines No, and the process from step S801 is performed. ..
  • the captured image P includes an information code that can be decoded, it is determined that the image code is being imaged and the determination process in step S813 is Yes, and the decoding process in step S815 describes the above.
  • a process for decoding the information code included in the captured image P is performed.
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the decoding process in step S815 can correspond to an example of the “decoding unit”.
  • step S817 it is determined whether or not the decoding result obtained by the above decoding process is in a decoding result matching state that matches the previously output decoding result.
  • the decoding result is first obtained after the reading process is started or a decoding result different from the previous one is obtained, it is assumed that the decoding result does not match (No in S817), and the decoding result in step S819.
  • the output process is performed, and the decoding result obtained by the decoding process is output to a higher-level device or the like.
  • the control circuit 40 that executes the decoding result output process can correspond to an example of the “output unit”.
  • step S823 When the decoding result is output in this way, after the read prevention setting process is performed twice in step S821, if the read end operation or the like is not performed (No in S823), the process from step S801 is performed. Be done.
  • step S805 the state in which the reading port 50 is directed to the information code from which the decoding result is output is maintained, so that the captured partial image Pb is from the previous partial image Pb. It is determined as Yes in the determination process of step S805 on the assumption that the partial image matching state is considered to have not changed. In this case, the process from step S801 is performed without canceling the double-reading prevention setting. That is, when the image change of a part of the image Pb is small, it is assumed that the reading port 50 is still directed to the information code to which the decoding result is output, and the determination of Yes is repeated in step S805, and the decoding process is performed. Will not be done. As described above, the reading cycle is shortened by continuing the image analysis processing of a part of the image Pb without performing the image analysis processing of the entire captured image P.
  • step S805 After that, since the reading port 50 was directed to the next information code, when the result that the captured partial image Pb was considered to be changed from the previous partial image Pb was obtained, in step S805, After the determination is No and the double-reading prevention setting is canceled (S807), the entire image imaging process in step S809 is performed.
  • the image captured in the second imaging contains a decodeable information code
  • the third imaging is performed after the decoding result is output (time in FIG. 64).
  • t22 it is determined whether or not the partial image Pb is in a partial image matching state. Then, since it was determined that the partial image was in the matching state (Yes in S805), the fourth imaging was performed (time t23 in FIG. 64), and the partial image Pb was also determined to be in the partial image matching state. Then (Yes in S805), the fifth image is taken (time t24 in FIG. 64).
  • the captured image P is captured at the sixth time (S809: time t25 in FIG. 64), and the entire captured image P is captured.
  • the whole image analysis process is performed so as to analyze the above (S811). In this way, from the third imaging to the fifth imaging, image analysis is performed on some image Pb and not all image analysis processing is performed, so that the reading cycle is shortened as compared with the example of FIG. can do.
  • the image of the partial image Pb corresponding to a part of the captured image P by the imaging unit is not changed. All image analysis processing and decoding processing are not performed until it is determined that a partial image matching state is considered.
  • the image analysis processing and the decoding processing of the entire captured image are not performed unless a state in which a part of the image Pb is considered to be changed is not performed. It is not necessary to perform a process of comparing the decoding results for each image capture to prevent reading. As a result, not only the processing load for preventing double reading can be reduced, but also the processing time can be shortened, so that the reading cycle can be shortened.
  • the range occupied by the captured image P is not limited to the central portion of the captured image P, and the partial image Pb may be set to another range of the captured image P. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 65, the range occupied by the captured image P of the partial image Pb may be set based on the position of the marker light Lm on the captured image P.
  • the range occupied by the captured image P of some images Pb may be set based on the information code that was successfully decoded last time. For example, a part of the image Pb may be set so as to match the code area of the information code that was successfully decoded last time.
  • the partial image Pb described above is based on the brightness and darkness of each cell constituting the information code. Since it can be determined whether or not is changed, the determination accuracy can be improved.
  • the 18th embodiment is mainly different from the 4th embodiment in that the assembling property is improved with respect to the protective structure of the edge portion constituting the reading port.
  • a protective member such as rubber is attached to the edge portion constituting the reading port for the purpose of protecting against dropping or the like and protecting the display screen on which the information code to be read is displayed.
  • This protective member is usually assembled by hooking it at an engaging portion or the like provided on the edge portion in order to prevent it from being easily disengaged after being assembled on the edge portion.
  • the protective member is attached to the edge by using an adhesive member such as double-sided tape.
  • the tip side is projected from the portion where the adhesive portion of the edge portion is arranged, and the bonded portion of the protective member that overcomes the protruding portion adheres to the edge portion.
  • Adopt a protective structure that adheres to the part.
  • the protective member 260 that elastically sandwiches and protects the edge portion 251 constituting the reading port 250 from both the outside and the inside. Is assembled.
  • the vicinity of the edge portion 251 to which the protective member 260 is assembled is shown in an enlarged cross section.
  • the protective member 260 is a connecting portion 290 that elastically connects the outer protective portion 270 that covers the outer side of the edge portion 251 and the inner protective portion 280 that covers the inner side of the edge portion 251 and the outer protective portion 270 and the inner protective portion 280. And are configured to have.
  • an adhesive portion 252 to which the outer protective portion 270 is adhered and a protruding portion 253 located on the tip side of the adhesive portion 252 and projecting outward from the adhesive portion 252 are provided on the outside of the edge portion 251. ..
  • the protruding portion 253 is formed so that the protruding height to the outside increases as it approaches the adhesive portion 252. Further, the protruding portion 253 is arranged so that the end surface 253a on the adhesive portion 252 side is close to perpendicular to the assembling direction (see arrow ⁇ in FIG. 67 (A) described later) for assembling the protective member 260 to the edge portion 251. It is formed.
  • the double-sided tape is adopted as the adhesive portion 252, and is arranged in the groove portion provided in the vicinity of the end surface 253a of the protruding portion 253.
  • the double-sided tape is not limited to the adhesive portion 252, and for example, an adhesive or the like may be adopted.
  • the outer protective portion 270 is a thin-walled facing portion that faces the bonded portion 271 that is adhered to the bonded portion 252 and the protruding portion 253 at the time of bonding between the bonded portion 271 and the bonded portion 252 with a slight gap. It is formed to have a portion 272 and.
  • FIGS. 67A to 67C The assembly of the protective member 260 to the edge portion 251 configured in this way will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 67A to 67C.
  • the outer protective portion 270 and the inner protective portion 280 are combined so that the bonded portion 271 and the protruding portion 253 come into contact with each other.
  • the edge 251 is inserted between the two.
  • the bonded portion 271 is not adhered to the bonded portion 252 and the protruding portion 253. The state of sliding contact with is maintained.
  • the bonded portion 271 is not adhered to the bonded portion 252 until it gets over the protruding portion 253. Since it is not adhered, the assembly work can be easily carried out.
  • the protruding portion 253 is formed so that the protruding height becomes higher as it approaches the bonded portion 252, the bonded portion 271 can easily get over the protruding portion 253, further facilitating the assembling work. Can be planned.
  • the protruding portion 253 is formed so that the end surface 253a on the adhesive portion 252 side is close to perpendicular to the assembling direction ⁇ (see FIG. 67 (A)) for assembling the protective member 260 to the edge portion 251.
  • the protective member 260 should be firmly assembled to the edge portion 251. Can be done.
  • an adhesive portion may be further provided on the inner protective portion 280a as in the protective member 260a and the edge portion 251a illustrated in FIG. 68.
  • the second adhesive portion 254 to which the inner protective portion 280a is adhered and the tip side of the second adhesive portion 254 are located inside the second adhesive portion 254.
  • a second protruding portion 255 is provided, and the inner protective portion 280a includes a second bonded portion 281 bonded to the second bonded portion 254, and the second bonded portion 281 and the second bonded portion 254. Is formed so as to have a thin-walled second facing portion 282 facing the second protruding portion 255 with a slight gap at the time of bonding.
  • the second bonded portion 281 is arranged so as to get over the second protruding portion 255 when the bonded portion 271 gets over the protruding portion 253.
  • the assembling work can be easily carried out even with the protective member 260a that adheres not only to the outside of the edge but also to the inside in order to increase the adhesive force.
  • the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments and modifications, and may be embodied as follows, for example.
  • the reading port 50 that takes in the reflected light from the information code is not limited to being formed so as to open in a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, and other opening shapes, for example, one side edge portion 52, etc. It may be formed so as to open in a T shape longer than the side edge portion 53. Even when the reading port 50 is configured in this way, the longitudinal LT, that is, the body of the grip portion 13, is located at the one side edge portion 52 farthest from the grip portion 13 of the peripheral edge 51 in the longitudinal direction LT. The above effect is obtained by providing the wall portion 56 that projects diagonally downward with respect to the portion.
  • the protruding end portion 56a When reading the information code C displayed on the display surface R, the protruding end portion 56a is not limited to being brought into contact with the display surface R to read the information code C, and the protruding end portion 56a may be read depending on the usage environment or the like.
  • the information code C may be read so as to be slightly floated from the display surface R.
  • the configurations according to the various aspects described above are not limited to being applied to an optical information reading device that optically and non-contactly reads an information code such as a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code, for example. , It may be applied to an optical information reading device capable of optically reading not only an information code but also character information and the like.
  • the device for reading the information code C is an optical device according to the above-mentioned various aspects. An information reading device may be used.
  • the device is not limited to the optical information reading device 10 in which the reading process is performed according to a predetermined operation of the trigger switch 42, but is also used in the optical information reading device in which the reading process is constantly performed for a certain period of time. May be done.
  • Optical information reader 11 Housing 12 ... Reading part 12a ... Extension end 13 ... Grip 13 TIP ... Tip side end in the longitudinal direction of the grip (one end) 21 ... Illumination light source (illumination unit) 27 ... Imaging lens (imaging unit) 28 ... Light receiving sensor (imaging unit) 50 ... Reading port 51 ... Peripheral 52 ... One side edge 56 ... Wall 57a, 57b ... Opposing part C ... Information code C1 ... Bar code (one-dimensional code) C2 ... QR code (two-dimensional code) Lf ... Illumination light R ... Display surface of the object to be read

Abstract

[Problem] The present invention addresses the problem of providing a structure capable reducing the influence of extraneous light and the glare that surrounding people feel when an information code is read. [Solution] An optical information reading device (10) is provided. This device (10) has a housing (11). This housing (11) comprises a reading part (12) formed with a reading opening (50) that emits illumination light (Lf) from an illumination light source (21) and guides light from an information code (C) into the housing (11), and a grip part (13) that is gripped by a user when pointing the reading opening (50) at the information code (C). The reading part (12) extends from an end portion (13TIP) on one side (tip side) in the longitudinal direction (LT) of the grip part (13) toward an obliquely downward direction with respect to the longitudinal direction (LT), and has an extended end portion (12a) on the tip side. The reading opening (50) is formed in this extended end portion (12a). A wall portion (56) protruding along the obliquely downward direction is provided at one side edge portion (52) of a peripheral edge (51) of the reading opening (50), the one side edge portion (52) being on the tip side most distant from the grip portion (13) in the longitudinal direction (LT).

Description

光学的情報読取装置Optical information reader
 本発明は、一次元コードや二元コードなどの情報コードを光学的に読み取る光学的情報読取装置に関するものである。 The present invention relates to an optical information reading device that optically reads an information code such as a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code.
 従来、小売店やコンビニエンスストアのレジ等では、商品等に表示されているバーコードなどの一次元コードを読み取るため、受光手段としてラインセンサを使用したバーコードスキャナが多く採用されている。バーコードスキャナには、バーコードを読み取りやすくするため一方向に長く形成された読取口が設けられている。このため、読取口の長手方向をバーコードの長手方向にあわせるように読取口をバーコードに接触させることで、バーコードを読取可能な状態となる。 Conventionally, at cash registers in retail stores and convenience stores, bar code scanners that use line sensors as light receiving means are often used to read one-dimensional codes such as bar codes displayed on products. The barcode scanner is provided with a reading port long in one direction to facilitate reading of the barcode. Therefore, by bringing the reading port into contact with the bar code so that the longitudinal direction of the reading port is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the bar code, the bar code can be read.
 近年、QRコード(登録商標)などの二次元コードが普及してきており、小売店やコンビニエンスストアのレジ等でも、受光手段としてエリアセンサを用いた二次元コードを読み取り可能なコードスキャナの導入が増加すると予想される。そうすると、1つの光学的情報読取装置で一次元コードや二次元コードを読み取る必要があり、一次元コードや二次元コードの双方を光学的に読み取り可能な光学的情報読取装置としては、例えば、下記特許文献1に開示される光学的情報読取装置が知られている。 In recent years, two-dimensional codes such as QR codes (registered trademarks) have become widespread, and the introduction of code scanners that can read two-dimensional codes using area sensors as light receiving means is increasing even at cash registers in retail stores and convenience stores. It is expected that. Then, it is necessary to read the one-dimensional code or the two-dimensional code with one optical information reading device, and as an optical information reading device capable of optically reading both the one-dimensional code and the two-dimensional code, for example, the following An optical information reading device disclosed in Patent Document 1 is known.
 この光学的情報読取装置は、主に、垂直面に表示された情報コードに読取口を向ける際に把持部を立てた状態で把持するように形成されたガンタイプの読取装置である。この読取装置の読取口の周囲には延出部が設けられており、この延出部には、把持部側とは異なる部位に、情報コードを視認するための開口が形成されている。これにより、延出部の把持部側となる延出底壁部を上記垂直面に接触させた状態で情報コードを読み取る読取動作を行う場合でも、上方から開口を介して情報コードを視認することができる。 This optical information reading device is mainly a gun-type reading device formed so as to hold the grip portion in an upright state when the reading port is directed to the information code displayed on the vertical surface. An extension portion is provided around the reading port of the reading device, and the extension portion is formed with an opening for visually recognizing the information code at a portion different from the grip portion side. As a result, the information code can be visually recognized from above through the opening even when the information code is read while the extension bottom wall portion on the grip portion side of the extension portion is in contact with the vertical surface. Can be done.
特開2016-212861号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-212861
 ところで、情報コードを読み取る読取装置では、所定の表示面に表示された情報コードを読み取る際の読取動作として、情報コードを覆うようにして読取口を表示面に接触させて読み取る読取動作(いわゆる、タッチ読み)と、表示面から離した状態で読取口を情報コードに向けて読み取る読取動作とのいずれかが採用される。表示面から離した状態で読取口を情報コードに向けて読み取る読取動作を採用する読取装置では、情報コードを読み取る際に、情報コードと読取口とが離れるため、周囲の照明光や太陽光等の外来光が情報コードや表示面にて反射(鏡面反射)することで、その情報コードを読み取り可能に撮像できない場合がある。また、情報コードと読取口とが離れているため、読取口を介して照射された照明光が情報コードや表示面にて反射することで、読取口を向けている方向にいる人が眩しさを感じてしまう可能性がある。 By the way, in a reading device that reads an information code, as a reading operation when reading the information code displayed on a predetermined display surface, a reading operation (so-called so-called) in which a reading port is brought into contact with the display surface so as to cover the information code is read. Either touch reading) or a reading operation in which the reading port is pointed at the information code while away from the display surface is adopted. In a reading device that employs a reading operation in which the reading port is pointed at the information code while away from the display surface, the information code and the reading port are separated from each other when reading the information code, so that ambient illumination light, sunlight, etc. The extraneous light is reflected by the information code or the display surface (specular reflection), and the information code may not be readable. In addition, since the information code and the reading port are separated from each other, the illumination light radiated through the reading port is reflected by the information code and the display surface, so that the person facing the reading port is dazzled. You may feel.
 本発明は、上述した課題を解決するためになされたものであり、その目的とするところは、情報コードを読み取る際に、外来光の影響や周囲の人が感じる眩しさを抑制し得る構成を提供することにある。 The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a configuration capable of suppressing the influence of external light and the glare felt by people around when reading an information code. To provide.
 上記目的を達成するため、特許請求の範囲の請求項1に記載の発明は、
 表示面(R)に表示される又は配置される情報コード(C,C1,C2)を撮像する撮像部(28,27)と、
 照明光(Lf)を照射する照明部(21)と、
 前記撮像部及び前記照明部が内部に収容され、前記照明部からの前記照明光を出射して前記情報コード(C,C1,C2)からの光を内部に導入する読取口(50)が設けられる筐体(11)と、
 を備え、
 前記表示面から前記読取口を離した状態で前記情報コード(C,C1,C2)を前記撮像部にて撮像して読み取る光学的情報読取装置(10)であって、
 前記筐体は、
 前記読取口(50)が形成された読取部(12)と、
 前記読取口を前記情報コード(C,C1,C2)に向ける際に把持され、かつ前記読取部(12)と一体に形成された把持部(13)と、
 を備え、
 前記読取部(12)は、前記把持部(13)の長手方向一側の端部(13TIP)から当該長手方向(LT)の斜め下方に延出して、その先端に延出端部(12a)を有するように構成され、
 前記延出端部(12a)は、前記読取口(50)を有し、
 前記読取口(50)は前記情報コード(C,C1,C2)に向けられる周縁(51)を有し、
 前記周縁(51)は前記長手方向(LT)において前記把持部(13)から離れた一側縁部(52)を有し、
 前記一側縁部(52)には前記斜め下方に沿って突出する壁部(56)が設けられる、ことを特徴とする。
 なお、上記各括弧内の符号は、後述する実施形態に記載の具体的手段との対応関係を示すものである。
In order to achieve the above object, the invention according to claim 1 of the claims
Imaging units (28, 27) that image the information codes (C, C1, C2) displayed or arranged on the display surface (R), and
The illumination unit (21) that irradiates the illumination light (Lf) and
The image pickup unit and the illumination unit are housed inside, and a reading port (50) is provided to emit the illumination light from the illumination unit and introduce the light from the information codes (C, C1, C2) into the inside. With the housing (11)
With
An optical information reading device (10) that captures and reads the information code (C, C1, C2) by the imaging unit with the reading port separated from the display surface.
The housing is
A reading unit (12) on which the reading port (50) is formed,
A grip portion (13) that is gripped when the reading port is directed toward the information code (C, C1, C2) and is integrally formed with the reading portion (12).
With
The reading portion (12) extends diagonally downward in the longitudinal direction (LT) from the end portion (13 TIP ) on one side in the longitudinal direction of the grip portion (13), and extends to the tip thereof at the extending end portion (12a). ) Is configured to have
The extending end portion (12a) has the reading port (50).
The reading port (50) has a peripheral edge (51) directed to the information code (C, C1, C2).
The peripheral edge (51) has a side edge (52) away from the grip (13) in the longitudinal direction (LT).
The one side edge portion (52) is provided with a wall portion (56) projecting diagonally downward.
The reference numerals in the parentheses indicate the correspondence with the specific means described in the embodiments described later.
 請求項1の発明では、筐体は、照明部からの照明光を出射して情報コードからの光を当該筐体の内部に導入する読取口が形成された読取部と、読取口を情報コードに向ける際に利用者などによって把持される把持部と、を備えている。読取部は、把持部の長手方向一側の端部(つまり長手方向の先端部分)から当該長手方向の斜め下方に連続的に且つ一体的に延出した延出端部を有する。この読取部は、当該延出端部に前記読取口を位置させて前記把持部に繋がる。さらに、読取口は情報コードに向けられる周縁を有し、この周縁は長手方向において前記把持部から離れた一側縁部を有する。この一側縁部には前記斜め下方に沿って突出する壁部が設けられる。 In the invention of claim 1, the housing has a reading unit formed with a reading port for emitting illumination light from the lighting unit and introducing the light from the information code into the inside of the housing, and the reading port is an information code. It is provided with a grip portion that is gripped by a user or the like when facing the light. The reading unit has an extending end portion that extends continuously and integrally diagonally downward in the longitudinal direction from the end portion on one side in the longitudinal direction of the grip portion (that is, the tip portion in the longitudinal direction). The reading unit is connected to the grip portion by positioning the reading port at the extending end portion. Further, the reading port has a peripheral edge directed to the information code, which peripheral edge has a side edge away from the grip in the longitudinal direction. A wall portion that projects diagonally downward is provided on this one side edge portion.
 これにより、所望の表示面から読取口を離した状態で情報コードを撮像部にて撮像する際には、把持部を把持する使用者から見て情報コードの奥側に壁部が位置し、情報コードの手前側には使用者自身が位置するため、情報コードの視認性を損なうことなく、情報コード等にて反射した外来光を撮像され難くすることができる。さらに、読取口を介した照明光による情報コード等での反射光が壁部によって情報コードの奥側に反射され難くなるので、読取口を向けている方向(上記奥側に相当する方向)にいる人が感じる眩しさを抑制することができる。特に、壁部の先端側となる突出端部を対象物の表示面に接触させることで、外来光の影響や周囲の人が感じる眩しさをより確実に抑制することができる。したがって、情報コードを読み取る際に、その情報コードの視認性を損なうことなく、外来光の影響や周囲の人が感じる眩しさを抑制し得る光学的情報読取装置を実現することができる。 As a result, when the information code is imaged by the imaging unit with the reading port away from the desired display surface, the wall portion is located behind the information code when viewed from the user who grips the grip portion. Since the user himself / herself is located on the front side of the information code, it is possible to make it difficult to capture the external light reflected by the information code or the like without impairing the visibility of the information code. Further, since it is difficult for the wall portion to reflect the reflected light of the information code or the like due to the illumination light through the reading port to the back side of the information code, the direction in which the reading port is directed (the direction corresponding to the back side) It is possible to suppress the glare felt by the person. In particular, by bringing the protruding end portion on the tip end side of the wall portion into contact with the display surface of the object, it is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of external light and the glare felt by the surrounding people. Therefore, when reading an information code, it is possible to realize an optical information reading device capable of suppressing the influence of external light and the glare felt by a surrounding person without impairing the visibility of the information code.
 請求項2の発明では、読取口の周縁には、当該読取口を介して対向しそれぞれ壁部に連なる一対の対向部が設けられる。これにより、一対の対向部を利用して壁部を補強しつつ、上記奥側からの外来光の影響だけでなく左右方向からの外来光の影響も抑制することができる。 In the invention of claim 2, a pair of facing portions facing each other via the reading port and connected to the wall portion are provided on the peripheral edge of the reading port. As a result, it is possible to suppress not only the influence of the external light from the back side but also the influence of the external light from the left-right direction while reinforcing the wall portion by using the pair of facing portions.
 請求項3の発明では、照明部は、照明光を壁部に向けて照射するように配置される。所望の表示面に対する照明光の照射方向(光軸)の角度を90°に近づけると、照明光に起因する鏡面反射が読み取りに影響しやすくなり、その一方で、上記照射方向の角度を単に小さくすると、読取口を向けた情報コードに照明光が照射され難くなる。このため、照明光が読取口を介して壁部に向けて照射されるように照明部を配置することで、壁部を近づけた情報コードが当該壁部にて反射された反射光によって照らされるため、必要な照度を確保しつつ、情報コードの読み取りに関して照明光に起因する鏡面反射の影響を抑制することができる。 In the invention of claim 3, the illumination unit is arranged so as to irradiate the illumination light toward the wall unit. When the angle of the illumination light irradiation direction (optical axis) with respect to the desired display surface is brought close to 90 °, the specular reflection caused by the illumination light tends to affect the reading, while the angle of the illumination light is simply reduced. Then, it becomes difficult for the information code with the reading port to be irradiated with the illumination light. Therefore, by arranging the illumination unit so that the illumination light is emitted toward the wall portion through the reading port, the information code in which the wall portion is brought close to the wall portion is illuminated by the reflected light reflected by the wall portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the influence of mirror reflection caused by the illumination light on the reading of the information code while ensuring the necessary illuminance.
 請求項4の発明では、壁部は、一側縁部から突出端部までの突出長さが、突出端部を接触させた対象物の表示面に表示される情報コードの撮像に適した距離に応じた長さとなるように形成されている。これにより、突出端部を表示面に接触させるようにして読取口を情報コードに向けることで、読み取りに適した情報コードを撮像できるので、情報コードの読取成功率を高めることができる。 In the invention of claim 4, the protrusion length from one side edge portion to the protruding end portion is a distance suitable for imaging an information code displayed on the display surface of the object in contact with the protruding end portion. It is formed so as to have a length corresponding to. As a result, the information code suitable for reading can be imaged by directing the reading port toward the information code so that the protruding end portion is in contact with the display surface, so that the reading success rate of the information code can be increased.
 請求項5の発明では、前記照明部は前記照明光を照射する第1及び第2の照明部を備え、前記撮像部は、受光センサと、読取口を介して入射する入射光を集光して受光センサの受光面に像を結像させるための結像レンズとを備え、結像レンズは、受光センサの受光面に対して第1照明部及び第2照明部から離れる方向にずれて配置される。これにより、情報コードが表示される表示面等からの折り返し視野(表示面等にて反射されるようにして撮像される撮像範囲)内に第1照明部や第2照明部が入り難くなり、この点からしても照明光に起因する鏡面反射を抑制することができる。 In the invention of claim 5, the illumination unit includes first and second illumination units that irradiate the illumination light, and the image pickup unit collects incident light incident through a light receiving sensor and a reading port. An imaging lens for forming an image on the light receiving surface of the light receiving sensor is provided, and the imaging lens is arranged so as to be offset from the light receiving surface of the light receiving sensor in a direction away from the first illumination unit and the second illumination unit. Will be done. As a result, it becomes difficult for the first illumination unit and the second illumination unit to enter the folded field view (imaging range captured by being reflected by the display surface or the like) from the display surface or the like on which the information code is displayed. From this point as well, specular reflection caused by illumination light can be suppressed.
 請求項6の発明では、読取口には、撮像部及び照明部を保護する保護部材が設けられ、保護部材には、照明光が透過する第1透過部と、情報コードからの反射光が透過する第2透過部と、が形成され、筐体には、保護部材を外面側から囲うようにして保持する保持部が設けられ、保持部は、第1透過部を外面側に露出させる露出幅と第2透過部を外面側に露出させる露出幅とが使用者の指の幅よりも小さくなるように形成される。 In the invention of claim 6, the reading port is provided with a protective member that protects the image pickup unit and the illumination unit, and the protection member transmits the first transmission unit through which the illumination light is transmitted and the reflected light from the information code. A second transparent portion is formed, and the housing is provided with a holding portion that holds the protective member so as to surround it from the outer surface side, and the holding portion has an exposure width that exposes the first transparent portion to the outer surface side. And the exposure width that exposes the second transmissive portion to the outer surface side are formed so as to be smaller than the width of the user's finger.
 これにより、筐体を把持する際に使用者の指が保持部に触れたとしても、その指が第1透過部や第2透過部に誤って触れ難くなり、第1透過部及び第2透過部に皮脂等の汚れが付着し難くなるので、保護部材に付着する汚れに起因する読取性能の低下を抑制することができる。 As a result, even if the user's finger touches the holding portion when gripping the housing, it becomes difficult for the finger to accidentally touch the first transmission portion or the second transmission portion, and the first transmission portion and the second transmission portion are less likely to be touched. Since dirt such as sebum is less likely to adhere to the portion, deterioration of reading performance due to dirt adhering to the protective member can be suppressed.
 請求項7の発明では、読取口には、撮像部及び照明部を保護する保護部材が設けられ、保護部材には、照明光が透過する第1透過部と、第1透過部を環状に囲うように外方に突出する第1環状部と、情報コードからの反射光が透過する第2透過部と、第2透過部を環状に囲うように外方に突出する第2環状部と、が形成される。 In the invention of claim 7, the reading port is provided with a protective member that protects the image pickup unit and the illumination unit, and the protective member surrounds the first transmission portion through which the illumination light is transmitted and the first transmission portion in an annular shape. The first annular portion projecting outward, the second transmitting portion through which the reflected light from the information code is transmitted, and the second annular portion projecting outward so as to surround the second transmitting portion in an annular shape are formed. It is formed.
 これにより、筐体を把持する際に使用者の指が第1環状部や第2環状部に触れたとしても、その指が第1透過部や第2透過部に誤って触れ難くなり、第1透過部及び第2透過部に皮脂等の汚れが付着し難くなるので、保護部材に付着する汚れに起因する読取性能の低下を抑制することができる。 As a result, even if the user's finger touches the first annular portion or the second annular portion when gripping the housing, it becomes difficult for the finger to accidentally touch the first transmissive portion or the second transmissive portion. Since dirt such as sebum is less likely to adhere to the first permeation portion and the second permeation portion, deterioration of reading performance due to dirt adhering to the protective member can be suppressed.
 請求項8の発明では、撮像部による撮像視野を示すマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部と、撮像部による撮像画像においてマーカ光が所定の状態で撮像されるマーカ撮像状態であるか否かについて判定するマーカ撮像判定部と、マーカ撮像判定部の判定結果に応じて照明部を制御する照明制御部と、が設けられる。 The invention according to claim 8 relates to a marker light irradiation unit that irradiates a marker light indicating an imaging field of view by the imaging unit, and whether or not the marker light is imaged in a predetermined state in the image captured by the imaging unit. A marker imaging determination unit for determination and a lighting control unit for controlling the illumination unit according to the determination result of the marker imaging determination unit are provided.
 読取口が情報コードを付した表示面等に向けられていない場合には、照射されたマーカ光が表示面等にて反射されないため、マーカ光が撮像されない状態となる。すなわち、マーカ光が撮像されない状態では、照明光を照射する必要がないので、マーカ撮像判定部の判定結果に応じて照明部を制御することで、不要な照明光の照射を抑制することができる。 If the reading port is not directed to the display surface or the like to which the information code is attached, the irradiated marker light is not reflected by the display surface or the like, so that the marker light is not captured. That is, since it is not necessary to irradiate the illumination light when the marker light is not imaged, it is possible to suppress the irradiation of unnecessary illumination light by controlling the illumination unit according to the determination result of the marker imaging determination unit. ..
 請求項9の発明では、照明制御部は、マーカ撮像判定部によりマーカ撮像状態であると判定されると、照明光が照射されるように照明部を制御し、マーカ撮像判定部によりマーカ撮像状態でないと判定されると、照明光の照射を停止するように照明部を制御する。これにより、情報コードが表示される画面等では、画面そのものが発光しているために、マーカ光の反射光を認識容易に撮像できず、そもそも照明光の照射が不要であるため、照明光のON/OFFを適切に切り替えることができる。 In the invention of claim 9, when the marker imaging determination unit determines that the marker imaging state is determined, the illumination control unit controls the illumination unit so that the illumination light is irradiated, and the marker imaging determination unit determines the marker imaging state. If it is determined that this is not the case, the illumination unit is controlled so as to stop the irradiation of the illumination light. As a result, on a screen or the like on which an information code is displayed, since the screen itself emits light, the reflected light of the marker light cannot be easily recognized and imaged, and irradiation of the illumination light is unnecessary in the first place. ON / OFF can be switched appropriately.
 請求項10の発明では、照明制御部は、マーカ撮像判定部によりマーカ撮像状態であると判定されると、照明光が照射されるように照明部を制御し、マーカ撮像判定部によりマーカ撮像状態でないと判定されると、マーカ撮像状態であると判定される場合よりも暗くなる状態で照明光が照射されるように照明部を制御する。これにより、不要に明るい照明光の照射を抑制することができる。 In the invention of claim 10, when the marker imaging determination unit determines that the marker imaging state is determined, the illumination control unit controls the illumination unit so that the illumination light is irradiated, and the marker imaging determination unit determines the marker imaging state. If it is determined that the lighting unit is not, the illumination unit is controlled so that the illumination light is irradiated in a darker state than in the case where it is determined that the marker is in the imaging state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the irradiation of unnecessarily bright illumination light.
 請求項11の発明では、マーカ光照射部は、画像変化判定部により撮像部より撮像される画像が変化していると判定される場合に、マーカ光を照射する。これにより、光学的情報読取装置が机上等に置かれている状態、すなわち、未使用時には、撮像部より撮像される画像が変化しないためにマーカ光が照射されないので、不要な照明光の照射をより確実に抑制することができる。 In the invention of claim 11, the marker light irradiation unit irradiates the marker light when it is determined by the image change determination unit that the image captured by the image pickup unit has changed. As a result, when the optical information reader is placed on a desk or the like, that is, when it is not in use, the image captured by the imaging unit does not change and the marker light is not irradiated. Therefore, unnecessary illumination light is irradiated. It can be suppressed more reliably.
 請求項12の発明では、マーカ撮像判定部は、撮像画像のうちマーカ光が撮像される可能性のある範囲について、マーカ光が所定の状態で撮像されるマーカ撮像状態であるか否かについて判定する。このように、撮像画像においてマーカ光が撮像される範囲は予め決まっているので、撮像画像においてマーカ撮像状態であるか否かについて判定する範囲を限定でき、判定処理等に要する処理負荷の軽減や処理速度の向上を図ることができる。 In the invention of claim 12, the marker imaging determination unit determines whether or not the marker light is in a marker imaging state in which the marker light is imaged in a predetermined state in a range of the captured image where the marker light may be imaged. To do. In this way, since the range in which the marker light is captured in the captured image is predetermined, the range for determining whether or not the captured image is in the marker imaging state can be limited, and the processing load required for the determination process or the like can be reduced. The processing speed can be improved.
 請求項13の発明では、撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されているためにデコード部により1つの撮像画像から複数のデコード結果が得られる場合に、出力するデコード結果を選択する選択部と、が設けられる。そして、選択部は、予め登録される選択判定用情報がデコード結果に含まれているか否かに基づいて、出力するデコード結果を選択する。 According to the thirteenth aspect of the present invention, there is one decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code of the captured image captured by the imaging unit, and one decoding unit because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged. When a plurality of decoding results are obtained from the captured image, a selection unit for selecting the decoding result to be output is provided. Then, the selection unit selects the decoding result to be output based on whether or not the selection determination information registered in advance is included in the decoding result.
 これにより、例えば、読取対象となる情報コードに上記選択判定用情報が含まれる場合には、複数のデコード結果のうち上記選択判定用情報が含まれるデコード結果を選択することで、上記選択判定用情報が含まれない読取対象外の情報コードのデコード結果が出力されることを防止することができる。また、例えば、読取対象外とすべき情報コードに上記選択判定用情報が含まれる場合には、複数のデコード結果のうち上記選択判定用情報が含まれないデコード結果を選択することで、上記選択判定用情報が含まれる読取対象外の情報コードのデコード結果が出力されることを防止することができる。すなわち、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されていることから複数のデコード結果が得られる場合であっても、出力すべきデコード結果を適切に選択することができ、意図せずに読み取った情報コードのデコード結果の出力を制限することができる。 As a result, for example, when the information code to be read includes the selection determination information, the selection determination can be performed by selecting the decoding result including the selection determination information from the plurality of decoding results. It is possible to prevent the decoding result of the non-reading information code that does not include the information from being output. Further, for example, when the information code to be excluded from reading includes the selection determination information, the selection can be made by selecting the decoding result that does not include the selection determination information from the plurality of decoding results. It is possible to prevent the decoding result of the non-reading information code including the determination information from being output. That is, even when a plurality of decoding results are obtained because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged, the decoding result to be output can be appropriately selected, and the information code read unintentionally can be selected. The output of the decoding result can be limited.
 請求項14の発明では、上記選択判定用情報は、所定のURLに含まれる特徴的文字列及び所定のアドレスに含まれる特徴的文字列の少なくともいずれか一方である。このため、例えば、読取対象外とすべき情報コードにURLやアドレスが記録される場合には、その情報コードのデコード結果が出力されることを防止でき、読取対象とすべき情報コードにURLやアドレスが記録される場合には、URLやアドレスが含まれないデコード結果が出力されることを防止できる。 In the invention of claim 14, the selection determination information is at least one of a characteristic character string included in a predetermined URL and a characteristic character string included in a predetermined address. Therefore, for example, when a URL or an address is recorded in an information code that should be excluded from reading, it is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code from being output, and the URL or address can be recorded in the information code that should be read. When the address is recorded, it is possible to prevent the decoding result that does not include the URL and the address from being output.
 請求項15の発明では、撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されているためにデコード部により1つの撮像画像から複数のデコード結果が得られる場合に、出力するデコード結果を選択する選択部と、が設けられる。そして、選択部は、デコードに成功した情報コードのコード種別に基づいて、出力するデコード結果を選択する。 In the invention of claim 15, one decoding unit performs a decoding process for decoding an information code for an image captured by the imaging unit, and one decoding unit because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged. When a plurality of decoding results are obtained from the captured image, a selection unit for selecting the decoding result to be output is provided. Then, the selection unit selects the decoding result to be output based on the code type of the information code that has been successfully decoded.
 これにより、例えば、読取対象となる情報コードが所定のコード種別であれば、複数のデコード結果のうち上記所定のコード種別の情報コードからデコードされたデコード結果を選択することで、上記所定のコード種別ではない読取対象外の情報コードのデコード結果が出力されることを防止することができる。すなわち、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されていることから複数のデコード結果が得られる場合であっても、出力すべきデコード結果を適切に選択することができ、意図せずに読み取った情報コードのデコード結果の出力を制限することができる。 As a result, for example, if the information code to be read is a predetermined code type, the above-mentioned predetermined code can be selected by selecting the decoding result decoded from the information code of the above-mentioned predetermined code type from a plurality of decoding results. It is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code not to be read, which is not the type, from being output. That is, even when a plurality of decoding results are obtained because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged, the decoding result to be output can be appropriately selected, and the information code read unintentionally can be selected. The output of the decoding result can be limited.
 請求項16の発明では、撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、デコード部によるデコード結果を利用した所定の処理を行うための処理部と、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されているためにデコード部により1つの撮像画像から複数のデコード結果が得られる場合に、2以上の同じデコード結果が得られているか否かついて判定するデコード結果同異判定部と、が設けられる。処理部は、デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合に、2以上の同じデコード結果の1つについて所定の処理を行う。 In the invention of claim 16, a decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding an information code on an image captured by the imaging unit and a processing unit that performs predetermined processing using the decoding result by the decoding unit. And, when a plurality of decoding results can be obtained from one captured image by the decoding unit because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged, the decoding result that once determines whether or not two or more same decoding results are obtained. The same difference determination unit and is provided. When it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit, the processing unit performs predetermined processing on one of the two or more same decoding results.
 これにより、例えば、同じデータがそれぞれ記録されたコード種別の異なる情報コードが同時に撮像される場合でも、重複して同じ処理が行われることを抑制することができる。 As a result, for example, even when information codes of different code types in which the same data are recorded are simultaneously imaged, it is possible to prevent the same processing from being performed twice.
 請求項17の発明では、処理部によって上記所定の処理が行われたデコード結果が記憶される記憶部が設けられる。そして、処理部は、デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって、記憶部に記憶される情報に基づいて同じデコード結果に一致するデコード結果が所定の読取回数以内に処理部によって上記所定の処理が行われていない場合に、上記デコード結果について所定の処理を行う。 In the invention of claim 17, a storage unit is provided in which the decoding result of the predetermined processing performed by the processing unit is stored. Then, the processing unit determines that two or more same decoding results have been obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit, and the decoding that matches the same decoding result based on the information stored in the storage unit. When the predetermined processing is not performed by the processing unit within the predetermined number of readings of the result, the predetermined processing is performed on the decoding result.
 これにより、以前に同じデコード結果を読み取っていたとしても、その以前のデコード結果が上記所定の読取回数以内に処理部によって上記所定の処理が行われていない場合、すなわち、最近、上記所定の処理に用いられたデコード結果でない場合には、使用者が意図して同じデータが記録された2以上の情報コードを読み取っているとして、同じデコード結果を利用して上記所定の処理を行うことができる。 As a result, even if the same decoding result is read before, if the previous decoding result is not subjected to the predetermined processing by the processing unit within the predetermined reading number, that is, recently, the predetermined processing is performed. If it is not the decoding result used in, it is assumed that the user intentionally reads two or more information codes in which the same data is recorded, and the same decoding result can be used to perform the above-mentioned predetermined processing. ..
 請求項18の発明では、デコード部によるデコード結果がデコード処理を終えたデコード時刻とともに記憶される記憶部が設けられる。そして、処理部は、デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって、上記同じデコード結果に一致するデコード結果に関連付けられて記憶部に記憶されるデコード時刻からの経過時間が所定時間以上となる場合に、上記デコード結果について所定の処理を行う。 In the invention of claim 18, a storage unit is provided in which the decoding result by the decoding unit is stored together with the decoding time when the decoding process is completed. Then, the processing unit stores in the storage unit in association with the decoding results that match the same decoding results in the case where it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit. When the elapsed time from the decoding time is longer than the predetermined time, the predetermined processing is performed on the decoding result.
 これにより、以前に同じデコード結果を読み取っていたとしても、その以前のデコード結果のデコード時刻からの経過時間が所定時間以上となる場合、すなわち、最近、上記所定の処理に用いられたデコード結果でない場合には、使用者が意図して同じデータが記録された2以上の情報コードを読み取っているとして、同じデコード結果を利用して上記所定の処理を行うことができる。 As a result, even if the same decoding result is read before, if the elapsed time from the decoding time of the previous decoding result is longer than a predetermined time, that is, it is not the decoding result recently used for the predetermined processing. In this case, assuming that the user intentionally reads two or more information codes in which the same data is recorded, the same decoding result can be used to perform the above-mentioned predetermined processing.
 請求項19の発明では、デコード部によるデコードが成功した情報コードが撮像部の撮像視野から外されて再び撮像視野内に入り込む回数を撮像回数としてカウントするカウント部と、処理部によって上記所定の処理が行われたデコード結果がカウント部によりカウントされる撮像回数に関連付けられて記憶される記憶部とが設けられる。そして、処理部は、デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって、上記同じデコード結果に一致するデコード結果に関連付けられて記憶部に記憶される撮像回数が所定回数以上となる場合に、上記デコード結果について所定の処理を行う。 In the invention of claim 19, the counting unit counts the number of times the information code successfully decoded by the decoding unit is removed from the imaging field of the imaging unit and reenters the imaging field as the number of times of imaging, and the processing unit performs the above-mentioned predetermined processing. A storage unit is provided in which the decoding result in which the above is performed is stored in association with the number of imaging times counted by the counting unit. Then, the processing unit stores in the storage unit in association with the decoding results that match the same decoding results in the case where it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit. When the number of times of imaging to be performed exceeds a predetermined number of times, a predetermined process is performed on the above-mentioned decoding result.
 これにより、使用者が意図して同じデータが記録された2以上の情報コードを読み取るために、その情報コードを撮像視野に入れる撮像状態と撮像視野から外す撮像状態とを繰り返すことで、同じデコード結果のそれぞれについて上記所定の処理を行うことができる。 As a result, in order to read two or more information codes in which the same data is intentionally recorded by the user, the same decoding is performed by repeating the imaging state in which the information code is put in the imaging field of view and the imaging state in which the information code is removed from the imaging field of view. The above-mentioned predetermined processing can be performed for each of the results.
 請求項20の発明では、デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定された情報コードについて、撮像部の撮像視野から外された時刻がコード除外時刻としてデコード結果に関連付けられて記憶される記憶部が設けられる。そして、処理部は、デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって、上記同じデコード結果に一致するデコード結果に関連付けられて記憶部に記憶されるコード除外時刻からの経過時間が所定時間以上となる場合に、上記デコード結果について所定の処理を行う。 In the invention of claim 20, for the information code determined by the decoding result same / different determination unit that two or more same decoding results are obtained, the time when the information code is removed from the imaging field of the imaging unit is the code exclusion time as the decoding result. A storage unit is provided which is associated with and stored in. Then, the processing unit stores in the storage unit in association with the decoding results that match the same decoding results in the case where it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit. When the elapsed time from the code exclusion time to be performed exceeds a predetermined time, a predetermined process is performed on the above-mentioned decoding result.
 これにより、使用者が意図して同じデータが記録された2以上の情報コードを読み取るために、その情報コードを一定時間撮像視野から外した後に再び撮像視野に入れることで、同じデコード結果のそれぞれについて上記所定の処理を行うことができる。 As a result, in order to read two or more information codes in which the same data is intentionally recorded by the user, the information codes are removed from the imaging field of view for a certain period of time and then put back into the imaging field of view, so that the same decoding results are obtained. The above-mentioned predetermined processing can be performed.
 請求項21の発明では、筐体の姿勢を検出する姿勢検出部が設けられる。そして、処理部は、デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって、姿勢検出部により検出される筐体の姿勢が所定の姿勢状態である場合に、上記デコード結果について所定の処理を行う。 In the invention of claim 21, a posture detection unit for detecting the posture of the housing is provided. Then, when the processing unit determines that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit, the posture of the housing detected by the posture detection unit is in a predetermined posture state. In some cases, a predetermined process is performed on the above-mentioned decoding result.
 これにより、使用者が意図して同じデータが記録された2以上の情報コードを読み取るために、上記所定の姿勢状態となるように筐体を把持することで、同じデコード結果のそれぞれについて上記所定の処理を行うことができる。 As a result, in order to read two or more information codes in which the same data is intentionally recorded by the user, the housing is held so as to be in the predetermined posture state, and the same decoding result is obtained for each of the above predetermined states. Can be processed.
 請求項22の発明では、撮像部による撮像画像から情報コードをデコードするためのコード画像を検出するコード画像検出部により、撮像部により連続的に撮像される複数の連続撮像画像において、同じ情報コードのコード画像が検出され、この検出されているコード画像が撮像画像に占める状態に応じて、当該コード画像が読取対象であるか否かについて読取対象判定部により判定される。そして、読取対象判定部により読取対象であると判定されたコード画像のデコード処理が成功していることでデコード結果が得られていると、このデコード結果を利用して処理部により所定の処理が行われて、報知部により所定の報知が行われる。 In the invention of claim 22, the same information code is used in a plurality of continuously captured images continuously captured by the imaging unit by the code image detecting unit that detects the code image for decoding the information code from the image captured by the imaging unit. The code image is detected, and the reading target determination unit determines whether or not the code image is a reading target according to the state in which the detected code image occupies the captured image. Then, when the decoding result is obtained by successfully decoding the code image determined to be the reading target by the reading target determination unit, the processing unit performs a predetermined process using this decoding result. Then, a predetermined notification is performed by the notification unit.
 これにより、デコードタイミングを指示するためのトリガースイッチ等を有しない光学的情報読取装置であっても、使用者が読み取ろうとする情報コードに読取口を向けることで、その情報コードのコード画像が撮像画像に占める状態が所定の条件を満たす場合、例えば、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が所定範囲以上となる場合に、そのコード画像が読取対象である判定することができる。使用者が狙い読みしようとしている情報コードは、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が所定範囲以上等となりやすいからである。このため、読取対象と判定されたコード画像から得られたデコード結果を利用して所定の処理を行うとともに、デコード成功に応じた所定の報知を行うことで、トリガースイッチ等を利用することなく常時行われる読取処理において情報コードを狙い読みできる光学的情報読取装置を実現することができる。 As a result, even if the optical information reader does not have a trigger switch or the like for instructing the decoding timing, the code image of the information code can be captured by pointing the reading port at the information code to be read by the user. When the state occupied in the image satisfies a predetermined condition, for example, when the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is equal to or larger than the predetermined range, it can be determined that the code image is the reading target. This is because the information code that the user intends to read tends to have a range of the code image occupied in the captured image, such as a predetermined range or more. Therefore, by performing a predetermined process using the decoding result obtained from the code image determined to be the reading target and performing a predetermined notification according to the success of the decoding, the trigger switch or the like is not used at all times. It is possible to realize an optical information reading device capable of aiming and reading an information code in the reading process to be performed.
 請求項23の発明では、読取対象判定部は、コード画像検出部により検出されているコード画像の一部に相当する部分が撮像部による撮像視野から外れた場合でも、撮像視野内のコード画像の残部の状態が所定の条件を満たすと、コード画像が読取対象であると判定する。これにより、使用者が狙い読みしようとしている情報コードの一部が撮像視野外となっただけで直ちにそのコード画像が読取対象外と判定されてしまうこともないので、より正確にそのコード画像が読取対象であるか否かについて判定することができる。 In the invention of claim 23, the reading target determination unit is a code image in the imaging field of view even when a portion corresponding to a part of the code image detected by the code image detection unit is out of the imaging field of view of the imaging unit. When the state of the remaining portion satisfies a predetermined condition, it is determined that the code image is the reading target. As a result, even if a part of the information code that the user is trying to read is out of the imaging field of view, the code image is not immediately determined to be out of the reading target, so that the code image can be more accurately read. It can be determined whether or not it is a reading target.
 請求項24の発明では、読取対象判定部により読取対象であると判定された際のコード画像のデコード処理が成功しておらず、当該判定後にそのコード画像のデコード処理が成功すると、その判定後に得られたデコード結果を利用して処理部により所定の処理が行われて、報知部により所定の報知が行われる。これにより、照明等の周囲環境のために、情報コードらしいものが撮像されていると判断できるもののそのデコードが成功しないままそのコード画像が読取対象であると判定された場合でも、その後の周囲環境の変化でそのコード画像のデコードが成功すると、読取対象のコード画像のデコードが成功したとして、その成功タイミングで上記所定の処理及び所定の報知を行うことができる。 In the invention of claim 24, if the decoding process of the code image when the reading target determination unit determines to be the reading target is not successful and the decoding process of the code image is successful after the determination, after the determination. A predetermined process is performed by the processing unit using the obtained decoding result, and a predetermined notification is performed by the notification unit. As a result, even if it can be determined that an information code-like image has been captured due to the surrounding environment such as lighting, but the code image is determined to be read without successful decoding, the surrounding environment thereafter. If the decoding of the code image is successful due to the change in the above, it is assumed that the decoding of the code image to be read is successful, and the predetermined processing and the predetermined notification can be performed at the success timing.
 請求項25の発明では、撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、デコード部によりデコードされたデコード結果を出力するための出力部と、が設けられる。そして、出力部は、撮像画像の一部を占めるように設けられる所定の読取エリアに対して、デコード部によりデコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの画像が含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの画像が含まれない場合に、上記1つの情報コードのデコード結果を出力する。 In the invention of claim 25, a decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding an information code for an image captured by the imaging unit, an output unit for outputting the decoding result decoded by the decoding unit, and an output unit. Is provided. Then, the output unit includes an image of one information code obtained by the decoding unit for a predetermined reading area provided so as to occupy a part of the captured image, and another information code. When the image of is not included, the decoding result of the above one information code is output.
 これにより、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されているためにデコード部によりそれぞれデコード結果が得られるような場合でも、所定の読取エリアに含まれない情報コードのデコード結果が出力されないだけでなく、2以上の情報コードが所定の読取エリアに含まれてしまう場合にもデコード結果が出力されなくなる。すなわち、複数の情報コードがデコード可能に撮像されたとしても、読取対象とすべき情報コードの画像のみが上記所定の読取エリアに含まれる場合に限ってその情報コードのデコード結果が出力されるので、読取対象とすべき情報コードに読取口を向けている途中で撮像された別の情報コードのデコード結果など、意図せずに読み取った情報コードのデコード結果の出力を制限することができる。 As a result, even if a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged and the decoding results are obtained by the decoding unit, not only the decoding results of the information codes not included in the predetermined reading area are output, but also 2 Even if the above information code is included in the predetermined reading area, the decoding result will not be output. That is, even if a plurality of information codes are imaged so that they can be decoded, the decoding result of the information code is output only when only the image of the information code to be read is included in the predetermined reading area. , It is possible to limit the output of the decoding result of the information code read unintentionally, such as the decoding result of another information code captured while pointing the reading port at the information code to be read.
 請求項26の発明では、出力部は、上記所定の読取エリアに対して、デコード部によりデコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの画像の全てが含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの画像の少なくとも一部が含まれない場合に、上記1つの情報コードのデコード結果を出力する。 In the invention of claim 26, the output unit includes all the images of one information code for which the decoding result is obtained by the decoding unit with respect to the predetermined reading area, and the output unit is an image of another information code. When at least a part is not included, the decoding result of the above one information code is output.
 これにより、例えば、読取対象とすべき情報コードに読取口を向けている途中で、読取対象外の情報コードの一部の画像のみが上記所定の読取エリアに含まれたとしても、その読取対象外の情報コードのデコード結果が出力されることもない。また、読取対象外の情報コードの全ての画像が上記所定の読取エリアに含まれてしまったとしても、読取対象とすべき情報コードの少なくとも一部の画像が上記所定の読取エリアに含まれていれば、それぞれのデコード結果が出力されることもない。このため、読取対象とすべき情報コードの近くに他の情報コードが配置されるような場合であっても、読取対象とすべき情報コードのデコード結果を出力しやすくすることができる。 As a result, for example, even if only a part of the image of the information code not to be read is included in the predetermined reading area while the reading port is directed to the information code to be read, the reading target is The decoding result of the external information code is not output. Further, even if all the images of the information code not to be read are included in the predetermined reading area, at least a part of the images of the information code to be read is included in the predetermined reading area. If so, each decoding result will not be output. Therefore, even when another information code is arranged near the information code to be read, it is possible to easily output the decoding result of the information code to be read.
 請求項27の発明では、出力部は、所定の読取エリアに対して、デコード部によりデコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの特定パターンの画像が含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの特定パターンの画像が含まれない場合に、上記1つの情報コードのデコード結果を出力する。 In the invention of claim 27, the output unit includes an image of a specific pattern of one information code for which a decoding result has been obtained by the decoding unit for a predetermined reading area, and has a specific pattern of another information code. When the image of is not included, the decoding result of the above one information code is output.
 これにより、認識しやすい情報コードの特定パターンを基準にその情報コードの画像が所定の読取エリアに含まれているか否かについて判定できるので、容易かつ精度良く判定することができる。 As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the image of the information code is included in the predetermined reading area based on the specific pattern of the information code that is easy to recognize, so that the determination can be made easily and accurately.
 請求項28の発明では、撮像部による撮像視野に向けてマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部と、撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、デコード部によりデコードされたデコード結果を出力するための出力部と、デコード部によりデコードされた情報コードが撮像画像の一部に相当するデコード対象エリア内に位置しているか否かについて判定するコード位置判定部と、が設けられる。そして、出力部は、撮像部によりマーカ光が撮像されない場合には、コード位置判定部によりデコード対象エリア内に位置していると判定された情報コードのデコード結果を出力する。 In the invention of claim 28, the marker light irradiation unit that irradiates the marker light toward the imaging field of view by the imaging unit, and the decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code for the captured image captured by the imaging unit. And, it is determined whether or not the output unit for outputting the decoding result decoded by the decoding unit and the information code decoded by the decoding unit are located in the decoding target area corresponding to a part of the captured image. A code position determination unit is provided. Then, when the marker light is not imaged by the imaging unit, the output unit outputs the decoding result of the information code determined by the code position determination unit to be located in the decoding target area.
 読取対象の情報コードを含めた複数の情報コードが画面表示される場合、照射されたマーカ光は自ら発光する表示画面では反射されないために、読取装置では撮像された複数の情報コードのうちどの情報コードが読取対象であるかわからないという問題がある。このため、撮像部によりマーカ光が撮像されない場合には、画面表示された情報コードを読み取っているとして、デコード対象エリア内に位置していると判定された情報コードのデコード結果を出力することで、デコード対象エリア外の情報コードのデコード結果が出力されなくなる。すなわち、画面表示される複数の情報コードのうち読取対象の情報コードのみがデコード対象エリア内に位置するようにその画面に対して読取装置の読取口をかざすことで、同じ画面に表示される他の情報コードのデコード結果を出力することなく、読取対象の情報コードのデコード結果を出力することができる。 When a plurality of information codes including the information code to be read are displayed on the screen, the irradiated marker light is not reflected on the display screen that emits light by itself. Therefore, which information of the plurality of information codes captured by the reading device is used. There is a problem that it is not known whether the code is to be read. Therefore, when the marker light is not captured by the imaging unit, it is assumed that the information code displayed on the screen is being read, and the decoding result of the information code determined to be located in the decoding target area is output. , The decoding result of the information code outside the decoding target area is not output. That is, by holding the reading port of the reading device over the screen so that only the information code to be read is located in the decoding target area among the plurality of information codes displayed on the screen, the information code is displayed on the same screen. It is possible to output the decoding result of the information code to be read without outputting the decoding result of the information code of.
 請求項29の発明では、出力部は、デコード部により1つの撮像画像から1つのデコード結果が得られた場合には、その情報コードが読取対象であるか否かについて判断する必要がないので、マーカ光が撮像されているか否かにかかわらず、1つのデコード結果を出力する。 In the invention of claim 29, when one decoding result is obtained from one captured image by the decoding unit, the output unit does not need to determine whether or not the information code is the reading target. One decoding result is output regardless of whether or not the marker light is imaged.
 これにより、撮像画像からマーカ光が検出されているか否かについて判定するための処理等が不要となり、デコード結果の出力に関して処理負荷を軽減することができる。 This eliminates the need for processing for determining whether or not marker light is detected from the captured image, and can reduce the processing load on the output of the decoding result.
 請求項30の発明では、出力部は、撮像部によりマーカ光が撮像されない場合には、コード位置判定部によりデコード対象エリア内に位置していると判定された情報コードであり、かつ、予め設定されたコード種別となる情報コードのデコード結果を出力する。 In the invention of claim 30, the output unit is an information code determined by the code position determination unit to be located in the decoding target area when the marker light is not imaged by the imaging unit, and is set in advance. Outputs the decoding result of the information code that is the code type.
 これにより、読取対象の情報コードに読取口をかざす際に撮像画像において読取対象外の情報コードのみがデコード対象エリア内に位置したとしても、その読取対象外の情報コードのコード種別が予め設定されたコード種別と異なることで、読取対象外の情報コードのデコード結果が出力されてしまうことを防止することができる。 As a result, even if only the information code not to be read is located in the decoding target area in the captured image when the reading port is held over the information code to be read, the code type of the information code not to be read is set in advance. By different from the code type, it is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code not to be read from being output.
 請求項31の発明では、撮像部による撮像視野に向けてマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部と、撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、デコード結果が得られた情報コードに向けてマーカ光が照射されている状態であるか否かについて判定するマーカ照射状態判定部と、マーカ照射状態判定部によりマーカ光が照射されている状態であると判定された情報コードのデコード結果を出力するための出力部と、デコード部により得られたデコード結果が出力部から前回出力されたデコード結果と一致するデコード結果一致状態であるか否かについて判定するデコード結果判定部と、出力部からデコード結果が出力されるごとに、前回出力されたデコード結果に一致するデコード結果が出力されることを防止するための二度読み防止設定を行う二度読み防止設定部と、が設けられる。そして、二度読み防止設定部は、出力部からデコード結果が出力された後にマーカ照射状態判定部によりデコード結果が得られた情報コードに向けてマーカ光が照射されている状態でないと判定されると、二度読み防止設定を解除する。また、出力部は、二度読み防止設定部により二度読み防止設定が行われていると、デコード結果判定部によりデコード結果一致状態であると判定されたデコード結果を出力対象外とし、二度読み防止設定が解除されると、デコード結果判定部によりデコード結果一致状態であると判定されたデコード結果であっても出力対象とする。 In the invention of claim 31, the marker light irradiation unit that irradiates the marker light toward the imaging field of view by the imaging unit and the decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code for the captured image captured by the imaging unit. The marker irradiation state determination unit that determines whether or not the marker light is being irradiated toward the information code for which the decoding result has been obtained, and the marker irradiation state determination unit that is irradiating the marker light. Whether or not the output unit for outputting the decoding result of the information code determined to be and the decoding result obtained by the decoding unit are in the decoding result matching state that matches the decoding result previously output from the output unit. Each time the decoding result is output from the decoding result judgment unit and the output unit, the double-reading prevention setting is set to prevent the decoding result that matches the previously output decoding result from being output. A reading prevention setting unit is provided. Then, the double-reading prevention setting unit determines that the marker light is not irradiated toward the information code for which the decoding result is obtained by the marker irradiation state determination unit after the decoding result is output from the output unit. Then, the double-reading prevention setting is canceled. In addition, if the double-reading prevention setting is set by the double-reading prevention setting unit, the output unit excludes the decoding result determined by the decoding result judgment unit to be in the decoding result matching state, and twice. When the read prevention setting is canceled, even the decoding result determined by the decoding result determination unit to be in the decoding result matching state is output.
 従来、同じデコード結果がそれぞれ記録される複数の情報コードを続けて読み取る場合、二度読み防止機能を解除するために、情報コードを撮像視野から外すような解除操作が必要になり、エリアセンサのように撮像視野が大きな撮像部を有する読取装置では、その解除操作に要する使用者の動作が大きくなるという問題がある。このため、デコード結果が出力された後にその情報コードに向けてマーカ光が照射されている状態でないと判定されると二度読み防止設定を解除することで、デコード結果が出力された情報コードからマーカ光を外す操作によって二度読み防止設定が解除されるので、解除操作に要する使用者の動作を小さくすることができる。 Conventionally, when reading a plurality of information codes in which the same decoding result is recorded in succession, a release operation for removing the information code from the imaging field of view is required in order to cancel the double-reading prevention function. As described above, in a reading device having an imaging unit having a large imaging field of view, there is a problem that the operation of the user required for the release operation becomes large. Therefore, if it is determined that the marker light is not radiated toward the information code after the decoding result is output, the read prevention setting is canceled twice so that the decoding result is output from the information code. Since the double-reading prevention setting is canceled by the operation of removing the marker light, the user's operation required for the cancellation operation can be reduced.
 請求項32の発明では、二度読み防止設定部は、出力部からデコード結果が出力された後に、情報コードを構成するコード領域を含めたコード周辺領域に向けてマーカ光が照射されている状態でないとマーカ照射状態判定部により判定されると、二度読み防止設定を解除する。 In the invention of claim 32, after the decoding result is output from the output unit, the double-reading prevention setting unit is in a state in which the marker light is irradiated toward the code peripheral area including the code area constituting the information code. Otherwise, if the marker irradiation state determination unit determines, the double-reading prevention setting is canceled.
 デコード結果が出力された情報コードからマーカ光が外れただけで二度読み防止設定を解除すると、手振れ等によってマーカ光が一度外れた情報コードに再度照射されたために使用者が意図しない二度読みが生じてしまう場合がある。そこで、情報コードを構成するコード領域が含まれるコード周辺領域を基準として、このコード周辺領域に向けてマーカ光が照射されている状態でない場合に二度読み防止設定を解除することで、手振れ等に起因して誤って二度読み防止設定が解除されることを抑制でき、手振れ等に対するロバスト性を高めることができる。 If the double-reading prevention setting is canceled just because the marker light is removed from the information code that outputs the decoding result, the information code that was once removed from the marker light due to camera shake etc. is irradiated again, so the user does not intend to read it twice. May occur. Therefore, by canceling the double-reading prevention setting when the marker light is not radiated toward the code peripheral area based on the code peripheral area including the code area constituting the information code, camera shake, etc. It is possible to prevent the double-reading prevention setting from being accidentally canceled due to the above, and it is possible to improve the robustness against camera shake and the like.
 請求項33の発明では、上記コード周辺領域は、撮像画像に占める情報コードの大きさに応じて、情報コードに対する大きさが変化するように設定される。 In the invention of claim 33, the code peripheral region is set so that the size of the information code changes according to the size of the information code occupying the captured image.
 撮像画像に占める情報コード及びコード周辺領域の大きさが大きくなると、そのコード周辺領域からマーカ光を外す操作に要する使用者の動作が大きくなってしまう場合がある。このため、例えば、情報コードが比較的大きく撮像される場合には、上記コード周辺領域の大きさを比較的小さく設定する等、撮像画像に占める情報コードの大きさに応じて上記コード周辺領域の大きさを変化させることで、解除操作に要する使用者の動作が大きくなることを抑制することができる。 If the size of the information code and the code peripheral area in the captured image becomes large, the user's operation required for the operation of removing the marker light from the code peripheral area may become large. Therefore, for example, when the information code is imaged relatively large, the size of the code peripheral area is set to be relatively small, and the code peripheral area is set according to the size of the information code occupying the captured image. By changing the size, it is possible to prevent the user's movement required for the release operation from becoming large.
 請求項34の発明では、撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、デコード部によりデコードされたデコード結果を出力するための出力部と、撮像部による撮像画像の一部に相当する一部画像について画像が変化していないとみなされる一部画像一致状態であるか否かについて判定する画像状態判定部と、が設けられる。そして、デコード部は、出力部によりデコード結果が出力されると、画像状態判定部により一部画像一致状態と判定されるまでデコード処理を行わない。 In the invention of claim 34, a decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding an information code for an image captured by the imaging unit, an output unit for outputting the decoding result decoded by the decoding unit, and an output unit. An image state determination unit for determining whether or not a partial image matching state in which the image is considered to have not changed is provided for a partial image corresponding to a part of the image captured by the imaging unit is provided. Then, when the decoding result is output by the output unit, the decoding unit does not perform the decoding process until the image state determination unit determines that a part of the image matches.
 このため、デコード結果が出力されると、一部画像が変化しているとみなされるような状態にならない限りデコード処理がなされることもないので、二度読み防止のために撮像ごとにデコード結果を比較する処理を行う必要もない。これにより、二度読み防止等のための処理負荷の軽減や処理時間の短縮を図ることができる。 Therefore, when the decoding result is output, the decoding process is not performed unless it is considered that a part of the image has changed. Therefore, the decoding result is performed for each image capture to prevent double reading. There is no need to perform the process of comparing. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load and the processing time for preventing double reading and the like.
 請求項35の発明のように、一部画像は、撮像画像に占める範囲が、当該撮像画像の中央部分に設定されてもよい。 As in the invention of claim 35, the range occupied by the captured image may be set in the central portion of the captured image.
 請求項36の発明のように、一部画像は、撮像画像に占める範囲が、当該撮像画像でのマーカ光の位置を基準に設定されてもよい。 As in the invention of claim 36, the range occupied by the captured image may be set based on the position of the marker light in the captured image.
 請求項37の発明では、一部画像は、撮像画像に占める範囲が、前回デコードに成功した情報コードを基準に設定される。これにより、前回デコードに成功した情報コードの位置を基準に撮像画像に占める一部画像の範囲を設定することで、情報コードを構成する各セルの明暗等を基準に上記一部画像が変化しているか判定できるので、判定精度を高めることができる。 In the invention of claim 37, the range occupied by the captured image of some images is set based on the information code that was successfully decoded last time. As a result, by setting the range of a part of the image in the captured image based on the position of the information code that was successfully decoded last time, the part of the image changes based on the brightness of each cell constituting the information code. Since it can be determined whether or not the image is present, the determination accuracy can be improved.
 請求項38の発明では、読取口を構成する縁部を、外側及び内側の双方から弾性的に挟持するようにして保護する保護部材が設けられ、この保護部材は、縁部の外側を覆う外側保護部と、縁部の内側を覆う内側保護部と、外側保護部と内側保護部とを弾性的に連結する連結部と、を有している。そして、縁部の外側には、外側保護部が接着される接着部とこの接着部よりも先端側に位置して当該接着部よりも突出する突出部とが設けられ、外側保護部は、接着部に接着される被接着部と、この被接着部と接着部との接着時に突出部に対向する薄肉状の対向部と、を有するように形成される。 In the invention of claim 38, a protective member for elastically sandwiching the edge portion constituting the reading port from both the outside and the inside is provided, and the protective member covers the outside of the edge portion. It has a protective portion, an inner protective portion that covers the inside of the edge portion, and a connecting portion that elastically connects the outer protective portion and the inner protective portion. Then, on the outside of the edge portion, an adhesive portion to which the outer protective portion is adhered and a protruding portion located on the tip side of the adhesive portion and protruding from the adhesive portion are provided, and the outer protective portion is adhered. It is formed so as to have a portion to be adhered to the portion and a thin-walled facing portion facing the protruding portion when the portion to be adhered and the bonded portion are adhered to each other.
 これにより、読取口を構成する縁部を保護部材により保護する場合には、被接着部と突出部とが接触するように外側保護部と内側保護部との間に縁部が挿入された保護部材をさらに押し込むことで、被接着部が突出部を乗り越えてから接着部に接着される。このように、被接着部は、突出部を乗り越えるまでは接着部に接着されないため、保護部材を縁部に押し込むようにして接着する組付作業であっても、押し込む途中で接着されてしまうこともないので、容易に組付作業を実施することができる。 As a result, when the edge portion constituting the reading port is protected by the protective member, the edge portion is inserted between the outer protective portion and the inner protective portion so that the bonded portion and the protruding portion are in contact with each other. By further pushing the member, the bonded portion gets over the protruding portion and then is bonded to the bonded portion. In this way, the bonded portion is not adhered to the bonded portion until it gets over the protruding portion, so that even in the assembling work in which the protective member is pressed into the edge portion, the bonded portion is adhered in the middle of pushing. Since there is no such thing, the assembly work can be easily carried out.
 請求項39の発明では、突出部は、接着部に近づくほど外側への突出高さが高くなるように形成されるので、被接着部が突出部を乗り越えやすくなり、組付作業の更なる容易化を図ることができる。 In the invention of claim 39, since the protruding portion is formed so that the protruding height becomes higher as it approaches the bonded portion, the bonded portion can easily get over the protruding portion, and the assembling work is further facilitated. Can be achieved.
 請求項40の発明では、突出部は、接着部側の端面が、保護部材を縁部に組み付ける組付方向に対して垂直に近くなるように形成される。これにより、保護部材が接着された縁部から外れようとしても、被接着部が突出部の接着部側の端面に当たって外れ難くなるので、保護部材を縁部に対して強固に組み付けることができる。 In the invention of claim 40, the protruding portion is formed so that the end face on the adhesive portion side is close to perpendicular to the assembling direction in which the protective member is assembled to the edge portion. As a result, even if the protective member tries to come off from the bonded edge portion, the bonded portion hits the end surface of the protruding portion on the adhesive portion side and is difficult to come off, so that the protective member can be firmly assembled to the edge portion.
 請求項41の発明では、縁部の内側には、内側保護部が接着される第2接着部とこの第2接着部よりも先端側に位置して当該第2接着部よりも突出する第2突出部とが設けられ、内側保護部は、第2接着部に接着される第2被接着部と、この第2被接着部と第2接着部との接着時に第2突出部に対向する薄肉状の第2対向部と、を有するように形成される。 In the invention of claim 41, inside the edge portion, a second adhesive portion to which the inner protective portion is adhered and a second adhesive portion located on the tip side of the second adhesive portion and projecting from the second adhesive portion. A protruding portion is provided, and the inner protective portion is a thin wall that faces the second protruding portion when the second bonded portion to be bonded to the second bonded portion and the second bonded portion and the second bonded portion are bonded to each other. It is formed so as to have a second opposed portion having a shape.
 これにより、接着力等を高めるために縁部の外側だけでなく内側でも接着する保護部材であっても、容易に組付作業を実施することができる。 As a result, it is possible to easily carry out the assembling work even if the protective member adheres not only to the outside of the edge but also to the inside in order to increase the adhesive force.
第1実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置の構成概要を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the structural outline of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 1st Embodiment. 把持部を把持した状態を説明する平面図である。It is a top view explaining the state which gripped the grip part. 把持部を把持した状態を説明する側面図である。It is a side view explaining the state which gripped the grip part. 図4(A)は、図1のX1-X1断面を拡大して示す拡大断面図であり、図4(B)は、図1のX2-X2断面を拡大して示す拡大断面図である。FIG. 4A is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged cross section of X1-X1 of FIG. 1, and FIG. 4B is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged cross section of X2-X2 of FIG. 図1の光学的情報読取装置の電気的構成を概略的に例示するブロック図である。FIG. 5 is a block diagram schematically illustrating an electrical configuration of the optical information reader of FIG. 1. 図6(A)は、バーコードに読取口の第1の開口領域を向けた状態を示す説明図であり、図6(B)は、QRコードに読取口の第2の開口領域を向けた状態を示す説明図である。FIG. 6A is an explanatory view showing a state in which the first opening area of the reading port is directed to the barcode, and FIG. 6B is an explanatory view showing a state in which the first opening area of the reading port is directed to the QR code. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state. 第1実施形態の第1変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の読取口近傍の形状を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. 図8(A)は、第1実施形態の第2変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の読取口近傍の形状を説明する説明図であり、図8(B)は、第1実施形態の第3変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の読取口近傍の形状を説明する説明図である。FIG. 8 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading device according to the second modification of the first embodiment, and FIG. 8 (B) is the first embodiment of the first embodiment. 3 It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on a modification. 第2実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置を示す側面図である。It is a side view which shows the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. 図9の読取口近傍の形状を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of FIG. 第2実施形態の第1変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の読取口近傍の形状を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. 図12(A)は、第2実施形態の第2変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の読取口近傍の形状を説明する説明図であり、図12(B)は、第2実施形態の第3変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の読取口近傍の形状を説明する説明図である。FIG. 12 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading device according to the second modification of the second embodiment, and FIG. 12 (B) is the second embodiment of the second embodiment. 3 It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on a modification. 図13(A)は、第2実施形態の第4変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の読取口近傍の形状を説明する説明図であり、図13(B)は、第2実施形態の第5変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の読取口近傍の形状を説明する説明図である。FIG. 13 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading device according to the fourth modification of the second embodiment, and FIG. 13 (B) is the second embodiment. 5 It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 5th modification. 図14(A)は、第2実施形態の第6変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の読取口近傍の形状を説明する説明図であり、図14(B)は、第2実施形態の第7変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の読取口近傍の形状を説明する説明図である。FIG. 14 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading device according to the sixth modification of the second embodiment, and FIG. 14 (B) is the second embodiment. 7 It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the reading port of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on a modification. 第3実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置の構成概要を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the structural outline of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. 第4実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置におけるマーカ光照射部の構成概要を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the structural outline of the marker light irradiation part in the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 4th Embodiment. マーカ光と撮像視野と照明光との位置関係を示す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a marker light, an imaging field of view, and illumination light. 第5実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置を示す側面図である。It is a side view which shows the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 5th Embodiment. 図18の読取口近傍の形状を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape near the reading port of FIG. 図20(A)は、第5実施形態の第1変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の壁部近傍の形状を説明する説明図であり、図20(B)は、第5実施形態の第2変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の壁部近傍の形状を説明する説明図である。FIG. 20 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the wall portion of the optical information reading device according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 20 (B) is the fifth embodiment of the fifth embodiment. 2 It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the wall part of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on a modification. 図21(A)は、第5実施形態の第3変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の壁部近傍の形状を説明する説明図であり、図21(B)は、第5実施形態の第4変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の壁部近傍の形状を説明する説明図であり、図21(C)は、第5実施形態の第5変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の壁部近傍の形状を説明する説明図である。21 (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the shape of the vicinity of the wall portion of the optical information reading device according to the third modification of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 21 (B) is the fifth embodiment of the fifth embodiment. 4 It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the wall part of the optical information reading device which concerns on the modification, and FIG. 21C is the wall part of the optical information reading device which concerns on the 5th modification of the 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity. 第5実施形態の第6変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の壁部近傍の形状を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the shape of the vicinity of the wall part of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 6th modification of 5th Embodiment. 第7実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置の要部を示す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 7th Embodiment. 第7実施形態の第1変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の要部を示す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 1st modification of 7th Embodiment. 第8実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 8th Embodiment. 図25の光学的情報読取装置の側面図である。It is a side view of the optical information reading device of FIG. 図25の光学的情報読取装置の底面図である。It is a bottom view of the optical information reader of FIG. 25. 保持部により保護プレートが保持されている状態を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the state which the protection plate is held by the holding part. 図29(A)は、露出幅及び露出深さを変化させた際の指の接触度合を示す説明図であり、図29(B)は、露出幅及び露出深さを説明する説明図である。FIG. 29 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the degree of contact of the finger when the exposure width and the exposure depth are changed, and FIG. 29 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the exposure width and the exposure depth. .. 第8実施形態の第1変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の要部を示す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 1st modification of 8th Embodiment. 第8実施形態の第2変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の要部を示す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 2nd modification of 8th Embodiment. 図32(A)は、第8実施形態の第3変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の要部を示す説明図であり、図32(B)は、図32(A)のX3-X3断面を拡大して示す拡大断面図である。32 (A) is an explanatory view showing a main part of the optical information reading device according to the third modification of the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 32 (B) is an X3-X3 cross section of FIG. 32 (A). Is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing. 第9実施形態における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in 9th Embodiment. 第10実施形態において読み取り時にバーコードとQRコードとが同時に撮像された撮像画像を示す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows the captured image which the bar code and the QR code were simultaneously imaged at the time of reading in the tenth embodiment. 第10実施形態における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in 10th Embodiment. 第11実施形態における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in 11th Embodiment. 第11実施形態の第1変形例における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in 1st modification of 11th Embodiment. 第11実施形態の第2変形例における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in the 2nd modification of 11th Embodiment. 第11実施形態の第3変形例における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in the 3rd modification of 11th Embodiment. 第11実施形態の第4変形例における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in the 4th modification of 11th Embodiment. 第12実施形態における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in 12th Embodiment. デコード可能なコード画像が検出された連続撮像画像を説明する説明図であり、図42(A)は、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が所定範囲未満である状態を示し、図42(B)は、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が図42(A)のそれよりは大きくても上記所定範囲未満である状態を示し、図42(C)は、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が上記所定範囲以上である状態を示す。FIG. 42 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a continuously captured image in which a decodeable code image is detected, and FIG. 42 (A) shows a state in which the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is less than a predetermined range, and FIG. 42 (B) shows. Indicates a state in which the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is larger than that of FIG. 42 (A) but less than the predetermined range, and FIG. 42 (C) shows that the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is the above. Indicates a state of being above a predetermined range. コード画像が検出された連続撮像画像を説明する説明図であり、図43(A)は、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が所定範囲未満である状態を示し、図43(B)は、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が図43(A)のそれよりは大きくても上記所定範囲未満である状態を示し、図43(C)は、デコード不能な撮像画像内のコード画像の残部が上記所定範囲以上である状態を示す。FIG. 43 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a continuously captured image in which a code image is detected, FIG. 43 (A) shows a state in which the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is less than a predetermined range, and FIG. 43 (B) is an image capture. A state in which the range of the code image occupied in the image is larger than that of FIG. 43 (A) but less than the predetermined range is shown, and FIG. 43 (C) shows that the rest of the code image in the undecodable captured image is the above. Indicates a state of being above a predetermined range. 第12実施形態の第1変形例における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in the 1st modification of 12th Embodiment. コード画像が検出された連続撮像画像を説明する説明図であり、図45(A)は、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が所定範囲未満であってデコードに失敗している状態を示し、図45(B)は、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が図45(A)のそれよりは大きくても上記所定範囲未満であってデコードに失敗している状態を示し、図45(C)は、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が上記所定範囲以上であってデコードに失敗している状態を示し、図45(D)は、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が上記所定範囲未満であってデコードに成功している状態を示す。It is explanatory drawing explaining the continuously captured image in which a code image was detected, and FIG. 45 (A) shows the state that the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is less than a predetermined range, and decoding has failed. 45 (B) shows a state in which the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is larger than that of FIG. 45 (A) but less than the above-mentioned predetermined range, and decoding fails. FIG. 45 (C) shows. , The range of the code image occupied in the captured image is equal to or more than the above-mentioned predetermined range and decoding has failed. FIG. 45 (D) shows that the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is less than the above-mentioned predetermined range. Indicates the state in which decoding is successful. 3つのバーコードが上下に並んで画面表示される状態を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the state which three bar codes are displayed on the screen side by side. 第13実施形態における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in 13th Embodiment. 撮像画像と読取エリアとの位置関係を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the positional relationship between a captured image and a reading area. 読取対象の情報コードの画像と読取対象外の情報コードの画像の一部とが読取エリアに含まれる状態を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the state which includes the image of the information code of a reading target and a part of the image of the information code which is not a reading target in a reading area. 読取対象の情報コードの画像のみが読取エリアに含まれる単一コード撮像状態を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the single code imaging state in which only the image of the information code to be read is included in the reading area. 読取対象の情報コードの全ての特定パターンの画像と他の情報コードの一部の特定パターンの画像とが読取エリアに含まれる状態を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the state which includes the image of all the specific patterns of the information code to be read, and the image of a part of a specific pattern of other information codes in a reading area. 第14実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置とデコード対象エリアとの位置関係を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the positional relationship between the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 14th Embodiment, and a decoding target area. 図52に示す状態で撮像された撮像画像を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the captured image taken in the state shown in FIG. 第14実施形態における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in 14th Embodiment. 第15実施形態における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in 15th Embodiment. 図56(A)は、マーカ光がQRコードCfに照射された状態を示す説明図であり、図56(B)は、マーカ光がQRコードCfから外れた状態を示す説明図であり、図56(C)は、マーカ光がQRコードCgに照射された状態を示す説明図である。FIG. 56 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the marker light is irradiated to the QR code Cf, and FIG. 56 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the marker light deviates from the QR code Cf. 56 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the QR code Cg is irradiated with the marker light. 第16実施形態における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in 16th Embodiment. 図58(A)は、マーカ光がコード領域に照射された状態を示す説明図であり、図58(B)は、マーカ光がコード周辺領域に照射された状態を示す説明図であり、図58(C)は、マーカ光がコード周辺領域から外れた状態を示す説明図である。FIG. 58 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the marker light is irradiated to the cord region, and FIG. 58 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the marker light is irradiated to the cord peripheral region. FIG. 58 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the marker light is out of the cord peripheral region. 図59(A)は、撮像画像に占める情報コードの大きさが大きくなる場合のコード周辺領域を説明する説明図であり、図59(B)は、撮像画像に占める情報コードの大きさが小さくなる場合のコード周辺領域を説明する説明図である。FIG. 59 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a code peripheral region when the size of the information code occupying the captured image is large, and FIG. 59 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the code peripheral region when the size of the information code occupying the captured image is small. It is explanatory drawing explaining the code peripheral area in the case of. コード割合と周辺距離とが関係付けられるテーブルを説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the table which the code ratio and the peripheral distance are related. 従来の読み取りサイクルを説明するタイミングチャートである。It is a timing chart explaining the conventional reading cycle. 第17実施形態において撮像画像に対する一部画像の位置を説明する説明図であり、図62(A)は撮像画像を示し、図62(B)は、図62(A)の撮像画像に対して設定される一部画像を示す。It is explanatory drawing explaining the position of a part image with respect to the captured image in 17th Embodiment, FIG. 62 (A) shows the captured image, and FIG. 62 (B) is with respect to the captured image of FIG. 62 (A). Shows some images to be set. 第17実施形態における読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which illustrates the flow of the reading process in 17th Embodiment. 第17実施形態における読み取りサイクルを説明するタイミングチャートである。It is a timing chart explaining the reading cycle in 17th Embodiment. 撮像画像でのマーカ光の位置を基準に設定された一部画像の位置を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the position of a part image set with respect to the position of the marker light in the captured image. 第18実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置を示す側面図である。It is a side view which shows the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on 18th Embodiment. 縁部に対する保護部材の組み付けを説明する説明図であり、図67(A)は、外側保護部と内側保護部との間に縁部が挿入された状態を示し、図67(B)は、被接着部が突出部を乗り越えた状態を示し、図67(C)は、被接着部が接着部に接着された状態を示す。It is explanatory drawing explaining the assembly of the protection member with respect to the edge part, FIG. 67A shows the state which the edge part is inserted between the outer protection part and the inner protection part, and FIG. The state in which the bonded portion has passed over the protruding portion is shown, and FIG. 67 (C) shows the state in which the bonded portion is adhered to the bonded portion. 第18実施形態の変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の要部を示す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part of the optical information reading apparatus which concerns on the modification of 18th Embodiment.
[第1実施形態]
 以下、本発明に係る光学的情報読取装置を具現化した第1実施形態について、図面を参照して説明する。
 本実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置10は、所望の読取り対象である対象物の表示面に表示された一次元コードや二次元コード等の情報コードを光学的に且つ非接触で読み取る情報コードリーダとして構成されている。ここで、一次元コードとしては、例えば、JANコード、EAN、UPC、ITFコード、CODE39、CODE128、NW-7等からなるいわゆるバーコードが想定される。また、二次元コードとしては、例えば、QRコード、データマトリックスコード、マキシコード、Aztecコード等の方形状の情報コードが想定される。
[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment embodying the optical information reading device according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The optical information reading device 10 according to the present embodiment is an information code that optically and non-contactly reads an information code such as a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code displayed on a display surface of an object to be read. It is configured as a reader. Here, as the one-dimensional code, for example, a so-called bar code composed of JAN code, EAN, UPC, ITF code, CODE39, CODE128, NW-7, etc. is assumed. Further, as the two-dimensional code, for example, a square information code such as a QR code, a data matrix code, a maxi code, or an Aztec code is assumed.
 図1に示すように、光学的情報読取装置10は、ABS樹脂等の合成樹脂からなる上ケース11aおよび下ケース11bが組み付けられて構成される筐体11によって外郭が形成され、この筐体11内に各種電気部品等からなる回路部20aが回路基板20等に実装されて収容されている。筐体11は、読取口50が形成された読取部12と、当該読取部12に一体的に且つ連続的に形成されるとともに当該読取口50を情報コードに向ける際に使用者により把持される把持部13と、を備えている。把持部13は、使用者に把持され易いように形成された胴体部分であり、図1に示す如く、長手方向LTを有する。 As shown in FIG. 1, the optical information reading device 10 has an outer shell formed by a housing 11 formed by assembling an upper case 11a and a lower case 11b made of a synthetic resin such as ABS resin, and the housing 11 A circuit unit 20a made of various electric parts and the like is mounted and housed on a circuit board 20 and the like. The housing 11 is integrally and continuously formed with the reading unit 12 on which the reading port 50 is formed, and is gripped by the user when the reading port 50 is directed toward the information code. It includes a grip portion 13. The grip portion 13 is a body portion formed so as to be easily gripped by the user, and has a longitudinal LT as shown in FIG.
 読取部12は、図1及び図3に示すように、把持部13の長手方向LTの一側の端部13TIP(つまり、先端側の端部)から一体的に且つ連続的に、当該長手方向LTから軽く湾曲しながら斜め下方に延出した延出端部12aを備える。さらに、その延出端部12aに、情報コード読取りのための光学的通路としての読取口50を備える。このように、読取部12は把持部13に一体的に繋がっている。すなわち、筐体11は、その横方向から見た場合、図1に示すように、読取口50が形成される先端側の所要部分が斜め下方に大きく前傾する首曲がり形状に形成されている。
 ここで、斜め下方とは、長手方向LTに対して斜めの角度θを有することであり、下方とは、利用者がコード読取りのための通常の握り方で把持部13を把持したときに(図2,3参照)、読取部12が下向きなる方向を指す。
 この斜め下方に曲げる角度は、長手方向LTに対して、照明光の必要な強度を確保でき、かつ、その照明光に起因する鏡面反射を抑制可能な所望値に設定されている。これにより、図2及び図3に示すように、使用者が把持部13を当該上ケース11a側から指で挟むように把持した状態で、対象物の表示面Rに表示された情報コードCに読取口50を向け易くしている。また、筐体11の他端側(把持部13の長手方向LTにおける他側(手元側))にはケーブル取付部14が形成されている。
 なお、筐体11は、例えば樹脂材料で筒状に形成される場合、筐体11のうちの、把持部13の長手方向LTの先端側端部13TIPに相当する部分から、その先端側の部分(即ち、読取部12に相当する筒状部分)を前記斜め下方に沿って湾曲する、即ち、全体が湾曲しながら、且つ「く」の字状に曲がった筐体11を成すように加工してもよい。また、把持部13と読取部12とをそれぞれ直線的な筒状部材として成形し、それらを上記「く」の字状の筐体11を成すように互いを繋いで(連結して)もよい。なお、把持部13と読取部12の繋ぎ目は、実施形態のように徐々に湾曲する構造であってもよいし(丸みを帯びた曲がり部MGを有する「く」の字状)、相互の筒状部材(13,12)を互いに鈍角で直線的に交差した丸みの無い曲がりを持つように繋いで(連結して)あってよい。
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the reading unit 12 is integrally and continuously from the end portion 13 TIP (that is, the end portion on the tip end side) on one side of the longitudinal LT of the grip portion 13. The extension end portion 12a extending diagonally downward while being slightly curved from the direction LT is provided. Further, the extending end portion 12a is provided with a reading port 50 as an optical passage for reading the information code. In this way, the reading unit 12 is integrally connected to the gripping unit 13. That is, when viewed from the lateral direction, the housing 11 is formed in a neck-bent shape in which the required portion on the tip end side where the reading port 50 is formed is greatly tilted forward diagonally downward, as shown in FIG. ..
Here, diagonally downward means having an oblique angle θ with respect to the longitudinal direction LT, and downward means when the user grips the grip portion 13 in a normal gripping method for reading a code ( (See FIGS. 2 and 3), the reading unit 12 points in the downward direction.
The angle of bending diagonally downward is set to a desired value capable of ensuring the required intensity of the illumination light with respect to the longitudinal LT and suppressing specular reflection caused by the illumination light. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the information code C displayed on the display surface R of the object is displayed in a state where the user grips the grip portion 13 from the upper case 11a side so as to be sandwiched between the fingers. It makes it easier to point the reading port 50. Further, a cable mounting portion 14 is formed on the other end side of the housing 11 (the other side (hand side) of the grip portion 13 in the longitudinal direction LT).
When the housing 11 is formed of, for example, a resin material into a tubular shape, the housing 11 is located on the tip side of the housing 11 from the portion corresponding to the tip end 13 TIP of the longitudinal LT of the grip portion 13. The portion (that is, the tubular portion corresponding to the reading portion 12) is curved along the diagonally downward direction, that is, the entire portion is curved and processed so as to form a housing 11 bent in a dogleg shape. You may. Further, the grip portion 13 and the reading portion 12 may be formed as linear tubular members, and they may be connected (connected) to each other so as to form the above-mentioned "V" -shaped housing 11. .. The joint between the grip portion 13 and the reading portion 12 may have a structure that is gradually curved as in the embodiment (a "dogleg" shape having a rounded curved portion MG), or a mutual structure. Cylindrical members (13, 12) may be connected (connected) so as to have an unrounded bend that intersects linearly at an obtuse angle with each other.
 図4(A)(B)に示すように、読取部12の延出端部12aにおいて、読取口50を構成する周縁51は、前記長手方向LTにおいて把持部13から最も離れた(つまり最も遠い、先端側に位置する)一側縁部52を下底としこの一側縁部52に対向する縁であって当該一側縁部52よりも長さが短い他側縁部53を上底とするように略台形状に形成されている。より具体的には、周縁51は、脚54及び脚55が対称形状となるように略等脚台形状に形成されている。 As shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, at the extending end portion 12a of the reading portion 12, the peripheral edge 51 constituting the reading port 50 is the farthest (that is, the farthest) from the grip portion 13 in the longitudinal direction LT. The one side edge 52 (located on the tip side) is the lower bottom, and the other side edge 53, which is the edge facing the one side edge 52 and is shorter than the one side edge 52, is the upper bottom. It is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape. More specifically, the peripheral edge 51 is formed in a substantially isosceles trapezoidal shape so that the legs 54 and 55 have symmetrical shapes.
 このように読取口50が開口することで、一側縁部52近くの一方向に長い開口領域(以下、第1の開口領域S1ともいう)を、一方向に長い情報コード、すなわち、一次元コードを読み取るための開口領域として利用することができる。また、一側縁部52の一部と他側縁部53とを対辺とする方形状の開口領域(以下、第2の開口領域S2ともいう)を、方形状の情報コード、すなわち、二次元コードを読み取るための開口領域として利用することができる。 By opening the reading port 50 in this way, the opening region (hereinafter, also referred to as the first opening region S1) that is long in one direction near the one-side edge portion 52 is an information code that is long in one direction, that is, one-dimensional. It can be used as an opening area for reading the code. Further, a rectangular opening region (hereinafter, also referred to as a second opening region S2) having a part of the one side edge portion 52 and the other side edge portion 53 as opposite sides is defined as a square information code, that is, two-dimensional. It can be used as an opening area for reading the code.
 特に、本実施形態では、一側縁部52には、上記斜め下方に沿って薄板状に突出する壁部56が設けられている。この壁部56は、周縁51のうち一側縁部52のみをその厚さのまま斜め下方に突出させ、一側縁部52から突出端部56aまでの突出長さHが、突出端部56aを接触させた表示面Rに表示される情報コードCの撮像に適した距離に応じた長さとなるように形成されている。具体的には、壁部56は、例えば、突出長さHが、突出端部56aを接触させた表示面Rに表示される情報コードCの撮像に関してベストフォーカスとなるかベストフォーカスに近づくように、形成されている。
 なお、壁部56は、必ずしも上記斜め下方に沿わなくてもよく、方向的に上記斜め下方に準じており、上記長さに関わる条件を満足させていれば、前記長手方向に対する斜め下方の角度を所定値だけ長手方向に沿って調整した壁構造であってもよい。
In particular, in the present embodiment, the one side edge portion 52 is provided with a wall portion 56 that projects in a thin plate shape along the diagonally downward portion. In this wall portion 56, only one side edge portion 52 of the peripheral edge 51 is projected obliquely downward with its thickness, and the protrusion length H from the one side edge portion 52 to the protruding end portion 56a is the protruding end portion 56a. Is formed so as to have a length corresponding to a distance suitable for imaging of the information code C displayed on the display surface R in contact with the above. Specifically, the wall portion 56 has, for example, such that the protruding length H becomes the best focus or approaches the best focus with respect to the imaging of the information code C displayed on the display surface R in which the protruding end portion 56a is in contact. , Is formed.
The wall portion 56 does not necessarily have to follow the diagonally downward direction, and conforms to the diagonally downward direction, and if the conditions relating to the length are satisfied, the angle of the diagonally downward direction with respect to the longitudinal direction is satisfied. May be a wall structure in which a predetermined value is adjusted along the longitudinal direction.
 このように形成される読取口50は、上ケース11a側から把持部13を把持した状態で、図1に示すように、壁部56の突出端部56aを、使用者から見て情報コードCの奥側近傍となる表示面Rの位置に接触させることで、情報コードCからの反射光を取り込み可能な状態となる。 In the reading port 50 formed in this way, with the grip portion 13 gripped from the upper case 11a side, as shown in FIG. 1, the protruding end portion 56a of the wall portion 56 is viewed from the user with the information code C. By contacting the position of the display surface R near the back side of the above, the reflected light from the information code C can be taken in.
 次に、光学的情報読取装置10の電気的構成について、図面を参照して説明する。
 図1および図5に示すように、上記筐体11に収容される回路部20aは、主に、照明光源21、受光センサ28、結像レンズ27等の光学系と、メモリ35、制御回路40等のマイクロコンピュータ(以下「マイコン」という)系とを備えている。
Next, the electrical configuration of the optical information reading device 10 will be described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the circuit unit 20a housed in the housing 11 mainly includes an optical system such as an illumination light source 21, a light receiving sensor 28, and an imaging lens 27, a memory 35, and a control circuit 40. It is equipped with a microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "microcomputer") system.
 光学系は、投光光学系と、受光光学系とに分かれている。投光光学系を構成する照明光源21は、照明光Lfを発光可能な照明部として機能するもので、例えば、赤色のLED21aとこのLED21aの出射側に設けられるレンズ21bとから構成されている。照明光源21は、図1に示す照明光軸L1からわかるように、結像光軸L2に対して傾斜するように照明光Lfを照射するように配置されている。照明光Lfを結像光軸L2に対して平行に照射すると鏡面反射してしまうからである。なお、図5では、情報コードCが表示された表示面Rに向けて、読取口50を介して照明光Lfを照射する例を概念的に示している。 The optical system is divided into a floodlight optical system and a light receiving optical system. The illumination light source 21 constituting the floodlight optical system functions as an illumination unit capable of emitting illumination light Lf, and is composed of, for example, a red LED 21a and a lens 21b provided on the emission side of the LED 21a. As can be seen from the illumination optical axis L1 shown in FIG. 1, the illumination light source 21 is arranged so as to irradiate the illumination light Lf so as to be inclined with respect to the imaging optical axis L2. This is because if the illumination light Lf is irradiated parallel to the imaging optical axis L2, specular reflection occurs. Note that FIG. 5 conceptually shows an example of irradiating the illumination light Lf through the reading port 50 toward the display surface R on which the information code C is displayed.
 受光光学系は、受光センサ28、結像レンズ27、反射鏡(図示略)などによって構成されている。受光センサ28は、例えば、C-MOSやCCD等の固体撮像素子である受光素子を二次元に配列したエリアセンサとして構成されるものであり、方形状の受光領域として受光面28aを有するように構成されている。この受光センサ28は、読取口50、保護プレート26および結像レンズ27を介して入射する入射光を受光可能に回路基板20に実装されている。 The light receiving optical system is composed of a light receiving sensor 28, an imaging lens 27, a reflecting mirror (not shown), and the like. The light receiving sensor 28 is configured as an area sensor in which light receiving elements, which are solid-state imaging elements such as C-MOS and CCD, are arranged two-dimensionally, and has a light receiving surface 28a as a rectangular light receiving region. It is configured. The light receiving sensor 28 is mounted on the circuit board 20 so as to be able to receive the incident light incident through the reading port 50, the protective plate 26, and the imaging lens 27.
 結像レンズ27は、外部から読取口50を介して入射する入射光を集光して受光センサ28の受光面28aに像を結像可能な結像光学系として機能するものである。本実施形態では、照明光源21から照射された照明光Lfが情報コード等にて反射した後、この反射光Lrを結像レンズ27で集光し、受光センサ28の受光面28aにコード像等を結像させている。本実施形態では、結像レンズ27は、鏡面反射の影響を抑制するため、突出端部56aを表示面Rに接触させた際に結像光軸L2が表示面Rに対して直交することなく傾斜し、想定される表示面Rと結像光軸L2との傾斜角度θが、例えば、45°~70°程度となるように配置されている。特に、結像レンズ27は、図4(B)に示すように、
方形状の受光面28aを有する受光センサ28の図1のX2-X2断面での撮像視野ARが、周縁51との隙間が5mm程度であって周縁51よりも僅かに狭い台形状となるように配置されている。そして、結像レンズ27は、表示面Rからの結像系の折り返し視野(表示面Rにて反射されるようにして撮像される撮像範囲)内に照明光源21が入らないようにするため、受光センサ28の受光面に対して照明光源21から離れる方向(図1の左方向)にずれることで偏心するように配置される。なお、受光センサ28及び結像レンズ27等は、「撮像部」の一例に相当し得る。
The imaging lens 27 functions as an imaging optical system capable of condensing incident light incident from the outside through the reading port 50 and forming an image on the light receiving surface 28a of the light receiving sensor 28. In the present embodiment, after the illumination light Lf emitted from the illumination light source 21 is reflected by an information code or the like, the reflected light Lr is condensed by the imaging lens 27, and a code image or the like is formed on the light receiving surface 28a of the light receiving sensor 28. Is imaged. In the present embodiment, in order to suppress the influence of specular reflection, the imaging lens 27 does not have the imaging optical axis L2 orthogonal to the display surface R when the protruding end portion 56a is brought into contact with the display surface R. It is tilted so that the tilt angle θ between the assumed display surface R and the imaging optical axis L2 is, for example, about 45 ° to 70 °. In particular, the imaging lens 27 has, as shown in FIG. 4B,
The imaging field of view AR in the X2-X2 cross section of FIG. 1 of the light receiving sensor 28 having the rectangular light receiving surface 28a has a trapezoidal shape with a gap of about 5 mm from the peripheral edge 51 and slightly narrower than the peripheral edge 51. Have been placed. Then, the imaging lens 27 prevents the illumination light source 21 from entering the folded field of view of the imaging system from the display surface R (the imaging range imaged by being reflected by the display surface R). The light receiving surface of the light receiving sensor 28 is arranged so as to be eccentric by shifting in a direction away from the illumination light source 21 (left direction in FIG. 1). The light receiving sensor 28, the imaging lens 27, and the like can correspond to an example of the “imaging unit”.
 マイコン系は、増幅回路31、A/D変換回路33、メモリ35、アドレス発生回路36、同期信号発生回路38、制御回路40、トリガースイッチ42、ブザー44、バイブレータ45、発光部46、通信インタフェース48等から構成されている。このマイコン系は、その名の通り、マイコン(情報処理装置)として機能し得る制御回路40およびメモリ35を中心に構成されるもので、上述した光学系によって撮像された情報コードの画像信号をハードウェア的およびソフトウェア的に信号処理し得るものである。また制御回路40は、当該光学的情報読取装置10の全体システムに関する制御も行っている。 The microcomputer system includes an amplifier circuit 31, an A / D conversion circuit 33, a memory 35, an address generation circuit 36, a synchronization signal generation circuit 38, a control circuit 40, a trigger switch 42, a buzzer 44, a vibrator 45, a light emitting unit 46, and a communication interface 48. It is composed of etc. As the name implies, this microcomputer system is composed mainly of a control circuit 40 and a memory 35 that can function as a microcomputer (information processing device), and hardware the image signal of the information code captured by the above-mentioned optical system. It can process signals in terms of hardware and software. The control circuit 40 also controls the entire system of the optical information reading device 10.
 光学系の受光センサ28から出力される画像信号(アナログ信号)は、増幅回路31に入力されることで所定ゲインで増幅された後、A/D変換回路33に入力されると、アナログ信号からディジタル信号に変換される。そして、ディジタル化された画像信号、つまり画像データ(画像情報)は、メモリ35に入力されると、画像データ蓄積領域に蓄積される。なお、同期信号発生回路38は、受光センサ28およびアドレス発生回路36に対する同期信号を発生可能に構成されており、またアドレス発生回路36は、この同期信号発生回路38から供給される同期信号に基づいて、メモリ35に格納される画像データの格納アドレスを発生可能に構成されている。 The image signal (analog signal) output from the light receiving sensor 28 of the optical system is amplified by a predetermined gain by being input to the amplifier circuit 31, and then input to the A / D conversion circuit 33 from the analog signal. Converted to a digital signal. Then, when the digitized image signal, that is, image data (image information) is input to the memory 35, it is stored in the image data storage area. The synchronization signal generation circuit 38 is configured to be capable of generating a synchronization signal for the light receiving sensor 28 and the address generation circuit 36, and the address generation circuit 36 is based on the synchronization signal supplied from the synchronization signal generation circuit 38. Therefore, the storage address of the image data stored in the memory 35 can be generated.
 メモリ35は、半導体メモリ装置で、例えばRAM(DRAM、SRAM等)やROM(EPROM、EEPROM等)がこれに相当する。このメモリ35のうちのRAMには、上述した画像データ蓄積領域のほかに、制御回路40が算術演算や論理演算等の各処理時に利用する作業領域や読取条件テーブルも確保可能に構成されている。また、ROMには、照明光源21、受光センサ28等の各ハードウェアを制御可能なシステムプログラム等が予め格納されている。 The memory 35 is a semiconductor memory device, and for example, a RAM (DRAM, SRAM, etc.) or a ROM (EPROM, EEPROM, etc.) corresponds to this. In addition to the image data storage area described above, the RAM of the memory 35 is configured to be able to secure a work area and a read condition table used by the control circuit 40 at each process such as arithmetic operation and logical operation. .. Further, the ROM stores in advance a system program or the like capable of controlling each hardware such as the illumination light source 21 and the light receiving sensor 28.
 制御回路40は、光学的情報読取装置10全体を制御可能なコンピュータシステムで構成され、CPU、システムバス、入出力インタフェース等を備え、メモリ35とともに情報処理装置を構成する。このため、制御回路40は、その情報処理装置により提供される情報処理機能を有する。この制御回路40は、内蔵された入出力インタフェースを介して種々の入出力装置(周辺装置)と接続可能に構成されており、本実施形態の場合、トリガースイッチ42、ブザー44、バイブレータ45、発光部46、通信インタフェース48等が接続されている。これにより、例えば、トリガースイッチ42の監視や管理、ビープ音やアラーム音を発生可能なブザー44の鳴動のオンオフ、当該光学的情報読取装置10の使用者に伝達し得る振動を発生可能なバイブレータ45の駆動制御、発光部46の点灯、非点灯や外部装置との通信を可能にする通信インタフェース48の通信制御等が制御回路40によって行われることとなる。 The control circuit 40 is composed of a computer system capable of controlling the entire optical information reading device 10, includes a CPU, a system bus, an input / output interface, and the like, and constitutes an information processing device together with a memory 35. Therefore, the control circuit 40 has an information processing function provided by the information processing device. The control circuit 40 is configured to be connectable to various input / output devices (peripheral devices) via a built-in input / output interface. In the case of this embodiment, the trigger switch 42, the buzzer 44, the vibrator 45, and light emission. The unit 46, the communication interface 48, and the like are connected. Thereby, for example, monitoring and management of the trigger switch 42, on / off of the sound of the buzzer 44 capable of generating a beep sound or an alarm sound, and a vibrator 45 capable of generating vibration that can be transmitted to the user of the optical information reading device 10. The control circuit 40 performs drive control, lighting of the light emitting unit 46, non-lighting, and communication control of the communication interface 48 that enables communication with an external device.
 次に、上述のように構成される光学的情報読取装置10を用いて情報コードCを読み取る場合について、図6を参照して説明する。
 一次元コードや二次元コード等の情報コードを読み取る場合には、制御回路40(即ち、上述したコンピュータシステム)により以下のように読取処理が行われる。
Next, a case where the information code C is read by using the optical information reading device 10 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When reading an information code such as a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code, the control circuit 40 (that is, the computer system described above) performs the reading process as follows.
 一方向に長い一次元コードとしてバーコードC1を読み取る場合には、壁部56の突出端部56aをバーコードC1の奥側近傍となる表示面Rの位置に接触させることで、図6(A)に示すように、第1の開口領域S1を介してバーコードC1を撮像可能な状態になる。また、二次元コードとしてQRコードC2を読み取る場合でも、壁部56の突出端部56aをQRコードC2の奥側近傍となる表示面Rの位置に接触させることで、図6(B)に示すように、第2の開口領域S2を介してQRコードC2を撮像可能な状態になる。 When reading the barcode C1 as a one-dimensional code long in one direction, the protruding end portion 56a of the wall portion 56 is brought into contact with the position of the display surface R near the back side of the barcode C1 to be brought into contact with FIG. 6 (A). ), The barcode C1 can be imaged through the first opening region S1. Further, even when the QR code C2 is read as a two-dimensional code, the protruding end portion 56a of the wall portion 56 is brought into contact with the position of the display surface R near the back side of the QR code C2 to be shown in FIG. 6 (B). As described above, the QR code C2 can be imaged through the second opening region S2.
 このように、情報コードCの奥側近傍となる表示面Rの位置に壁部56の突出端部56aを接触させた状態で、トリガースイッチ42に対して所定の操作がなされると、照明光源21から照明光Lfが読取口50を介して照射されて、情報コードCにて反射された反射光Lrが読取口50を介して受光センサ28にて受光される。このように照明光Lfが照射される際には、壁部56の突出端部56aが表示面Rに接触しているために光が漏れないので、使用者から見て奥側からの外来光が撮像されることもなく、読取口50を向けている方向(上記奥側に相当する方向)にいる人が照明光Lfによって眩しさを感じることもない。その一方で、読取口50の手前側には壁部56が設けられていないため、情報コードCの視認性を損なうこともない。 In this way, when a predetermined operation is performed on the trigger switch 42 with the protruding end portion 56a of the wall portion 56 in contact with the position of the display surface R near the back side of the information code C, the illumination light source Illumination light Lf is emitted from 21 through the reading port 50, and the reflected light Lr reflected by the information code C is received by the light receiving sensor 28 via the reading port 50. When the illumination light Lf is irradiated in this way, the light does not leak because the protruding end portion 56a of the wall portion 56 is in contact with the display surface R, so that the external light from the back side as seen from the user. Is not imaged, and a person in the direction in which the reading port 50 is directed (the direction corresponding to the back side) does not feel glare due to the illumination light Lf. On the other hand, since the wall portion 56 is not provided on the front side of the reading port 50, the visibility of the information code C is not impaired.
 上記受光に応じて受光センサ28から出力される信号に基づいて、情報コードCが撮像されて画像データが生成されると、この画像データのうち情報コードCに相当するコード画像に対して公知のデコード処理(読取処理)が実施される。この処理により、情報コードCとしてコード化された文字データ等がデコードされる。 When the information code C is imaged and image data is generated based on the signal output from the light receiving sensor 28 in response to the light reception, the code image corresponding to the information code C among the image data is known. Decoding processing (reading processing) is performed. By this process, the character data or the like encoded as the information code C is decoded.
 このデコードが成功すると、このデコード成功を報知するための報知部の処理として、ブザー44の鳴動、バイブレータ45の振動および発光部46の発光等の少なくともいずれか1つがなされる。なお、受光センサ28から出力される一部の信号に基づいて生成された画像データに基づいてデコードが成功した場合には、残りの信号は不要となる。この場合には残りの信号に基づく画像データの生成以降の処理を中断することで、デコード(光学的な読み取り)に関する処理負荷を軽減できるだけでなく、処理時間を短縮することができる。 When this decoding is successful, at least one of the ringing of the buzzer 44, the vibration of the vibrator 45, the light emission of the light emitting unit 46, and the like is performed as the processing of the notification unit for notifying the success of the decoding. If the decoding is successful based on the image data generated based on a part of the signals output from the light receiving sensor 28, the remaining signals are unnecessary. In this case, by interrupting the processing after the generation of the image data based on the remaining signal, not only the processing load related to decoding (optical reading) can be reduced, but also the processing time can be shortened.
 以上説明したように、本実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置10では、筐体11は、照明光源21からの照明光Lfを出射して情報コードCからの光を当該筐体11の内部に導入する読取口50が形成された読取部12と、読取口50を情報コードCに向ける際に把持される把持部13と、を備えている。そして、読取部12は、把持部13の長手方向LTの一側の先端部から緩やかに湾曲し、連続的に且つ斜め下方に延出して、把持部13に一体的に繋がっている。読取部12の延出端部12aには読取口50が位置している。読取口50の周縁51のうち把持部13から最も離れた(つまり最も遠い、先端側に位置する)一側縁部52には、上記斜め下方に沿って突出する壁部56が設けられる。 As described above, in the optical information reading device 10 according to the present embodiment, the housing 11 emits the illumination light Lf from the illumination light source 21 and emits the light from the information code C into the housing 11. It includes a reading unit 12 in which a reading port 50 to be introduced is formed, and a gripping unit 13 that is gripped when the reading port 50 is directed toward the information code C. The reading unit 12 is gently curved from the tip of the grip portion 13 on one side in the longitudinal direction LT, extends continuously and diagonally downward, and is integrally connected to the grip portion 13. The reading port 50 is located at the extending end 12a of the reading unit 12. Of the peripheral edge 51 of the reading port 50, the one side edge portion 52 farthest from the grip portion 13 (that is, the farthest and located on the tip side) is provided with a wall portion 56 projecting diagonally downward.
 これにより、表示面Rから読取口50を離した状態で情報コードCを撮像する際には、把持部13を把持する使用者から見て情報コードCの奥側に壁部56が位置し、情報コードCの手前側には使用者自身が位置するため、情報コードCの視認性を損なうことなく、情報コードC等にて反射した外来光を撮像され難くすることができる。さらに、読取口50を介した照明光Lfによる情報コードC等での反射光が壁部56によって情報コードCの奥側に反射され難くなるので、読取口50を向けている方向(上記奥側に相当する方向)にいる人が感じる眩しさを抑制することができる。特に、壁部56の先端側となる突出端部56aを表示面Rに接触させるため、外来光の影響や周囲の人が感じる眩しさをより確実に抑制することができる。したがって、情報コードCを読み取る際に、その情報コードCの視認性を損なうことなく、外来光の影響や周囲の人が感じる眩しさを抑制し得る光学的情報読取装置10を実現することができる。 As a result, when the information code C is imaged with the reading port 50 away from the display surface R, the wall portion 56 is located behind the information code C when viewed from the user who grips the grip portion 13. Since the user himself / herself is located on the front side of the information code C, it is possible to make it difficult to image the external light reflected by the information code C or the like without impairing the visibility of the information code C. Further, since the reflected light from the information code C or the like by the illumination light Lf passing through the reading port 50 is less likely to be reflected by the wall portion 56 to the back side of the information code C, the direction in which the reading port 50 is directed (the back side). It is possible to suppress the glare felt by a person in the direction corresponding to). In particular, since the protruding end portion 56a, which is the tip end side of the wall portion 56, is brought into contact with the display surface R, the influence of external light and the glare felt by surrounding people can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, when reading the information code C, it is possible to realize an optical information reading device 10 capable of suppressing the influence of external light and the glare felt by surrounding people without impairing the visibility of the information code C. ..
 特に、壁部56は、一側縁部52から突出端部56aまでの突出長さHが、突出端部56aを接触させた表示面Rに表示される情報コードCの撮像に適した距離に応じた長さとなるように形成されている。これにより、突出端部56aを表示面Rに接触させるようにして読取口50を情報コードCに向けることで、読み取りに適した情報コードCを撮像できるので、情報コードCの読取成功率を高めることができる。 In particular, the wall portion 56 has a protruding length H from the one side edge portion 52 to the protruding end portion 56a at a distance suitable for imaging the information code C displayed on the display surface R in which the protruding end portion 56a is in contact. It is formed so as to have a corresponding length. As a result, the information code C suitable for reading can be imaged by directing the reading port 50 toward the information code C so that the protruding end portion 56a is in contact with the display surface R, so that the reading success rate of the information code C is increased. be able to.
 また、結像レンズ27は、受光センサ28の受光面に対して照明光源21から離れる方向にずれて配置されるため、表示面Rからの折り返し視野内に照明光源21が入り難くなり、この点からしても照明光に起因する鏡面反射を抑制することができる。 Further, since the imaging lens 27 is arranged so as to be displaced from the light receiving surface of the light receiving sensor 28 in a direction away from the illumination light source 21, it becomes difficult for the illumination light source 21 to enter the folded field from the display surface R. Therefore, it is possible to suppress specular reflection caused by illumination light.
 本第1実施形態の第1変形例として、一側縁部52及び壁部56は、図7に例示するように、読取口50を平面視したときに、円弧状となるように形成されてもよい。すなわち、周縁51は、読取口50を平面視したときに、少なくとも一部が円弧状となるように形成されてもよい。 As a first modification of the first embodiment, the one side edge portion 52 and the wall portion 56 are formed so as to have an arc shape when the reading port 50 is viewed in a plan view, as illustrated in FIG. May be good. That is, the peripheral edge 51 may be formed so that at least a part thereof has an arc shape when the reading port 50 is viewed in a plan view.
 また、第1実施形態の第2変形例として、結像レンズ27等は、図1のX2-X2断面に相当する位置での撮像視野ARが、図8(A)に例示するように、壁部56の内面を撮像範囲とするように、配置されてもよい。また、第1実施形態の第3変形例として、結像レンズ27等は、上述したように壁部56が円弧状に形成される場合でも、図1のX2-X2断面に相当する位置での撮像視野ARが、図8(B)に例示するように、円弧状の壁部56の内面の少なくとも一部を撮像範囲とするように、配置されてもよい。 Further, as a second modification of the first embodiment, in the imaging lens 27 and the like, the imaging field AR at the position corresponding to the X2-X2 cross section of FIG. 1 is a wall as illustrated in FIG. 8 (A). It may be arranged so that the inner surface of the portion 56 is the imaging range. Further, as a third modification of the first embodiment, the imaging lens 27 or the like is at a position corresponding to the X2-X2 cross section of FIG. 1 even when the wall portion 56 is formed in an arc shape as described above. As illustrated in FIG. 8B, the imaging field AR may be arranged so that at least a part of the inner surface of the arcuate wall portion 56 is the imaging range.
[第2実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第2実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、図9及び図10を用いて説明する。
 本第2実施形態では、読取部12の読取口50近傍の形状が主に上記第1実施形態と異なる。このため、第1実施形態と実質的に同様の構成部分には同一符号を付して説明を省略する。
[Second Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.
In the second embodiment, the shape of the reading unit 12 in the vicinity of the reading port 50 is mainly different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the components substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.
 図9及び図10に示すように、本実施形態では、読取口50の周縁51には、当該読取口50を介して対向しそれぞれ壁部56に連なる一対の対向部57a,57bが設けられている。対向部57aは、脚54をその厚さのまま斜め下方に突出させ、一側縁部52に近くなるほど突出長さが長くなり、一側縁部52の近傍部位では突出長さが壁部56の突出長さHに等しくなるように形成されている。また、対向部57bは、脚55をその厚さのまま斜め下方に突出させ、一側縁部52に近くなるほど突出長さが長くなり、一側縁部52の近傍部位では突出長さが壁部56の突出長さHに等しくなるように形成されている。すなわち、本実施形態では、周縁51から断面略コ字状の壁部が斜め下方に突出するように形成される。特に、対向部57a,57bは、図9に示すように、突出端側ほど幅が狭くなるように対称に形成されている。 As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, in the present embodiment, the peripheral edge 51 of the reading port 50 is provided with a pair of facing portions 57a and 57b facing each other via the reading port 50 and connected to the wall portion 56, respectively. There is. The facing portion 57a projects the leg 54 diagonally downward with its thickness, and the protrusion length becomes longer as it gets closer to the one side edge portion 52, and the protrusion length becomes the wall portion 56 in the vicinity of the one side edge portion 52. It is formed so as to be equal to the protrusion length H of. Further, in the facing portion 57b, the leg 55 is projected diagonally downward with its thickness, and the protruding length becomes longer as it gets closer to the one side edge portion 52, and the protruding length becomes a wall in the vicinity of the one side edge portion 52. It is formed so as to be equal to the protruding length H of the portion 56. That is, in the present embodiment, the wall portion having a substantially U-shaped cross section is formed so as to project diagonally downward from the peripheral edge 51. In particular, as shown in FIG. 9, the facing portions 57a and 57b are symmetrically formed so that the width becomes narrower toward the protruding end side.
 このように、壁部56及び一対の対向部57a,57bが設けられることで、一対の対向部57a,57bを利用して壁部56を補強しつつ、上記奥側からの外来光の影響だけでなく左右方向からの外来光の影響も抑制することができる。 By providing the wall portion 56 and the pair of facing portions 57a and 57b in this way, the wall portion 56 is reinforced by utilizing the pair of facing portions 57a and 57b, and only the influence of the external light from the back side is obtained. It is also possible to suppress the influence of external light from the left and right directions.
 本第2実施形態の第1変形例として、一対の対向部57a,57bは、図11に例示するように、読取口50が方形状に開口するように形成される場合には、互いに略平行となるように形成されてもよい。 As a first modification of the second embodiment, the pair of facing portions 57a and 57b are substantially parallel to each other when the reading port 50 is formed so as to open in a square shape, as illustrated in FIG. It may be formed so as to be.
 また、第2実施形態の第2変形例として、略台形状の読取口50を介して一対の対向部57a,57bが配置される構成において、結像レンズ27等は、図1のX2-X2断面に相当する位置での撮像視野ARが、図12(A)に例示するように、壁部56の内面を撮像範囲とするように、配置されてもよい。また、第2実施形態の第3変形例として、方形状の読取口50を介して一対の対向部57a,57bが配置される構成において、結像レンズ27等は、図1のX2-X2断面に相当する位置での撮像視野ARが、図12(B)に例示するように、壁部56の内面を撮像範囲とするように、配置されてもよい。 Further, as a second modification of the second embodiment, in a configuration in which a pair of facing portions 57a and 57b are arranged via a substantially trapezoidal reading port 50, the imaging lens 27 and the like are X2-X2 in FIG. The imaging field of view AR at a position corresponding to the cross section may be arranged so that the inner surface of the wall portion 56 is the imaging range, as illustrated in FIG. 12 (A). Further, as a third modification of the second embodiment, in a configuration in which a pair of facing portions 57a and 57b are arranged via a rectangular reading port 50, the imaging lens 27 and the like have an X2-X2 cross section of FIG. The imaging field of view AR at the position corresponding to may be arranged so that the inner surface of the wall portion 56 is the imaging range as illustrated in FIG. 12 (B).
 また、第2実施形態の第4変形例として、一側縁部52及び壁部56は、図13(A)に例示するように、読取口50を平面視したときに、円弧状となるように形成されてもよい。すなわち、周縁51は、読取口50を平面視したときに、少なくとも一部が円弧状となるように形成されてもよい。また、第2実施形態の第5変形例として、一対の対向部57a,57bは、図13(B)に例示するように、上述したように壁部56が円弧状に形成される場合に、互いに略平行となるように形成されてもよい。 Further, as a fourth modification of the second embodiment, the one side edge portion 52 and the wall portion 56 have an arc shape when the reading port 50 is viewed in a plan view, as illustrated in FIG. 13 (A). May be formed in. That is, the peripheral edge 51 may be formed so that at least a part thereof has an arc shape when the reading port 50 is viewed in a plan view. Further, as a fifth modification of the second embodiment, the pair of facing portions 57a and 57b are formed in an arc shape as described above when the wall portions 56 are formed in an arc shape as illustrated in FIG. 13B. It may be formed so as to be substantially parallel to each other.
 また、第2実施形態の第6変形例として、結像レンズ27等は、上述したように一側縁部52及び壁部56が円弧状に形成される場合でも、図1のX2-X2断面に相当する位置での撮像視野ARが、図14(A)に例示するように、円弧状の壁部56の内面を撮像範囲とするように、配置されてもよい。また、第2実施形態の第7変形例として、結像レンズ27等は、上述したように一側縁部52及び壁部56が円弧状に形成されるとともに一対の対向部57a,57bが互いに略平行となるように形成される場合でも、図1のX2-X2断面に相当する位置での撮像視野ARが、図14(B)に例示するように、円弧状の壁部56の内面を撮像範囲とするように、配置されてもよい。 Further, as a sixth modification of the second embodiment, the imaging lens 27 and the like have the X2-X2 cross section of FIG. 1 even when the one side edge portion 52 and the wall portion 56 are formed in an arc shape as described above. As illustrated in FIG. 14A, the imaging field of view AR at the position corresponding to the above may be arranged so that the inner surface of the arcuate wall portion 56 is the imaging range. Further, as a seventh modification of the second embodiment, in the imaging lens 27 and the like, as described above, the one side edge portion 52 and the wall portion 56 are formed in an arc shape, and the pair of facing portions 57a and 57b are mutually formed. Even when the lenses are formed so as to be substantially parallel, the imaging field of view AR at the position corresponding to the X2-X2 cross section of FIG. 1 covers the inner surface of the arcuate wall portion 56 as illustrated in FIG. 14 (B). It may be arranged so as to cover the imaging range.
[第3実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第3実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第3実施形態では、照明光源21から照射される照明光Lfの照射方向が主に上記第1実施形態と異なる。このため、第1実施形態と実質的に同様の構成部分には同一符号を付して説明を省略する。
[Third Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
In the third embodiment, the irradiation direction of the illumination light Lf emitted from the illumination light source 21 is mainly different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the components substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.
 表示面Rに対する照明光Lfの照射方向の角度、すなわち、表示面Rと照明光軸L1との傾斜角度の角度を90°に近づけると、照明光Lfに起因する鏡面反射が読み取りに影響しやすくなる。その一方で、上記照射方向の角度を単に小さくすると、読取口50を向けた情報コードCに照明光Lfが照射され難くなる。 When the angle of the illumination light Lf with respect to the display surface R, that is, the angle of inclination between the display surface R and the illumination light axis L1 is close to 90 °, the specular reflection caused by the illumination light Lf tends to affect the reading. Become. On the other hand, if the angle in the irradiation direction is simply reduced, it becomes difficult for the illumination light Lf to irradiate the information code C with the reading port 50 directed.
 そこで、本実施形態では、図15に例示するように、照明光源21は、照明光Lfを壁部56の内面56bに向けて照射するように配置される。 Therefore, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 15, the illumination light source 21 is arranged so as to irradiate the illumination light Lf toward the inner surface 56b of the wall portion 56.
 これにより、突出端部56aを情報コードCの奥側近傍となる表示面Rの位置に接触させた状態で、照明光源21から照射された照明光Lfは、読取口50を通過した後に壁部56の内面56bにて反射することで、情報コードCに照射される。 As a result, the illumination light Lf emitted from the illumination light source 21 in a state where the protruding end portion 56a is in contact with the position of the display surface R near the back side of the information code C passes through the reading port 50 and then the wall portion. The information code C is irradiated by reflecting on the inner surface 56b of 56.
 このように、照明光Lfが読取口50を介して壁部56の内面56bに向けて照射されるように照明光源21を配置することで、壁部56を近づけた情報コードCが当該壁部56にて反射された反射光によって照らされるため、必要な照度を確保しつつ、情報コードCの読み取りに関して照明光Lfに起因する鏡面反射の影響を抑制することができる。 In this way, by arranging the illumination light source 21 so that the illumination light Lf is emitted toward the inner surface 56b of the wall portion 56 through the reading port 50, the information code C that brings the wall portion 56 closer is the wall portion. Since it is illuminated by the reflected light reflected by 56, it is possible to suppress the influence of the mirror surface reflection caused by the illumination light Lf on the reading of the information code C while ensuring the necessary illuminance.
 なお、照明光Lfを壁部56の内面56bに向けて照射する本実施形態の特徴的構成は、他の実施形態等にも適用することができる。 Note that the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, which irradiates the illumination light Lf toward the inner surface 56b of the wall portion 56, can be applied to other embodiments and the like.
[第4実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第4実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第4実施形態では、撮像視野ARの中心を示すためのマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部が設けられる点が主に上記第1実施形態と異なる。このため、第1実施形態と実質的に同様の構成部分には同一符号を付して説明を省略する。
[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
The fourth embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that a marker light irradiation unit for irradiating a marker light for indicating the center of the imaging field AR is provided. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the components substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.
 本実施形態では、図16に示すように、撮像視野ARの中心(結像光軸L2)を示すための円状のマーカ光Lmを、読取口50を介して照射するマーカ光照射部29が、筐体11内に設けられている。このマーカ光照射部29は、マーカ光源29a、絞り29b、マーカレンズ29c等を備えており、マーカ光Lmのマーカ光軸L3と結像光軸L2との角度差を小さくしつつ、マーカ光源29aが受光センサ28に近接するように配置されている。 In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the marker light irradiation unit 29 that irradiates the circular marker light Lm for indicating the center of the imaging field AR (imaging optical axis L2) through the reading port 50. , Is provided in the housing 11. The marker light irradiation unit 29 includes a marker light source 29a, an aperture 29b, a marker lens 29c, and the like, and while reducing the angle difference between the marker optical axis L3 of the marker light Lm and the imaging optical axis L2, the marker light source 29a Is arranged so as to be close to the light receiving sensor 28.
 特に、本実施形態では、情報コードCを読み取り可能な状態では、照明光Lfとマーカ光Lmとが交互に照射されるように構成されており、使用者は、照明光Lfとマーカ光Lmとが同時に照射されているように視認する。このため、本実施形態では、照明光Lfの色として赤色が採用されており、カラーユニバーサルデザインを意識して、マーカ光Lmの色として、視感度最大の555nmに近い波長となる緑色が採用されている。なお、上述した照明光Lf及びマーカ光Lmの色はあくまで一例であり、例えば、照明光Lfが白色で照射される場合にマーカ光Lmが赤色で照射されてもよいし、照明光Lfが赤色で照射される場合にマーカ光Lmが橙色で照射されてもよいし、照明光Lfが白色で照射される場合にマーカ光Lmが緑色で照射されてもよい。 In particular, in the present embodiment, the illumination light Lf and the marker light Lm are alternately irradiated in a state where the information code C can be read, and the user can use the illumination light Lf and the marker light Lm. Is visually recognized as being irradiated at the same time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, red is adopted as the color of the illumination light Lf, and green, which has a wavelength close to 555 nm, which is the maximum visual sensitivity, is adopted as the color of the marker light Lm in consideration of Color Universal Design. ing. The colors of the illumination light Lf and the marker light Lm described above are merely examples. For example, when the illumination light Lf is irradiated in white, the marker light Lm may be irradiated in red, or the illumination light Lf is red. The marker light Lm may be irradiated in orange when irradiated with, or the marker light Lm may be irradiated in green when the illumination light Lf is irradiated in white.
 上述のようにマーカ光照射部29が設けられることで、情報コードCを読み取るために照明光Lfが照射されている場合には、図17に例示するように、撮像視野ARの中心を示すマーカ光Lmが視認される。これにより、使用者は、マーカ光Lmの位置によって撮像視野ARを容易に視認することができ、情報コードCに対して適切に読取口50を向けることができる。 When the marker light irradiation unit 29 is provided as described above and the illumination light Lf is irradiated to read the information code C, as shown in FIG. 17, a marker indicating the center of the imaging field AR is shown. The light Lm is visually recognized. As a result, the user can easily visually recognize the imaging field AR by the position of the marker light Lm, and can appropriately point the reading port 50 with respect to the information code C.
 なお、撮像視野ARの中心を示すためのマーカ光Lmを照射する本実施形態の特徴的構成は、他の実施形態等にも適用することができる。 Note that the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment that irradiates the marker light Lm for indicating the center of the imaging field AR can be applied to other embodiments and the like.
[第5実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第5実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第5実施形態では、二次元コードの読み取りを容易にするためのガイド部が壁部に設けられる点が主に上記第1実施形態と異なる。このため、第1実施形態と実質的に同様の構成部分には同一符号を付して説明を省略する。
[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
The fifth embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that a guide portion for facilitating the reading of the two-dimensional code is provided on the wall portion. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the components substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.
 上述したように、第1実施形態における読取口50は、一方向に長い一次元コードと方形状の二次元コードとの双方を読取対象とするために略台形状に開口しており、前記長手方向LTにおいて把持部13から最も離れた一側縁部52を下底としこの一側縁部52に壁部56が設けられている。このため、壁部56の外面56cを見ながら読取口50を二次元コードに向ける際には、壁部56によって二次元コードが隠されてしまい、正確に第2の開口領域S2を二次元コードに向けることができない場合がある。 As described above, the reading port 50 in the first embodiment is opened in a substantially trapezoidal shape in order to read both the one-dimensional code long in one direction and the two-dimensional code having a square shape. A wall portion 56 is provided on the one side edge portion 52 with the one side edge portion 52 farthest from the grip portion 13 as the lower bottom in the direction LT. Therefore, when the reading port 50 is directed toward the two-dimensional code while looking at the outer surface 56c of the wall portion 56, the two-dimensional code is hidden by the wall portion 56, and the second opening region S2 is accurately defined as the two-dimensional code. It may not be possible to turn to.
 そこで、本実施形態では、図18及び図19に示すように、壁部56の突出端部56a近傍となる外面56cに、二次元コードを読み取る際にガイドとして機能するガイド部60が設けられている。ガイド部60は、一対のガイド61,62を備えている。図19に示すように、ガイド61は、他側縁部53の一端部を一側縁部52に対して垂直に投影した位置にて突起状に形成されており、ガイド62は、他側縁部53の他端部を一側縁部52に対して垂直に投影した位置にて突起状に形成されている。 Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, a guide portion 60 that functions as a guide when reading the two-dimensional code is provided on the outer surface 56c near the protruding end portion 56a of the wall portion 56. There is. The guide unit 60 includes a pair of guides 61 and 62. As shown in FIG. 19, the guide 61 is formed in a protruding shape at a position where one end of the other side edge 53 is projected perpendicularly to the one side edge 52, and the guide 62 is formed in a protruding shape. The other end of the portion 53 is formed in a protruding shape at a position projected perpendicularly to the one side edge portion 52.
 これにより、壁部56の外面56cを見ながら読取口50を二次元コードに向ける場合でも、ガイド61とガイド62との間に二次元コードが位置していることで、第2の開口領域S2を二次元コードに向けることができるので、二次元コードの読取動作を容易に行うことができる。 As a result, even when the reading port 50 is directed toward the two-dimensional code while looking at the outer surface 56c of the wall portion 56, the two-dimensional code is located between the guide 61 and the guide 62, so that the second opening region S2 Can be directed to the two-dimensional code, so that the reading operation of the two-dimensional code can be easily performed.
 本実施形態の変形例として、一対のガイド61,62は、薄板状に突出する壁部56に設けられることに限らず、図20(A)に示す第5実施形態の第1変形例のように、図10に示す壁部56に設けられてもよいし、図20(B)に示す第5実施形態の第2変形例のように、図11に示す壁部56に設けられてもよい。また、一対のガイド61,62は、図21(A)に示す第5実施形態の第3変形例のように、図7に示す壁部56に設けられてもよいし、図21(B)に示す第5実施形態の第4変形例のように、図13(A)に示す壁部56に設けられてもよいし、図21(C)に示す第5実施形態の第5変形例のように、図13(B)に示す壁部56に設けられてもよい。その際、結像レンズ27等は、図1のX2-X2断面に相当する位置での撮像視野ARが、上述したように、壁部56の内面を撮像範囲とするように配置されてもよい。 As a modification of the present embodiment, the pair of guides 61 and 62 are not limited to being provided on the wall portion 56 protruding in a thin plate shape, as in the first modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 20 (A). It may be provided on the wall portion 56 shown in FIG. 10, or it may be provided on the wall portion 56 shown in FIG. 11 as in the second modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 20 (B). .. Further, the pair of guides 61 and 62 may be provided on the wall portion 56 shown in FIG. 7 as in the third modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 21 (A), or may be provided on the wall portion 56 shown in FIG. 21 (B). Like the fourth modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 13 (A), the wall portion 56 may be provided, or the fifth modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 21 (C). As described above, it may be provided on the wall portion 56 shown in FIG. 13 (B). At that time, the imaging lens 27 and the like may be arranged so that the imaging field of view AR at the position corresponding to the X2-X2 cross section of FIG. 1 has the inner surface of the wall portion 56 as the imaging range as described above. ..
 また、一対のガイド61,62は、二次元コードを読み取るための第2の開口領域S2の位置を想像しやすくするため、図22に示す第5実施形態の第6変形例のように、突出端部56aに近くなるほど、ガイド61とガイド62とが離れるように配置されてもよい。 Further, the pair of guides 61 and 62 protrudes as in the sixth modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 22 in order to make it easier to imagine the position of the second opening region S2 for reading the two-dimensional code. The guide 61 and the guide 62 may be arranged so as to be closer to the end portion 56a.
 なお、一対のガイド61,62は、壁部56の外面56cに対して一体となるように突起状に形成されることに限らず、切欠き等を利用して、視認しやすい形状にて形成されればよい。また、一対のガイド61,62は、外面56cに対して印刷等を利用して表示されてもよいし、LED等の発光部を利用して表示されてもよい。また、ガイド部60として液晶表示器等の表示部を採用することで、その表示部の表示状態を利用して一対のガイド61,62を表示してもよい。また、壁部56の外面56cに着脱可能に組み付けられるアタッチメントに上述した各種のガイド61,62を設けるようにしてもよい。 The pair of guides 61 and 62 is not limited to being formed in a protruding shape so as to be integrated with the outer surface 56c of the wall portion 56, but is formed in a shape that is easy to see by using a notch or the like. It should be done. Further, the pair of guides 61 and 62 may be displayed on the outer surface 56c by printing or the like, or may be displayed by using a light emitting unit such as an LED. Further, by adopting a display unit such as a liquid crystal display as the guide unit 60, the pair of guides 61 and 62 may be displayed by utilizing the display state of the display unit. Further, the above-mentioned various guides 61 and 62 may be provided on the attachment detachably attached to the outer surface 56c of the wall portion 56.
 なお、二次元コードの読み取りを容易にするためのガイド部を壁部に設ける本実施形態の特徴的構成は、他の実施形態等にも適用することができる。 Note that the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment in which the guide portion for facilitating the reading of the two-dimensional code is provided on the wall portion can be applied to other embodiments and the like.
[第6実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第6実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第6実施形態では、読取対象に応じて受光センサ28から取り込んでデコード処理に用いる信号を選別する点が主に上記第1実施形態と異なる。このため、第1実施形態と実質的に同様の構成部分には同一符号を付して説明を省略する。
[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
The sixth embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that the signal taken from the light receiving sensor 28 and used for the decoding process is selected according to the reading target. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the components substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.
 本実施形態では、制御回路40にて実施される読取処理において、第1の開口領域S1および第2の開口領域S2を介して取り込まれる情報コードCからの反射光の受光に応じて受光センサ28から出力される信号に基づいて当該情報コードをデコードする(読み取る)状態(情報コード読取モード)と、第1の開口領域S1を介して取り込まれる一次元コードからの反射光の受光に応じて受光センサ28から出力される信号に基づいて当該一次元コードをデコードする(読み取る)状態(一次元コード読取モード)と、が用意されている。 In the present embodiment, in the reading process performed by the control circuit 40, the light receiving sensor 28 responds to the light received from the information code C taken in through the first opening region S1 and the second opening region S2. Received light according to the state of decoding (reading) the information code based on the signal output from (information code reading mode) and the reception of the reflected light from the one-dimensional code captured through the first opening region S1. A state (one-dimensional code reading mode) in which the one-dimensional code is decoded (read) based on the signal output from the sensor 28 is prepared.
 初期設定では情報コード読取モードに設定されており、制御回路40にて実施される読取処理では、一次元コードおよび二次元コードの双方を含めた情報コードを読み取ることができる。 The information code reading mode is set by default, and the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 can read the information code including both the one-dimensional code and the two-dimensional code.
 そして、読取対象が一次元コードのみである場合には、所定の操作またはモード切替用の情報コードの読み取り等に応じて、制御回路40にて実施される読取処理において、切替部として機能する制御回路40により、上記一次元コード読取モードに切り替えられる。 Then, when the reading target is only a one-dimensional code, the control functioning as a switching unit in the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 in response to a predetermined operation or reading of the information code for mode switching. The circuit 40 switches to the one-dimensional code reading mode.
 このように一次元コード読取モードに切り替えた状態で、一次元コードが表示された表示面Rに突出端部56aを接触させるようにして読取口50を第1の開口領域S1にて一次元コードに向けることで、一次元コードを読取る位置に対して読取口50を容易に向けやすくできるだけでなく、読取対象が明確になることからデコード処理(読取処理)の負荷軽減および時間短縮を図ることができる。 In the state of switching to the one-dimensional code reading mode in this way, the reading port 50 is brought into contact with the display surface R on which the one-dimensional code is displayed so that the protruding end portion 56a is brought into contact with the one-dimensional code in the first opening region S1. Not only can the reading port 50 be easily pointed at the position where the one-dimensional code is read, but also the reading target becomes clear, so that the load of the decoding process (reading process) can be reduced and the time can be shortened. it can.
 本実施形態の変形例として、さらに、第2の開口領域S2を介して取り込まれる二次元コードからの反射光の受光に応じて受光センサ28から出力される信号に基づいて当該二次元コードをデコードする(読み取る)状態(二次元コード読取モード)を用意することができる。 As a modification of the present embodiment, further, the two-dimensional code is decoded based on the signal output from the light receiving sensor 28 in response to the reception of the reflected light from the two-dimensional code taken in through the second opening region S2. A state (two-dimensional code reading mode) can be prepared.
 このため、読取対象が二次元コードのみである場合には、所定の操作またはモード切替用の情報コードの読み取り等に応じて、制御回路40にて実施される読取処理において、上記二次元コード読取モードに切り替えた状態で、二次元コードが表示された表示面Rに突出端部56aを接触させるようにして読取口50を第2の開口領域S2にて二次元コードに向ければよい。これにより、二次元コードを読取る位置に対して読取口50を容易に向けやすくできるだけでなく、読取対象が明確になることからデコード処理(読取処理)の負荷軽減および時間短縮を図ることができる。 Therefore, when the reading target is only a two-dimensional code, the two-dimensional code is read in the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 in response to a predetermined operation or reading of the information code for mode switching. In the state of switching to the mode, the reading port 50 may be directed to the two-dimensional code in the second opening region S2 so that the protruding end portion 56a is brought into contact with the display surface R on which the two-dimensional code is displayed. As a result, not only the reading port 50 can be easily pointed at the position where the two-dimensional code is read, but also the reading target becomes clear, so that the load of the decoding process (reading process) can be reduced and the time can be shortened.
 なお、読取対象に応じて受光センサ28から取り込んでデコード処理に用いる信号を選別する本実施形態の特徴的構成は、他の実施形態等にも適用することができる。 Note that the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, in which signals taken from the light receiving sensor 28 and used for decoding processing are selected according to the reading target, can be applied to other embodiments and the like.
[第7実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第7実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、図23を用いて説明する。
 本第7実施形態では、結像中心(光学中心)Pが第1の開口領域S1の中央に位置するように配置される点が主に上記第1実施形態と異なる。このため、第1実施形態と実質的に同様の構成部分には同一符号を付して説明を省略する。
[7th Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 23.
The seventh embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that the imaging center (optical center) P is arranged so as to be located at the center of the first aperture region S1. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the components substantially the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.
 本実施形態では、一次元コードの読み取りを二次元コードの読み取りよりも重視することから、受光センサ28に対して情報コードからの反射光を結像させる結像レンズ27は、図23に示すように結像中心Pが第1の開口領域S1の中央に位置するように結像光軸L2の傾きを調整して配置されている。 In the present embodiment, since the reading of the one-dimensional code is more important than the reading of the two-dimensional code, the imaging lens 27 that forms an image of the reflected light from the information code on the light receiving sensor 28 is as shown in FIG. The image formation center P is arranged so as to be located at the center of the first aperture region S1 by adjusting the inclination of the image formation optical axis L2.
 これにより、第1の開口領域S1に相当する受光領域での受光が確実になされるので、一次元コードの読取精度を向上させることができる。 As a result, light reception is ensured in the light receiving area corresponding to the first opening area S1, so that the reading accuracy of the one-dimensional code can be improved.
 特に、本実施形態では、図23に示すように、照明光源21は、帯状の光(略ライン状の光)を照明光Lfとして第1の開口領域S1に向けて照射するように構成されている。 In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the illumination light source 21 is configured to irradiate band-shaped light (substantially line-shaped light) as illumination light Lf toward the first opening region S1. There is.
 このため、読取対象の一次元コードに対して照明光Lfを照射しやすくなるだけでなく、照明光Lfがガイド光として機能することで、読取口50を第1の開口領域S1にて一次元コードに向けやすくなる。これにより、第1の開口領域S1を向けた一次元コードからの反射光Lrをより一層受光しやすくなるので、一次元コードの読取精度をさらに向上させることができる。 Therefore, not only is it easier to irradiate the one-dimensional code to be read with the illumination light Lf, but also the illumination light Lf functions as a guide light, so that the reading port 50 is one-dimensional in the first opening region S1. It's easier to point at the code. As a result, it becomes easier to receive the reflected light Lr from the one-dimensional code directed to the first opening region S1, so that the reading accuracy of the one-dimensional code can be further improved.
 なお、二次元コードの読み取りを一次元コードの読み取りよりも重視する場合には、図24に示す第7実施形態の第1変形例のように、照明光源21から断面方形状の照明光Lfが第2の開口領域S2を介して照射されるように構成されてもよい。 When the reading of the two-dimensional code is more important than the reading of the one-dimensional code, the illumination light Lf having a rectangular cross section is generated from the illumination light source 21 as in the first modification of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. It may be configured to be irradiated through the second opening region S2.
 この場合には、第2の開口領域S2を向けた二次元コードからの反射光Lrを受光センサ28にて受光しやすくなるので、二次元コードの読取精度を向上させることができる。特に、断面方形状の照明光Lfがガイド光として機能することで、読取口50を第2の開口領域S2にて二次元コードに向けやすくなる。 In this case, the light receiving sensor 28 can easily receive the reflected light Lr from the two-dimensional code directed to the second opening region S2, so that the reading accuracy of the two-dimensional code can be improved. In particular, since the illumination light Lf having a rectangular cross section functions as a guide light, it becomes easy to direct the reading port 50 toward the two-dimensional code in the second opening region S2.
 なお、上記第7実施形態およびその変形例において、照明光源21は、所定の入力操作に応じてその発光状態が制御されてもよい。例えば、帯状の照明光Lfが第1の開口領域S1を介して照射されている状態において、二次元コードを読み取る場合に、照明光Lfを消灯してもよいし、断面方形状の照明光Lfを第2の開口領域S2を介して照射してもよい。また、断面方形状の照明光Lfが第2の開口領域S2を介して照射されている状態において、一次元コードを読み取る場合に、照明光Lfを消灯してもよいし、帯状の照明光Lfを第1の開口領域S1を介して照射してもよい。 In the seventh embodiment and its modifications, the light emitting state of the illumination light source 21 may be controlled according to a predetermined input operation. For example, when reading the two-dimensional code in a state where the band-shaped illumination light Lf is irradiated through the first opening region S1, the illumination light Lf may be turned off or the illumination light Lf having a rectangular cross section may be turned off. May be irradiated through the second opening region S2. Further, when reading the one-dimensional code in a state where the illumination light Lf having a rectangular cross section is irradiated through the second opening region S2, the illumination light Lf may be turned off or the band-shaped illumination light Lf may be turned off. May be irradiated through the first opening region S1.
[第8実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第8実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第8実施形態では、撮像部や照明部を保護するために読取口に設けられる保護プレートの形状等が主に上記第1実施形態と異なる。
[8th Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
In the eighth embodiment, the shape and the like of the protective plate provided in the reading port for protecting the image pickup unit and the illumination unit are mainly different from those in the first embodiment.
 二次元コードを読み取り可能な光学的情報読取装置は、一次元コードを読み取り可能な装置に対して、読取口の開口形状が大きくなっている。このため、撮像部や照明部を保護するために読取口に設けた保護プレートに対して筐体を把持する使用者の指が誤って触れる場合がある。このような場合、その保護プレートに皮脂等の汚れが付着することで、読取性能が低下してしまうという問題がある。 The optical information reader capable of reading a two-dimensional code has a larger opening shape than that of a device capable of reading a one-dimensional code. Therefore, the finger of the user who grips the housing may erroneously touch the protective plate provided in the reading port to protect the imaging unit and the lighting unit. In such a case, there is a problem that the reading performance is deteriorated due to the adhesion of dirt such as sebum to the protective plate.
 そこで、本実施形態では、図25~図27に示す光学的情報読取装置200のように、読取口250が大きく開口した筐体211において、筐体211内に収容された撮像部や照明部を保護する保護部材として、保護プレート226が読取口250に設けられる。この保護プレート226は、筐体211の読取口250近傍に設けられる保持部215によって、外面側から囲うようにして保持されている。 Therefore, in the present embodiment, as in the optical information reading device 200 shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, in the housing 211 having a large opening of the reading port 250, the imaging unit and the lighting unit housed in the housing 211 are provided. A protective plate 226 is provided on the reading port 250 as a protective member for protection. The protective plate 226 is held by a holding portion 215 provided in the vicinity of the reading port 250 of the housing 211 so as to surround the protective plate 226 from the outer surface side.
 保護プレート226は、所定の厚さの板状部材として構成され、筐体211外からの光や筐体211内からの光が透過可能となる透光性(光透過性)のプレート(例えば、透明なアクリル樹脂や透明ガラス等)によって構成されている。この保護プレート226は、図28に示すように、照明光が透過するそれぞれの部位が第1透過部226a,226bとして機能し、情報コードからの反射光が透過する部位が第2透過部226cとして機能し、マーカ光が透過する部位が第3透過部226dとして機能する。 The protective plate 226 is configured as a plate-shaped member having a predetermined thickness, and is a translucent (light transmissive) plate (for example, light transmissive) capable of transmitting light from the outside of the housing 211 and light from the inside of the housing 211. It is composed of transparent acrylic resin, transparent glass, etc.). As shown in FIG. 28, in the protective plate 226, each portion through which the illumination light is transmitted functions as the first transmission portion 226a and 226b, and the portion through which the reflected light from the information code is transmitted is designated as the second transmission portion 226c. The portion that functions and transmits the marker light functions as the third transmitting portion 226d.
 保持部215は、両第1透過部226a,226b、第2透過部226c、第3透過部226dを露出させるための露出幅Xa,Xbが使用者の指の幅よりも小さくなるように形成される。ここで、露出幅及び保護プレート226までの深さ(露出深さ:保持部215の厚さ)と保護プレート226への指の接触度合との関係を図29(A)(B)に示す。この図29(A)では、指幅14.1mmと指幅11.1mmとで、露出幅及び露出深さを変化させた際の指の接触度合を示しており、「2」は、指腹全体で触れる程度に相当し、「1」は、少し触れる程度に相当し、「0」は、全く触れられない程度に相当する。この図29(A)からわかるように、露出深さを小さくする必要がある場合には露出幅を小さく設定し、露出幅を大きくする必要がある場合には露出深さを大きく設定することで、保護プレート226に対して指を触れ難くすることができる。このため、保持部215は、上述した露出幅Xa,Xb及び露出深さが、図29(A)において接触度合「0」に近づくように設定される。 The holding portion 215 is formed so that the exposure widths Xa and Xb for exposing both the first transmission portions 226a and 226b, the second transmission portion 226c and the third transmission portion 226d are smaller than the width of the user's finger. To. Here, FIGS. 29 (A) and 29 (B) show the relationship between the exposure width and the depth to the protective plate 226 (exposure depth: the thickness of the holding portion 215) and the degree of contact of the finger with the protective plate 226. In FIG. 29 (A), the finger width is 14.1 mm and the finger width is 11.1 mm, and the degree of contact of the finger when the exposure width and the exposure depth are changed is shown. “2” indicates the finger pad. It corresponds to the degree of touching as a whole, "1" corresponds to the degree of touching a little, and "0" corresponds to the degree of not touching at all. As can be seen from FIG. 29 (A), when it is necessary to reduce the exposure depth, the exposure width is set small, and when it is necessary to increase the exposure width, the exposure depth is set large. , It is possible to make it difficult for a finger to touch the protective plate 226. Therefore, the holding portion 215 is set so that the above-mentioned exposure widths Xa and Xb and the exposure depth approach the contact degree “0” in FIG. 29 (A).
 このように構成される保持部215に保護プレート226が保持されることで、筐体211を把持する際に使用者の指が保持部215に触れたとしても、その指が両第1透過部226a,226bや第2透過部226c、第3透過部226dに誤って触れ難くなる。このため、両第1透過部226a,226b、第2透過部226c、第3透過部226dに皮脂等の汚れが付着し難くなるので、保護プレート226に付着する汚れに起因する読取性能の低下を抑制することができる。 By holding the protective plate 226 on the holding portion 215 configured in this way, even if a user's finger touches the holding portion 215 when gripping the housing 211, the finger touches both first transmission portions. It becomes difficult to accidentally touch the 226a, 226b, the second transmission portion 226c, and the third transmission portion 226d. For this reason, dirt such as sebum is less likely to adhere to both the first transmission portions 226a and 226b, the second transmission portion 226c, and the third transmission portion 226d, so that the reading performance deteriorates due to the stains adhering to the protective plate 226. It can be suppressed.
 なお、保持部215は、図30に示す本実施形態の第1変形例のように、両第1透過部226a,226b、第2透過部226c、第3透過部226dがそれぞれ露出口215a~215dを介して個別に露出するように形成されてもよい。その場合、保護プレート226は、図31に示す本実施形態の第2変形例のように、一対の第1透過部226a,226b、第2透過部226c、第3透過部226dがそれぞれ個別に分離されるように構成されて、保持部215によってそれぞれ個別に保持されてもよい。 In the holding portion 215, both first transmission portions 226a and 226b, second transmission portion 226c, and third transmission portion 226d are exposed ports 215a to 215d, respectively, as in the first modification of the present embodiment shown in FIG. It may be formed so as to be individually exposed via. In that case, in the protective plate 226, the pair of first transmission portions 226a and 226b, the second transmission portion 226c, and the third transmission portion 226d are individually separated as in the second modification of the present embodiment shown in FIG. They may be individually held by the holding unit 215.
 図32(A)は、第8実施形態の第3変形例に係る光学的情報読取装置の要部を示す説明図であり、図32(B)は、図32(A)のX3-X3断面を拡大して示す拡大断面図である。また、保護プレート226には、図32(A)(B)に示すように、第1透過部226aを環状に囲うように外方に突出する第1環状部226eと、第1透過部226bを環状に囲うように外方に突出する第1環状部226fと、第2透過部226cを環状に囲うように外方に突出する第2環状部226gと、第3透過部226dを環状に囲うように外方に突出する第3環状部226hと、がそれぞれ形成されてもよい。 32 (A) is an explanatory view showing a main part of the optical information reading device according to the third modification of the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 32 (B) is an X3-X3 cross section of FIG. 32 (A). Is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing. Further, as shown in FIGS. 32 (A) and 32 (B), the protective plate 226 includes a first annular portion 226e and a first transparent portion 226b that project outward so as to surround the first transmission portion 226a in an annular shape. The first annular portion 226f projecting outward so as to enclose the second annular portion 226c, the second annular portion 226g projecting outward so as to enclose the second transmissive portion 226c in an annular shape, and the third transmissive portion 226d so as to enclose in an annular shape. A third annular portion 226h and a third annular portion 226h projecting outward may be formed respectively.
 これにより、筐体211を把持する際に使用者の指が第1環状部226e,226f、第2環状部226g、第3環状部226hに触れたとしても、その指が第1透過部226a,226bや第2透過部226c、第3透過部226dに誤って触れ難くなる。このため、第1透過部226a,226b、第2透過部226c、第3透過部226dに皮脂等の汚れが付着し難くなるので、保護プレート226に付着する汚れに起因する読取性能の低下を抑制することができる。 As a result, even if the user's finger touches the first annular portion 226e, 226f, the second annular portion 226g, and the third annular portion 226h when gripping the housing 211, the finger touches the first annular portion 226a, It becomes difficult to accidentally touch the 226b, the second transmission portion 226c, and the third transmission portion 226d. For this reason, dirt such as sebum is less likely to adhere to the first transmission section 226a and 226b, the second transmission section 226c, and the third transmission section 226d, so that deterioration of reading performance due to dirt adhering to the protective plate 226 is suppressed. can do.
[第9実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第9実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第9実施形態では、トリガースイッチ42を廃止するとともにマーカ光照射部29を採用して、マーカ光Lmの撮像状態に応じて照明光の照射条件を変更する点が主に上記第1実施形態と異なる。
[9th Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
In the ninth embodiment, the trigger switch 42 is abolished and the marker light irradiation unit 29 is adopted to change the irradiation conditions of the illumination light according to the imaging state of the marker light Lm. Different from.
 光学的情報読取装置を利用した情報コードの読取作業では、その作業性を高めるために、読取口を介して照明光を常時照射させた状態で読取作業がなされることが多い。そのため、光学的情報読取装置を持ったまま別の作業を行った際に、照明光が誤って周囲の人の目に入ってしまう可能性がある。特に、近年、二次元コードを読取対象とするニーズが高まっており、二次元コードを読み取るために照明光の照射エリアが広い光学的情報読取装置を採用した場合には、上記問題がより顕著となる。これに対して、トリガースイッチ等を使用し、都度照明光を点灯し読み取る方法もあるが、読取り頻度が高い現場では、オペレーションが遅れることやスイッチ部の耐久性、オペレータの疲労などの問題がある。 In the work of reading an information code using an optical information reading device, in order to improve the workability, the reading work is often performed in a state where the illumination light is constantly irradiated through the reading port. Therefore, when another work is performed while holding the optical information reader, the illumination light may accidentally enter the eyes of surrounding people. In particular, in recent years, there has been an increasing need to read a two-dimensional code, and when an optical information reader having a wide irradiation area of illumination light is adopted to read the two-dimensional code, the above problem becomes more remarkable. Become. On the other hand, there is also a method of using a trigger switch or the like to turn on the illumination light each time to read, but in the field where the reading frequency is high, there are problems such as delay in operation, durability of the switch part, and operator fatigue. ..
 そこで、本実施形態では、トリガースイッチ42を廃止するとともにマーカ光照射部29を採用し、制御回路40にて実施される読取処理において、マーカ光Lmの撮像状態に応じて照明光の照射条件を変更する。マーカ光Lmが撮像されれば、読取口50が向けられた情報コード等にてマーカ光Lmが反射されていると推定できるからである。 Therefore, in the present embodiment, the trigger switch 42 is abolished and the marker light irradiation unit 29 is adopted, and in the reading process performed by the control circuit 40, the irradiation conditions of the illumination light are set according to the imaging state of the marker light Lm. change. This is because if the marker light Lm is imaged, it can be estimated that the marker light Lm is reflected by the information code or the like to which the reading port 50 is directed.
 以下、本実施形態において、制御回路40にてなされる読取処理について、図33に示すフローチャートを参照して詳述する。
 所定の操作等に応じて読取処理が開始されると、図33に示すステップS101の判定処理がなされ、受光センサ28及び結像レンズ27等を撮像部として機能させることで、この撮像部により撮像される撮像画像が変化しているか否かについて判定される。ここで、光学的情報読取装置10が机上等に置かれている状態等では、撮像部より撮像される画像が変化しないために、ステップS101にてNoとの判定が繰り返されて、マーカ光Lmや照明光が照射されない状態が継続される。なお、上記ステップS101の判定処理を行う制御回路40等は、「画像変化判定部」の一例に相当し得る。
Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 33.
When the reading process is started in response to a predetermined operation or the like, the determination process of step S101 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the captured image is changed. Here, in a state where the optical information reading device 10 is placed on a desk or the like, the image captured by the imaging unit does not change, so that the determination of No is repeated in step S101, and the marker light Lm. And the state where the illumination light is not irradiated continues. The control circuit 40 or the like that performs the determination process in step S101 may correspond to an example of the “image change determination unit”.
 そして、使用者が光学的情報読取装置10を把持することで、撮像部により撮像される撮像画像が変化すると(S101でYes)、制御回路40により制御されて、マーカ光照射部29からマーカ光Lmが照射される(S103)。 Then, when the user grips the optical information reading device 10 and the captured image captured by the imaging unit changes (Yes in S101), the marker light is controlled by the control circuit 40 and the marker light is emitted from the marker light irradiation unit 29. Lm is irradiated (S103).
 次に、ステップS105のマーカ光検出用画像取得処理がなされ、撮像部によりマーカ光Lmを検出するための撮像画像が取得される。続いて、ステップS107の判定処理にて、撮像部による撮像画像においてマーカ光Lmが所定の状態で撮像されるマーカ撮像状態であるか否かについて判定される。本実施形態では、上記所定の状態として、例えば、マーカ光Lmが円形である場合に、撮像されたマーカ光Lmの径が所定値以上となる撮像状態が採用されている。なお、上記ステップS107の判定処理を行う制御回路40等は、「マーカ撮像判定部」の一例に相当し得る。 Next, the image acquisition process for detecting the marker light in step S105 is performed, and the image pickup unit acquires the captured image for detecting the marker light Lm. Subsequently, in the determination process of step S107, it is determined whether or not the marker light Lm is in the marker imaging state in which the image captured by the imaging unit is imaged in a predetermined state. In the present embodiment, as the predetermined state, for example, when the marker light Lm is circular, an imaging state in which the diameter of the imaged marker light Lm is equal to or larger than a predetermined value is adopted. The control circuit 40 or the like that performs the determination process in step S107 may correspond to an example of the “marker imaging determination unit”.
 ここで、読取口50が近くの情報コードやその情報コードを付した表示面等に向けられているために照射されたマーカ光Lmが情報コードや表示面等にて反射されていることで、マーカ撮像状態であると判定されると(S107でYes)、ステップS109の照明光照射処理がなされる。この処理では、制御回路40により照明部が制御されて第1照明部21及び第2照明部22の少なくともいずれか一方から照明光が照射される。このため、ステップS111にてなされるデコード用画像取得処理では、照明光が照射された状態で撮像部により撮像画像が撮像されて取得される。そして、ステップS113のデコード処理にて、上記撮像画像に含まれる情報コードをデコードするための処理がなされ、このデコード処理が成功すると(S115でYes)、本読取処理が終了し、上述のように得られたデコード結果を利用した処理等がなされる。一方、デコード処理が失敗すると(S115でNo)、上記ステップS101からの処理がなされる。なお、制御回路40は、「照明制御部」の一例に相当し得る。 Here, since the reading port 50 is directed to a nearby information code or a display surface to which the information code is attached, the marker light Lm irradiated is reflected by the information code, the display surface, or the like. When it is determined that the marker is in the imaging state (Yes in S107), the illumination light irradiation process in step S109 is performed. In this process, the illumination unit is controlled by the control circuit 40, and the illumination light is emitted from at least one of the first illumination unit 21 and the second illumination unit 22. Therefore, in the decoding image acquisition process performed in step S111, the captured image is captured and acquired by the imaging unit while being irradiated with the illumination light. Then, in the decoding process of step S113, a process for decoding the information code included in the captured image is performed, and when this decoding process succeeds (Yes in S115), the main reading process ends, and as described above. Processing or the like using the obtained decoding result is performed. On the other hand, if the decoding process fails (No in S115), the process from step S101 is performed. The control circuit 40 can correspond to an example of the “lighting control unit”.
 一方、読取口50が情報コードやその情報コードを付した表示面等に向けられておらず、マーカ光が遠方の空間に向けて照射されている状態では、マーカ光Lmの反射光を撮像できないため、マーカ撮像状態でないと判定される(S107でNo)。この場合には、照明光が照射されない照明光照射停止状態となり(S117)、照明光が照射されることなく撮像部により撮像画像が撮像されて(S111)、この撮像画像に対してデコード処理がなされる(S113)。 On the other hand, when the reading port 50 is not directed to the information code or the display surface to which the information code is attached and the marker light is irradiated toward a distant space, the reflected light of the marker light Lm cannot be imaged. Therefore, it is determined that the marker is not in the imaging state (No in S107). In this case, the illumination light irradiation is stopped (S117) in which the illumination light is not irradiated, the captured image is captured by the imaging unit without being irradiated with the illumination light (S111), and the captured image is decoded. It is done (S113).
 例えば、情報コードが表示される画面等に読取口50を向けている場合には、画面そのものが発光していることから、マーカ光Lmの反射光を認識容易に撮像できないために、マーカ撮像状態でないと判定される(S107でNo)。このように、画面表示された情報コードを読み取る場合には、照明光照射停止状態となるが(S117)、画面そのものが発光しているので、上記情報コードをデコード可能に撮像することができる。 For example, when the reading port 50 is directed to a screen or the like on which an information code is displayed, the screen itself emits light, so that the reflected light of the marker light Lm cannot be easily recognized and imaged. It is determined that it is not (No in S107). In this way, when the information code displayed on the screen is read, the illumination light irradiation is stopped (S117), but since the screen itself is emitting light, the information code can be imaged decodably.
 以上説明したように、本実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置10では、撮像部による撮像視野を示すマーカ光Lmを照射するマーカ光照射部29が設けられ、上記読取処理にて、撮像部による撮像画像においてマーカ光Lmが所定の状態で撮像されるマーカ撮像状態であるか否かについて判定され、この判定結果に応じて照明部が制御される。 As described above, in the optical information reading device 10 according to the present embodiment, the marker light irradiation unit 29 that irradiates the marker light Lm indicating the imaging field of view by the imaging unit is provided, and the image pickup unit performs the reading process. In the captured image, it is determined whether or not the marker light Lm is in the marker imaging state in which the marker light Lm is imaged in a predetermined state, and the illumination unit is controlled according to the determination result.
 読取口50が情報コードを付した表示面等に向けられていない場合には、照射されたマーカ光Lmが表示面等にて反射されないため、マーカ光Lmが撮像されない状態となる。すなわち、マーカ光Lmが撮像されない状態では、照明光を照射する必要がないので、上記判定結果に応じて照明部を制御することで、不要な照明光の照射を抑制することができる。 When the reading port 50 is not directed to the display surface or the like to which the information code is attached, the irradiated marker light Lm is not reflected by the display surface or the like, so that the marker light Lm is not imaged. That is, since it is not necessary to irradiate the illumination light when the marker light Lm is not imaged, it is possible to suppress the irradiation of unnecessary illumination light by controlling the illumination unit according to the above determination result.
 特に、上記ステップS107の判定処理にて、マーカ撮像状態であると判定されると(S107でYes)、照明光が照射されるように照明部が制御され、マーカ撮像状態でないと判定されると(S107でNo)、照明光の照射を停止するように照明部が制御される。これにより、情報コードが表示される画面等では、画面そのものが発光しているために、マーカ光Lmの反射光を認識容易に撮像できず、そもそも照明光の照射が不要であるため、照明光のON/OFFを適切に切り替えることができる。 In particular, when it is determined in the determination process of step S107 that the marker is in the imaging state (Yes in S107), the illumination unit is controlled so that the illumination light is irradiated, and it is determined that the marker is not in the imaging state. (No in S107), the illumination unit is controlled so as to stop the irradiation of the illumination light. As a result, on the screen or the like on which the information code is displayed, since the screen itself emits light, the reflected light of the marker light Lm cannot be easily recognized and imaged, and the illumination light does not need to be irradiated in the first place. Can be switched on / off appropriately.
 さらに、マーカ光照射部29は、撮像部より撮像される画像が変化していると判定される場合に(S101でYes)、マーカ光Lmを照射する。これにより、光学的情報読取装置10が机上等に置かれている状態、すなわち、未使用時には、撮像部より撮像される画像が変化しないためにマーカ光Lmが照射されないので、不要な照明光の照射をより確実に抑制することができる。 Further, the marker light irradiation unit 29 irradiates the marker light Lm when it is determined that the image captured by the image pickup unit has changed (Yes in S101). As a result, when the optical information reading device 10 is placed on a desk or the like, that is, when it is not in use, the image captured by the imaging unit does not change and the marker light Lm is not irradiated, so that unnecessary illumination light is emitted. Irradiation can be suppressed more reliably.
 なお、マーカ撮像状態であると判定されると(S107でYes)、照明光が照射されるように照明部を制御し、マーカ撮像状態でないと判定されると(S107でNo)、マーカ撮像状態であると判定される場合よりも暗くなる状態で照明光が照射されるように照明部を制御してもよい。このようにしても、不要に明るい照明光の照射を抑制することができる。 When it is determined that the marker imaging state is present (Yes in S107), the illumination unit is controlled so that the illumination light is irradiated, and when it is determined that the marker imaging state is not present (No in S107), the marker imaging state is determined. The illumination unit may be controlled so that the illumination light is irradiated in a state where it is darker than the case where it is determined to be. Even in this way, it is possible to suppress the irradiation of unnecessarily bright illumination light.
 また、撮像画像においてマーカ光Lmが撮像される範囲は予め決まっているので、上記ステップS101の判定処理では、撮像画像のうちマーカ光Lmが撮像される可能性のある範囲について、マーカ光Lmが所定の状態で撮像されるマーカ撮像状態であるか否かについて判定してもよい。例えば、マーカ光Lmが撮像視野の中心を示す場合には、撮像画像の中央の範囲についてのみマーカ撮像状態であるか否かについて判定してもよい。これにより、撮像画像においてマーカ撮像状態であるか否かについて判定する範囲を限定でき、判定処理等に要する処理負荷の軽減や処理速度の向上を図ることができる。また、マーカ光Lmを撮像した撮像画像をメモリ35に逐次記憶する場合には、記憶される情報量を軽減することができる。 Further, since the range in which the marker light Lm is captured in the captured image is predetermined, in the determination process of step S101, the marker light Lm is determined in the range in the captured image where the marker light Lm may be captured. It may be determined whether or not the marker image is captured in a predetermined state. For example, when the marker light Lm indicates the center of the imaging field of view, it may be determined whether or not the marker imaging state is performed only in the central range of the captured image. As a result, it is possible to limit the range for determining whether or not the captured image is in the marker imaging state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load required for the determination process and improve the processing speed. Further, when the captured image obtained by capturing the marker light Lm is sequentially stored in the memory 35, the amount of stored information can be reduced.
 なお、マーカ光Lmは、撮像部による撮像視野の中心を示すように円形状で照射されることに限らず、例えば、撮像部による撮像視野の四隅と中心との双方を示すように照射されてもよい。 The marker light Lm is not limited to being irradiated in a circular shape so as to indicate the center of the imaging field of view by the imaging unit, and is, for example, irradiated so as to indicate both the four corners and the center of the imaging field of view by the imaging unit. May be good.
[第10実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第10実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第10実施形態では、1つの撮像画像から複数のデコード結果が得られる場合に、複数のデコード結果の中から出力すべきデコード結果を選択する点が主に上記第1実施形態と異なる。
[10th Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
The tenth embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that when a plurality of decoding results can be obtained from one captured image, the decoding result to be output is selected from the plurality of decoding results.
 近年、二次元コードを読取対象とするニーズが高まっており、小売店等で一次元コードと二次元コードの双方を読み取ることができる光学的情報読取装置の導入が増加している。また、商品には、POS用の一次元コードに加えて、その商品情報を提供等するための二次元コードが表示される場合がある。一次元スキャナのラインセンサによる読み取りとは異なり、二次元コードをエリアセンサ等を用いて読み取る光学的情報読取装置は、平面状の読取視野(撮像視野)を持つ。そのため、会計の際に複数の情報コードが読取視野内に含まれる場合、意図せず会計に無関係な情報コードを読み取ってしまうことがある。 In recent years, the need for reading a two-dimensional code has been increasing, and the introduction of an optical information reading device capable of reading both a one-dimensional code and a two-dimensional code is increasing at retail stores and the like. Further, in addition to the one-dimensional code for POS, a two-dimensional code for providing the product information may be displayed on the product. Unlike reading by a line sensor of a one-dimensional scanner, an optical information reading device that reads a two-dimensional code using an area sensor or the like has a planar reading field of view (imaging field of view). Therefore, when a plurality of information codes are included in the reading field of view at the time of accounting, the information code unrelated to the accounting may be unintentionally read.
 例えば、会計時に、商品に付された会計用のバーコードCaを読み取る際に、図34に示すように、その商品に付された商品情報提供用のQRコードCbも同時に撮像されると、1つの撮像画像からバーコードCaのデコード結果とQRコードCbのデコード結果とが取得されてしまう。また、例えば、会計前に読み取るべきクーポン用の情報コードが会計用の情報コードとともに撮像されることで1つの撮像画像から2つのデコード結果が取得されてしまう場合もある。このため、同時に複数の情報コードを読み取る場合には、選択的に読み取り情報の出力可否を判断する必要がある。 For example, when reading the barcode Ca for accounting attached to a product at the time of accounting, as shown in FIG. 34, if the QR code Cb for providing product information attached to the product is also imaged at the same time, 1 The decoding result of the barcode Ca and the decoding result of the QR code Cb are acquired from one captured image. Further, for example, when the information code for the coupon to be read before accounting is imaged together with the information code for accounting, two decoding results may be acquired from one captured image. Therefore, when reading a plurality of information codes at the same time, it is necessary to selectively determine whether or not the read information can be output.
 そこで、本実施形態にてなされる読取処理では、1つの撮像画像から複数のデコード結果が得られる場合に、予め登録される選択判定用情報がデコード結果に含まれているか否かに基づいて、複数のデコード結果の中から出力すべきデコード結果を選択する。 Therefore, in the scanning process performed in the present embodiment, when a plurality of decoding results are obtained from one captured image, it is based on whether or not the selection determination information registered in advance is included in the decoding result. Select the decoding result to be output from multiple decoding results.
 以下、本実施形態において、制御回路40にてなされる読取処理について、図35に示すフローチャートを参照して詳述する。なお、本実施形態では、上記選択判定用情報として、所定のURL(Uniform Resource Locator)に含まれる特徴的文字列が採用され、この特徴的文字列を含まないデコード結果が、出力すべきデコード結果として選択される。上記特徴的文字列としては、例えば、「http:」や「https:」などのスキーム名及びその末尾に付随するデリミタのコロン(以下、単に、スキーム名等ともいう)が想定され、予めメモリ35に記憶されている。 Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 35. In this embodiment, the characteristic character string included in the predetermined URL (Uniform Resource Locator) is adopted as the selection determination information, and the decoding result not including this characteristic character string is the decoding result to be output. Is selected as. As the characteristic character string, for example, a scheme name such as "http:" or "https:" and a delimiter colon (hereinafter, simply referred to as a scheme name or the like) attached to the end of the scheme name are assumed, and the memory 35 is preliminarily used. It is remembered in.
 所定の操作等に応じて読取処理が開始されると、図35に示すステップS201の撮像処理がなされ、受光センサ28及び結像レンズ27等を撮像部として機能させることで、この撮像部により情報コードをデコードするための画像が撮像される。続いて、ステップS203に示すデコード処理にて、上記撮像画像に含まれる情報コードをデコードするための処理がなされる。そして、上記撮像画像から1つのデコード結果が得られた場合には(S205でNo)、そのデコード結果が通信インタフェース48を介して外部に出力される(S209)。なお、上記デコード処理を実行する制御回路40は、「デコード部」の一例に相当し得る。 When the reading process is started in response to a predetermined operation or the like, the image pickup process of step S201 shown in FIG. An image is taken to decode the code. Subsequently, in the decoding process shown in step S203, a process for decoding the information code included in the captured image is performed. Then, when one decoding result is obtained from the captured image (No in S205), the decoding result is output to the outside via the communication interface 48 (S209). The control circuit 40 that executes the decoding process can correspond to an example of the "decoding unit".
 一方、上記撮像画像から複数のデコード結果が得られた場合には(S205でYes)、ステップS207の選択処理がなされる。この処理では、上記選択判定用情報(例えば、所定のURLに含まれる特徴的文字列)を含まないデコード結果が、出力すべきデコード結果として選択される。このため、図34に例示するように、商品価格情報等が記録された会計用のバーコードCaと、商品を紹介するサイトのURLが記録された商品情報提供用のQRコードCbとが同時に撮像されることで、2つのデコード結果が得られた場合には、バーコードCaのデコード結果が出力すべきデコード結果として選択される。そして、このように選択されたデコード結果が通信インタフェース48を介して外部に出力される(S209)。なお、上記選択処理を実行する制御回路40は、「選択部」の一例に相当し得る。 On the other hand, when a plurality of decoding results are obtained from the captured image (Yes in S205), the selection process in step S207 is performed. In this process, the decoding result that does not include the selection determination information (for example, the characteristic character string included in the predetermined URL) is selected as the decoding result to be output. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 34, the bar code Ca for accounting in which the product price information and the like are recorded and the QR code Cb for providing the product information in which the URL of the site introducing the product is recorded are simultaneously imaged. When two decoding results are obtained, the decoding result of the barcode Ca is selected as the decoding result to be output. Then, the decoding result selected in this way is output to the outside via the communication interface 48 (S209). The control circuit 40 that executes the selection process may correspond to an example of the “selection unit”.
 以上説明したように、本実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置10では、読取処理において、撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理がなされ、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されているために1つの撮像画像から複数のデコード結果が得られる場合に、出力するデコード結果が選択処理により選択される。そして、上記選択処理では、予め登録される選択判定用情報がデコード結果に含まれているか否かに基づいて、出力するデコード結果を選択する。 As described above, in the optical information reading device 10 according to the present embodiment, in the reading process, a decoding process for decoding an information code from the captured image captured by the imaging unit is performed, and a plurality of information codes are used. When a plurality of decoding results can be obtained from one captured image because they are simultaneously imaged, the decoding results to be output are selected by the selection process. Then, in the above selection process, the decoding result to be output is selected based on whether or not the selection determination information registered in advance is included in the decoding result.
 これにより、例えば、読取対象となる情報コードに上記選択判定用情報が含まれる場合には、複数のデコード結果のうち上記選択判定用情報が含まれるデコード結果を選択することで、上記選択判定用情報が含まれない読取対象外の情報コードのデコード結果が出力されることを防止することができる。また、例えば、読取対象外とすべき情報コードに上記選択判定用情報が含まれる場合には、複数のデコード結果のうち上記選択判定用情報が含まれないデコード結果を選択することで、上記選択判定用情報が含まれる読取対象外の情報コードのデコード結果が出力されることを防止することができる。すなわち、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されていることから複数のデコード結果が得られる場合であっても、出力すべきデコード結果を適切に選択でき、意図せずに読み取った情報コードのデコード結果の出力を制限することができる。 As a result, for example, when the information code to be read includes the selection determination information, the selection determination can be performed by selecting the decoding result including the selection determination information from the plurality of decoding results. It is possible to prevent the decoding result of the non-reading information code that does not include the information from being output. Further, for example, when the information code to be excluded from reading includes the selection determination information, the selection can be made by selecting the decoding result that does not include the selection determination information from the plurality of decoding results. It is possible to prevent the decoding result of the non-reading information code including the determination information from being output. That is, even when a plurality of decoding results are obtained because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged, the decoding result to be output can be appropriately selected, and the decoding result of the information code read unintentionally can be selected. You can limit the output.
 特に、本実施形態では、上記選択判定用情報は、所定のURLに含まれる特徴的文字列として登録される。このため、読取対象外とすべき情報コードにURLが記録される場合には、その情報コードのデコード結果が出力されることを防止することができる。これに対して、読取対象とすべき情報コードにURLが記録される場合には、URLが含まれないデコード結果が出力されることを防止することもできる。 In particular, in the present embodiment, the selection determination information is registered as a characteristic character string included in a predetermined URL. Therefore, when the URL is recorded in the information code to be excluded from the reading target, it is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code from being output. On the other hand, when the URL is recorded in the information code to be read, it is possible to prevent the decoding result including the URL from being output.
 なお、上記選択判定用情報は、「http:」や「https:」などのスキーム名等の所定のURLに含まれる特徴的文字列に設定されることに限らず、例えば、「file:」や「mailto:」等の他のスキーム名等に設定されてもよい。また、上記選択判定用情報は、例えば、「http:」及び「https:」と「file:」及び「mailto:」等とで区別してもよい。この場合、「file:」等のプロトコルは業務用の二次元コードに用いられる可能性があるため、「http:」または「https:」プロトコルによるウェブサイトへの誘導用の二次元コードのみを読み取り出力制限対象とすることで、業務効率の低下を避けることができる。 The selection determination information is not limited to being set in a characteristic character string included in a predetermined URL such as a scheme name such as "http:" or "https:", for example, "file:" or It may be set to another scheme name such as "mail to:". Further, the selection determination information may be distinguished by, for example, "http:" and "https:" and "file:" and "mailto:". In this case, a protocol such as "file:" may be used for a two-dimensional code for business use, so only the two-dimensional code for guiding to the website by the "http:" or "https:" protocol is read. By targeting the output restriction, it is possible to avoid a decrease in business efficiency.
 また、上記選択判定用情報は、IPアドレスなどの所定のアドレスに含まれる特徴的文字列に設定されてもよい。この場合には、読取対象外とすべき情報コードに上記アドレスの特徴的文字列が記録される場合に、その情報コードのデコード結果が出力されることを防止でき、読取対象とすべき情報コードに上記アドレスの特徴的文字列が記録される場合に、上記アドレスの特徴的文字列が含まれないデコード結果が出力されることを防止できる。 Further, the selection determination information may be set in a characteristic character string included in a predetermined address such as an IP address. In this case, when the characteristic character string of the above address is recorded in the information code that should be excluded from reading, it is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code from being output, and the information code that should be read. When the characteristic character string of the above address is recorded in, it is possible to prevent the decoding result that does not include the characteristic character string of the above address from being output.
 また、上記選択判定用情報は、例えば、「.com」や「.jp」等のトップレベルドメイン及びその直前に付随するデリミタのドットに設定されてもよい。近年のウェブアドレスのURLは、「http:」スキームを省略し、アプリケーションにスキームの解釈を任せることも多いため、選択判定用情報としてドメインを設定することでスキームによる制限よりも広範にウェブアドレスの読み取り出力を制限することができる。 Further, the above selection determination information may be set to, for example, a top-level domain such as ".com" or ".jp" and a dot of the delimiter attached immediately before the top-level domain. In recent years, URLs of web addresses often omit the "http:" scheme and let the application interpret the scheme. Therefore, by setting a domain as selection judgment information, the web address can be used more widely than the restrictions imposed by the scheme. The read output can be limited.
 また、上記選択判定用情報は、例えば、1又は2以上の所定の数字列の組み合わせに応じて設定されてもよいし、1又は2以上の所定の文字列の組み合わせに応じて設定されてもよい。 Further, the selection determination information may be set according to, for example, a combination of 1 or 2 or more predetermined number strings, or may be set according to a combination of 1 or 2 or more predetermined character strings. Good.
 なお、上記ステップS207の選択処理では、デコードに成功した情報コードのコード種別に基づいて、出力するデコード結果を選択してもよい。例えば、バーコードのデコード結果が選択され、バーコード以外のコード種別の情報コードのデコード結果が選択されないようにすることができる。 In the selection process of step S207, the decoding result to be output may be selected based on the code type of the information code that has been successfully decoded. For example, the decoding result of the barcode can be selected, and the decoding result of the information code of the code type other than the barcode can be prevented from being selected.
 これにより、読取対象となる情報コードが所定のコード種別であれば、複数のデコード結果のうち上記所定のコード種別の情報コードからデコードされたデコード結果を選択することで、上記所定のコード種別ではない読取対象外の情報コードのデコード結果が出力されることを防止することができる。このようにしても、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されていることから複数のデコード結果が得られる場合であっても、出力すべきデコード結果を適切に選択することができ、意図せずに読み取った情報コードのデコード結果の出力を制限することができる。 As a result, if the information code to be read is a predetermined code type, the decoding result decoded from the information code of the above-mentioned predetermined code type can be selected from a plurality of decoding results, and the above-mentioned predetermined code type can be used. It is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code not to be read from being output. Even in this way, even when multiple decoding results are obtained because multiple information codes are captured at the same time, the decoding results to be output can be appropriately selected and read unintentionally. It is possible to limit the output of the decoding result of the information code.
[第11実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第11実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第11実施形態では、1つの撮像画像から2以上の同じデコード結果が得られる場合に、重複した処理を抑制する点が主に上記第10実施形態と異なる。
[11th Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
The eleventh embodiment is mainly different from the tenth embodiment in that duplicate processing is suppressed when two or more same decoding results are obtained from one captured image.
 従来、同じ情報コードの二度読みを防止するため、情報コードを読み取ることで得たデコード結果と直近にデコードされたデコード結果とを比較して、一致したデコード結果の出力を制限する技術が知られている。近年、QRコードなどの二次元コードが普及してきており、一次元コードと二次元コードとが隣接して表示される場合もある(図34参照)。特に、用途によっては、隣接して表示される一次元コードと二次元コードとのそれぞれに同じデータが記録される場合があり、コード種別が異なることから従来の二度読み技術が適用できないために、同じデコード結果に基づく処理が重複してなされる可能性がある。例えば、決済時において、スマートフォンの表示画面に同じデータが記録された一次元コードと二次元コードとが隣接して表示される場合に、それぞれ読み取られたデコード結果に基づいて二重に決済処理される可能性がある。 Conventionally, in order to prevent the same information code from being read twice, a technique is known to limit the output of a matching decoding result by comparing the decoding result obtained by reading the information code with the most recently decoded decoding result. Has been done. In recent years, two-dimensional codes such as QR codes have become widespread, and one-dimensional codes and two-dimensional codes may be displayed adjacent to each other (see FIG. 34). In particular, depending on the application, the same data may be recorded for each of the one-dimensional code and the two-dimensional code displayed adjacently, and because the code types are different, the conventional double-reading technique cannot be applied. , Processing based on the same decoding result may be duplicated. For example, at the time of payment, when the one-dimensional code and the two-dimensional code in which the same data are recorded are displayed adjacent to each other on the display screen of the smartphone, the payment is double-processed based on the decoded result read. There is a possibility that
 そこで、本実施形態にてなされる読取処理では、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されているために1つの撮像画像から複数のデコード結果が得られる場合に、2以上の同じデコード結果が得られているか否かついて判定することで、同じデコード結果に基づく重複した処理を抑制する。なお、デコード結果には、読み取った情報コードのコード種別も含めることができる。 Therefore, in the reading process performed in the present embodiment, when a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged and a plurality of decoding results can be obtained from one captured image, two or more same decoding results can be obtained. By determining whether or not it is present, duplicate processing based on the same decoding result is suppressed. The decoding result can also include the code type of the read information code.
 以下、本実施形態において、制御回路40にてなされる読取処理について、図36に示すフローチャートを参照して詳述する。
 所定の操作等に応じて読取処理が開始されると、図36に示すステップS301の撮像処理がなされ、受光センサ28及び結像レンズ27等を撮像部として機能させることで、この撮像部により情報コードをデコードするための画像が撮像される。続いて、ステップS303に示す判定処理にて、上記撮像画像に情報コードと認識されうるコード画像が有るか否かについて判定される。そして、1又は2以上のコード画像が有る場合には(S303でYes)、ステップS305にてコード画像取得処理がなされ、上記撮像画像から1つのコード画像が抽出されて取得される。
Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
When the reading process is started in response to a predetermined operation or the like, the image pickup process of step S301 shown in FIG. An image is taken to decode the code. Subsequently, in the determination process shown in step S303, it is determined whether or not the captured image has a code image that can be recognized as an information code. Then, when there are one or more code images (Yes in S303), the code image acquisition process is performed in step S305, and one code image is extracted and acquired from the captured image.
 次に、ステップS307に示すデコード処理にて、上述のように取得されたコード画像に対してデコード処理がなされて、そのデコード処理が成功した場合にはデコード結果が得られる。続いて、ステップS309に示すデータ参照処理がなされ、後述するように蓄積されたデコード結果に関してメモリ35が参照される。 Next, in the decoding process shown in step S307, the code image acquired as described above is decoded, and if the decoding process is successful, the decoding result is obtained. Subsequently, the data reference process shown in step S309 is performed, and the memory 35 is referred to with respect to the accumulated decoding results as described later.
 そして、ステップS311の判定処理にて、上記デコード処理で得られたデコード結果に一致するデータがメモリ35に記憶されているか否かについて判定される。ここで、一致するデコード結果が記憶されていない場合には(S311でNo)、所定の処理として、そのデコード結果が上位機器等に出力されて(S315)、そのデコード結果がメモリ35に記憶される(S317)。なお、上記ステップS311の判定処理を行う制御回路40は、以上の同じデコード結果が得られているか否かついて判定する「デコード結果同異判定部」の一例に相当し得る。また、上記デコード結果を出力する処理(S315)を行う制御回路40は、デコード結果を利用した所定の処理を行うための「処理部」の一例に相当し得る。 Then, in the determination process of step S311, it is determined whether or not the data matching the decoding result obtained in the decoding process is stored in the memory 35. Here, if the matching decoding result is not stored (No in S311), the decoding result is output to a higher-level device or the like as a predetermined process (S315), and the decoding result is stored in the memory 35. (S317). The control circuit 40 that performs the determination process in step S311 can correspond to an example of the "decoding result same / different determination unit" that once determines whether or not the same decoding result is obtained. Further, the control circuit 40 that performs the process (S315) of outputting the decoding result can correspond to an example of a "processing unit" for performing a predetermined process using the decoding result.
 続いて、ステップS319の判定処理にて、上記撮像画像に2以上のコード画像があるためにデコードされていない他のコード画像があるか否かについて判定される。ここで、上記撮像画像に2以上のコード画像があるためにデコードされていない他のコード画像がある場合には(S319でYes)、次のコード画像が取得される(S321)。そして、その取得されたコード画像に対してデコード処理がなされて(S307)、デコード結果に関してメモリ35が参照される(S309)。 Subsequently, in the determination process of step S319, it is determined whether or not there is another code image that has not been decoded because the captured image contains two or more code images. Here, if there is another code image that has not been decoded because there are two or more code images in the captured image (Yes in S319), the next code image is acquired (S321). Then, decoding processing is performed on the acquired code image (S307), and the memory 35 is referred to with respect to the decoding result (S309).
 そして、上記デコード処理で得られたデコード結果に一致するデータがメモリ35に記憶されている場合には(S311でYes)、ステップS313の判定処理にて、その一致するデコード結果が所定の読取回数以内に出力されていないか否かについて判定される。ここで、上記読取回数は、1つの撮像画像について1回カウントされる回数であり、本実施形態では、上記所定の読取回数は、例えば、今回撮像された撮像画像でデコードされたデコード結果や前回撮像された撮像画像でデコードされたデコード結果が当該所定の読取回数以内に出力されていると判定され、前々回撮像された撮像画像でデコードされたデコード結果が当該所定の読取回数以内に出力されていないと判定されるように設定されている。 Then, when the data matching the decoding result obtained in the above decoding process is stored in the memory 35 (Yes in S311), the matching decoding result is read a predetermined number of times in the determination process in step S313. It is determined whether or not the output is within. Here, the reading number is the number of times counted once for one captured image, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined reading number is, for example, the decoding result decoded by the captured image captured this time or the previous time. It is determined that the decoding result decoded by the captured image is output within the predetermined reading number, and the decoding result decoded by the captured image captured two times before is output within the predetermined reading number. It is set so that it is determined that there is no such thing.
 ここで、同じデータがそれぞれ記録された2つの情報コードが1つの撮像画像に含まれているために直前にデコードされてメモリ35に記憶されたデコード結果と同じデコード結果が得られた場合には、一致するデコード結果が所定の読取回数以内に出力されていると判定されて(S313でNo)、上記ステップS319以降の処理がなされる。 Here, when two information codes in which the same data are recorded are included in one captured image, and therefore the same decoding result as the decoding result stored in the memory 35 immediately before being decoded is obtained. , It is determined that the matching decoding result is output within a predetermined number of readings (No in S313), and the processing after step S319 is performed.
 一方、前々回又は前々回よりも前に撮像された撮像画像でデコードされたデコード結果と同じデコード結果が得られた場合には、一致するデコード結果が所定の読取回数以内に出力されていないと判定されて(S313でYes)、そのデコード結果が上位機器等に出力される(S315)。 On the other hand, if the same decoding result as the decoding result obtained in the captured image captured two times before or two times before is obtained, it is determined that the matching decoding result is not output within the predetermined number of readings. (Yes in S313), and the decoding result is output to a higher-level device or the like (S315).
 そして、1つの撮像画像に含まれる全てのコード画像についてデコードがなされると(S319でNo)、所定の終了操作などがなされていない場合には(S323でNo)、新たな撮像画像が撮像されて(S301)、この撮像画像について上記ステップS303以降の処理がなされる。 Then, when all the code images included in one captured image are decoded (No in S319), a new captured image is captured when a predetermined end operation or the like is not performed (No in S323). (S301), the processed image after step S303 is performed on this captured image.
 以上説明したように、本実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置10では、読取処理において、撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理がなされ、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されているために1つの撮像画像から複数のデコード結果が得られる場合に、2以上の同じデコード結果が得られているか否かついて判定される。そして、2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合に、2以上の同じデコード結果の1つについて所定の処理としてデコード結果の出力処理を行う。 As described above, in the optical information reading device 10 according to the present embodiment, in the reading process, a decoding process for decoding an information code with respect to the captured image captured by the imaging unit is performed, and a plurality of information codes are used. When a plurality of decoding results can be obtained from one captured image because they are simultaneously imaged, it is determined whether or not two or more of the same decoding results are obtained. Then, when it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained, the decoding result output processing is performed as a predetermined process for one of the two or more same decoding results.
 これにより、例えば、同じデータがそれぞれ記録されたコード種別の異なる情報コードが同時に撮像される場合でも、重複して同じ処理が行われることを抑制することができる。 As a result, for example, even when information codes of different code types in which the same data are recorded are simultaneously imaged, it is possible to prevent the same processing from being performed twice.
 特に、本実施形態では、2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって(S311でYes)、メモリ35に記憶される情報に基づいて同じデコード結果に一致するデコード結果が所定の読取回数以内に上記所定の処理が行われていない場合に(S313でYes)このデコード結果について所定の処理(デコード結果の出力処理)を行う。 In particular, in the present embodiment, it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained (Yes in S311), and the decoding results that match the same decoding results based on the information stored in the memory 35. When the above-mentioned predetermined processing is not performed within the predetermined number of readings (Yes in S313), a predetermined processing (decoding result output processing) is performed on this decoding result.
 これにより、以前に同じデコード結果を読み取っていたとしても、その以前のデコード結果が上記所定の読取回数以内に上記所定の処理が行われていない場合、すなわち、最近、上記所定の処理に用いられたデコード結果でない場合には、使用者が意図して同じデータが記録された2以上の情報コードを読み取っているとして、同じデコード結果を利用して上記所定の処理を行うことができる。 As a result, even if the same decoding result has been read before, if the previous decoding result has not been subjected to the predetermined processing within the predetermined number of readings, that is, it has recently been used for the predetermined processing. If it is not the decoding result, it is assumed that the user intentionally reads two or more information codes in which the same data is recorded, and the same decoding result can be used to perform the above-mentioned predetermined processing.
 次に、本実施形態の第1変形例について、図37に示すフローチャートを参照して説明する。
 本実施形態の第1変形例における読取処理では、上述のようにデコード結果が上位機器等に出力された後(図37のS315)、そのデコード結果がデコード処理を終えたデコード時刻とともに記憶部として機能するメモリ35に記憶される(S317a)。その後、新たに取得されたコード画像に対するデコード処理が成功し(S307)、そのデコード結果に一致するデータがメモリ35に記憶されていると判定されると(S311でYes)、ステップS313aに示す判定処理にて、同じデコード結果に一致するデコード結果に関連付けられて記憶されるデコード時刻からの経過時間が所定時間以上であるか否かについて判定される。そして、一致したデコード結果のデコード時刻からの経過時間が上
記所定時間以上となる場合には(S313aでYes)、デコード結果が上位機器等に出力され(S315)、上記所定時間未満となる場合には(S313aでNo)、そのデコード結果が出力されることなく上記ステップS319以降の処理がなされる。
Next, a first modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 37.
In the reading process in the first modification of the present embodiment, after the decoding result is output to a higher-level device or the like as described above (S315 in FIG. 37), the decoding result is stored as a storage unit together with the decoding time when the decoding process is completed. It is stored in the functioning memory 35 (S317a). After that, when the decoding process for the newly acquired code image is successful (S307) and it is determined that the data matching the decoding result is stored in the memory 35 (Yes in S311), the determination shown in step S313a is performed. In the process, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the decoding time stored in association with the decoding result matching the same decoding result is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. Then, when the elapsed time from the decoding time of the matching decoding result is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (Yes in S313a), the decoding result is output to a higher-level device or the like (S315), and when it is less than the predetermined time. (No in S313a), the processing after step S319 is performed without outputting the decoding result.
 これにより、以前に同じデコード結果を読み取っていたとしても、その以前のデコード結果のデコード時刻からの経過時間が所定時間以上となる場合、すなわち、最近、上記所定の処理に用いられたデコード結果でない場合には、使用者が意図して同じデータが記録された2以上の情報コードを読み取っているとして、同じデコード結果を利用して上記所定の処理を行うことができる。 As a result, even if the same decoding result is read before, if the elapsed time from the decoding time of the previous decoding result is longer than a predetermined time, that is, it is not the decoding result recently used for the predetermined processing. In this case, assuming that the user intentionally reads two or more information codes in which the same data is recorded, the same decoding result can be used to perform the above-mentioned predetermined processing.
 次に、本実施形態の第2変形例について、図38に示すフローチャートを参照して説明する。
 本実施形態の第2変形例における読取処理では、デコードされたデコード結果に一致するデータがメモリ35に記憶されている情報コードについて、その情報コードが撮像部の撮像視野から外されて再び撮像視野内に入り込む回数を撮像回数Nとしてカウントし、2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって、上記同じデコード結果に一致するデコード結果の撮像回数Nが所定回数Nth以上となる場合に、上記デコード結果について所定の処理を行う。
Next, a second modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 38.
In the reading process in the second modification of the present embodiment, for the information code in which the data matching the decoded decoding result is stored in the memory 35, the information code is removed from the imaging field of the imaging unit and the imaging field is displayed again. When the number of times of entering the inside is counted as the number of imaging times N and it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained, the number of imaging times N of the decoding results matching the same decoding result is the predetermined number of times Nth or more. In that case, a predetermined process is performed on the above-mentioned decoding result.
 具体的には、デコード結果に一致するデータがメモリ35に記憶されている場合に(図38のS311でYes)、そのデコード結果の撮像回数Nがカウント対象として設定されていないと、撮像回数Nが所定回数Nth未満であるとして(S325でNo)、ステップS327にてNoと判定されて、そのデコード結果がカウント対象に設定される(S329)。そして、ステップS319以降の処理がなされ、上記ステップS303の判定処理にて、上記撮像画像に情報コードと認識されうるコード画像がないと判定されるごとに(S303でNo)、カウント対象とされたデコード結果に関してその撮像回数Nがインクリメント(N=N+1)されるようにカウントされる(S331)。なお、撮像回数Nをカウントする制御回路40は、「カウント部」の一例に相当し得る。 Specifically, when the data matching the decoding result is stored in the memory 35 (Yes in S311 of FIG. 38), if the imaging number N of the decoding result is not set as the counting target, the imaging number N Is less than the predetermined number of times Nth (No in S325), it is determined as No in step S327, and the decoding result is set as the count target (S329). Then, the processes after step S319 are performed, and each time the determination process in step S303 determines that the captured image does not have a code image that can be recognized as an information code (No in S303), the image is counted. The number of imaging times N is counted so as to be incremented (N = N + 1) with respect to the decoding result (S331). The control circuit 40 that counts the number of times of imaging N can correspond to an example of the “counting unit”.
 そして、カウント対象とされているデコード結果が再び読み取られた際に(S311でYes)、その撮像回数Nが所定回数Nth以上になると(S325でYes)、そのデコード結果が上位機器等に出力されて(S315)、メモリ35に記憶された後(S317)、カウント対象の設定がクリアされる(S333)。 Then, when the decoding result to be counted is read again (Yes in S311) and the number of imaging times N becomes Nth or more a predetermined number of times (Yes in S325), the decoding result is output to a higher-level device or the like. (S315), after being stored in the memory 35 (S317), the count target setting is cleared (S333).
 これにより、使用者が意図して同じデータが記録された2以上の情報コードを読み取るために、その情報コードを撮像視野に入れる撮像状態と撮像視野から外す撮像状態とを繰り返すことで、同じデコード結果のそれぞれについて上記所定の処理を行うことができる。特に、デコードが成功した情報コードの撮像中に、周囲の影響等によって一瞬その情報コードが撮像されなくなるような場合でも、撮像回数Nがある程度増えるだけであり、一瞬撮像されなくなることだけで、同じデコード結果のそれぞれについて上記所定の処理が行われることを防止できる。 As a result, in order to read two or more information codes in which the same data is intentionally recorded by the user, the same decoding is performed by repeating the imaging state in which the information code is put in the imaging field of view and the imaging state in which the information code is removed from the imaging field of view. The above-mentioned predetermined processing can be performed for each of the results. In particular, even if the information code is not imaged for a moment due to the influence of the surroundings during the imaging of the information code that has been successfully decoded, the number of imaging times N is only increased to some extent, and the image is not captured for a moment. It is possible to prevent the above-mentioned predetermined processing from being performed for each of the decoding results.
 次に、本実施形態の第3変形例について、図39に示すフローチャートを参照して説明する。
 本実施形態の第3変形例における読取処理では、デコードされたデコード結果に一致するデータがメモリ35に記憶されている情報コードについて、撮像部の撮像視野から外された時刻がコード除外時刻としてデコード結果に関連付けられてメモリ35に記憶され、2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって、上記同じデコード結果に一致するデコード結果のコード除外時刻からの経過時間が所定時間以上となる場合に、上記デコード結果について所定の処理を行う。
Next, a third modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 39.
In the reading process in the third modification of the present embodiment, the time when the information code whose data matching the decoded decoding result is stored in the memory 35 is removed from the imaging field of the imaging unit is decoded as the code exclusion time. It is stored in the memory 35 in association with the result, and it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained, and the elapsed time from the code exclusion time of the decoding result matching the same decoding result is predetermined. When the time is longer than that, a predetermined process is performed on the above-mentioned decoding result.
 具体的には、デコード結果に一致するデータがメモリ35に記憶されている場合に(図39のS311でYes)、そのデコード結果が計時対象として設定されていないと(S335でNo)、撮像処理がなされ(S337)、この撮像画像から情報コードと認識されうるコード画像がなくなるまで、ステップS339の判定処理にてNoとの判定が繰り返される。そして、撮像画像にコード画像が含まれなくなると(S339でYes)、計時対象とされた情報コードが撮像部の撮像視野から外された時刻が、コード除外時刻として設定されて、そのデコード結果に関連付けられてメモリ35に記憶される(S341)。 Specifically, when the data matching the decoding result is stored in the memory 35 (Yes in S311 in FIG. 39), and the decoding result is not set as the time measurement target (No in S335), the imaging process (S337), the determination of No is repeated in the determination process of step S339 until there is no code image that can be recognized as an information code from this captured image. Then, when the code image is no longer included in the captured image (Yes in S339), the time when the information code targeted for timekeeping is removed from the imaging field of view of the imaging unit is set as the code exclusion time, and the decoding result is set. It is associated and stored in the memory 35 (S341).
 そして、計時対象とされているデコード結果が再び読み取られた際に(S311,S335でYes)、そのコード除外時刻からの経過時間が所定時間以上となると(S343でYes)、そのデコード結果が上位機器等に出力されて(S315)、メモリ35に記憶された後(S317)、計時対象の設定がクリアされる(S345)。 Then, when the decoding result targeted for timekeeping is read again (Yes in S311 and S335), when the elapsed time from the code exclusion time exceeds a predetermined time (Yes in S343), the decoding result is ranked higher. After being output to a device or the like (S315) and stored in the memory 35 (S317), the timekeeping target setting is cleared (S345).
 これにより、使用者が意図して同じデータが記録された2以上の情報コードを読み取るために、その情報コードを一定時間撮像視野から外した後に再び撮像視野に入れることで、同じデコード結果のそれぞれについて上記所定の処理を行うことができる。 As a result, in order to read two or more information codes in which the same data is intentionally recorded by the user, the information codes are removed from the imaging field of view for a certain period of time and then put back into the imaging field of view, so that the same decoding results are obtained. The above-mentioned predetermined processing can be performed.
 次に、本実施形態の第4変形例について、図40に示すフローチャートを参照して説明する。
 本実施形態の第4変形例における読取処理では、2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合に、検出される筐体11の姿勢が所定の姿勢状態である場合に、上記デコード結果について所定の処理を行う。このため、本第4変形例では、光学的情報読取装置10は、ジャイロセンサや加速度センサなどからなる筐体11の姿勢を検出する姿勢検出部として姿勢センサを備え、この姿勢センサからの検出信号に応じて制御回路40では、筐体11の姿勢状態を把握する。
Next, a fourth modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 40.
In the reading process in the fourth modification of the present embodiment, when it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained, and the posture of the housing 11 to be detected is a predetermined posture state, the above Performs predetermined processing on the decoding result. Therefore, in the fourth modification, the optical information reading device 10 includes a posture sensor as a posture detecting unit for detecting the posture of the housing 11 including a gyro sensor and an acceleration sensor, and a detection signal from the posture sensor. In response to this, the control circuit 40 grasps the posture state of the housing 11.
 具体的には、デコード結果に一致するデータがメモリ35に記憶されている場合に(図40のS311でYes)、ステップS313bの判定処理にて、一定時間姿勢センサから出力される検出信号に基づいて、筐体11の姿勢が所定の姿勢状態であるか否かについて判定される。本第4変形例では、上記所定の姿勢状態は、例えば、デコードが成功したときの姿勢から大きく変化している状態に設定されている。 Specifically, when data matching the decoding result is stored in the memory 35 (Yes in S311 of FIG. 40), it is based on the detection signal output from the posture sensor for a certain period of time in the determination process of step S313b. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the posture of the housing 11 is in a predetermined posture state. In the fourth modification, the predetermined posture state is set to, for example, a state in which the posture is significantly changed from the posture when decoding is successful.
 ここで、使用者が読取口50の向きを変えるように筐体11を動かしたことから、筐体11の姿勢が上記所定の姿勢状態であると判定されると(S313bでYes)、デコード結果が上位機器等に出力される(S315)。一方、読取口50がその情報コードに向けられたままであることから、筐体11の姿勢が所定の姿勢状態でないと判定されると(S313bでNo)、そのデコード結果が出力されることなく上記ステップS319以降の処理がなされる。 Here, since the user moves the housing 11 so as to change the direction of the reading port 50, if it is determined that the posture of the housing 11 is in the predetermined posture state (Yes in S313b), the decoding result Is output to a higher-level device or the like (S315). On the other hand, since the reading port 50 remains directed to the information code, if it is determined that the posture of the housing 11 is not in the predetermined posture state (No in S313b), the decoding result is not output and the above-mentioned The processing after step S319 is performed.
 これにより、使用者が意図して同じデータが記録された2以上の情報コードを読み取るために、上記所定の姿勢状態となるように筐体11を把持することで、同じデコード結果のそれぞれについて上記所定の処理を行うことができる。 As a result, in order to read two or more information codes in which the same data is intentionally recorded by the user, the housing 11 is gripped so as to be in the predetermined posture state, and the same decoding result is obtained for each of the above. A predetermined process can be performed.
[第12実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第12実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第12実施形態では、トリガースイッチを廃止することで常時行われる読取処理において情報コードを容易に狙い読み可能とする点が主に上記第1実施形態と異なる。
[12th Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
The twelfth embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that the information code can be easily aimed and read in the reading process that is always performed by eliminating the trigger switch.
 近年、QRコードなどの二次元コードが普及してきており、小売店やコンビニエンスストアのレジ等でも、受光手段としてエリアセンサを用いた二次元コードを読み取り可能な光学的情報読取装置の導入が増加すると予想される。このため、従来のラインセンサを使用した光学的情報読取装置に比べて、読み取りエリアが広く、情報コードの向きに関係なく、エリア内に情報コードを合わせることで簡単に読み取る事が可能となる。しかし、意図せずにエリア内に複数の情報コードが入る場合や、読取操作中に読取対象外の情報コードを読み取る場合があり、読取対象の情報コードを読み取ったことが判断し難くなる場合もある。 In recent years, two-dimensional codes such as QR codes have become widespread, and the introduction of optical information readers capable of reading two-dimensional codes using area sensors as light-receiving means will increase even at cash registers in retail stores and convenience stores. is expected. Therefore, as compared with the conventional optical information reading device using a line sensor, the reading area is wide, and it is possible to easily read by matching the information code in the area regardless of the orientation of the information code. However, there are cases where multiple information codes are unintentionally entered in the area, or information codes that are not to be read may be read during the reading operation, making it difficult to determine that the information codes to be read have been read. is there.
 ところで、小売店やコンビニエでは、店舗業務において情報コードを読み取る回数が多く、トリガースイッチを操作しないで読み取れる光学的情報読取装置が採用されており、読取口を情報コードの向きに合わせ、情報コードに直接当てて読み取ることで、読取誤操作を防止し、読取対象の情報コードを読み取ることができる。また、コンビニ業界を取り巻く環境においては、店舗の省人化によるセルフレジ導入や、外国労働者の増加が進み、読取操作の経験値が浅い操作者においても、だれでも簡単にかざす操作だけで、読取対象の情報コードを確実に狙い読みすることが求められている。このため、エリアセンサを用いた光学的情報読取装置においてトリガースイッチを操作することなく狙い読みを行なう場合、読み取りエリア中心のポイントマーカと情報コードの位置を合わせて、狙い読みをする操作方法となる。しかしながら、エリアの中心位置に合わせる操作が必要となり、広い読み取りエリアを活かした、狙い読みが実現できないという問題がある。 By the way, in retail stores and convenience stores, the number of times the information code is read in store operations is large, and an optical information reading device that can be read without operating the trigger switch is adopted, and the reading port is aligned with the direction of the information code to be used as the information code. By directly hitting and reading, it is possible to prevent an erroneous reading operation and read the information code to be read. In addition, in the environment surrounding the convenience store industry, the introduction of self-checkouts due to labor saving in stores and the increase in foreign workers are advancing, and even operators with little experience in reading operations can read by simply holding it up. It is required to reliably aim and read the target information code. Therefore, when performing aim reading without operating the trigger switch in an optical information reading device using an area sensor, the operation method is to align the position of the point marker at the center of the reading area and the information code to perform aim reading. .. However, there is a problem that it is necessary to perform an operation of adjusting to the center position of the area, and it is not possible to realize aim reading utilizing a wide reading area.
 そこで、本実施形態にてなされる読取処理では、撮像部により連続的に撮像される複数の連続撮像画像において、同じ情報コードのコード画像が検出され、この検出されているコード画像が撮像画像に占める状態に応じて、当該コード画像が読取対象であるか否かについて判定する。具体的には、コード画像が撮像画像に占める状態が所定の状態であるか、より具体的には、本実施形態では、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が所定範囲以上となる場合に、そのコード画像が読取対象である判定する。使用者が狙い読みしようとしている情報コードは、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が所定範囲以上等となりやすいからである。 Therefore, in the scanning process performed in the present embodiment, a code image having the same information code is detected in a plurality of continuously captured images continuously captured by the imaging unit, and the detected code image is used as the captured image. It is determined whether or not the code image is a reading target according to the occupied state. Specifically, when the state in which the code image occupies the captured image is a predetermined state, or more specifically, in the present embodiment, when the range of the code image occupying the captured image is equal to or greater than the predetermined range. Determine that the code image is the reading target. This is because the information code that the user intends to read tends to have a range of the code image occupied in the captured image, such as a predetermined range or more.
 以下、本実施形態において、制御回路40にてなされる読取処理について、図41に示すフローチャートを参照して詳述する。
 制御回路40により読取処理が開始されると、図41に示すステップS401の撮像処理がなされ、受光センサ28及び結像レンズ27等を撮像部として機能させることで、この撮像部により情報コードをデコードするための画像が撮像される。続いて、ステップS403に示すコード画像検出処理がなされ、撮像部により撮像された撮像画像から情報コードをデコードするためのコード画像を検出する処理がなされる。例えば、撮像した情報コードがQRコード(登録商標)であれば、コード領域の三隅にそれぞれ配置されるファインダパターン(位置検出パターン)を基準にコード画像を検出する処理がなされる。なお、上記コード画像検出処理を実行する制御回路40は、「コード画像検出部」の一例に相当し得る。
Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
When the reading process is started by the control circuit 40, the imaging process of step S401 shown in FIG. 41 is performed, and the light receiving sensor 28, the imaging lens 27, and the like function as an imaging unit, whereby the information code is decoded by this imaging unit. The image to be taken is taken. Subsequently, the code image detection process shown in step S403 is performed, and a process for detecting a code image for decoding the information code from the captured image captured by the imaging unit is performed. For example, if the captured information code is a QR code (registered trademark), a process of detecting a code image is performed based on a finder pattern (position detection pattern) arranged at each of the three corners of the code area. The control circuit 40 that executes the code image detection process may correspond to an example of the “code image detection unit”.
 そして、コード画像の検出が成功すると(S405でYes)、その検出結果がメモリ35に記憶された後(S407)、ステップS409に示すデコード処理にて、上述のように検出されたコード画像に対して情報コードをデコードするための処理がなされる。このデコード処理が失敗した場合や(S411でNo)、上述したコード画像の検出が失敗した場合には(S405でNo)、上記ステップS401からの処理がなされる。なお、上記デコード処理を実行する制御回路40は、「デコード部」の一例に相当し得る。 Then, when the code image is successfully detected (Yes in S405), the detection result is stored in the memory 35 (S407), and then the code image detected as described above is subjected to the decoding process shown in step S409. The process for decoding the information code is performed. When this decoding process fails (No in S411) or when the detection of the code image described above fails (No in S405), the process from step S401 is performed. The control circuit 40 that executes the decoding process can correspond to an example of the "decoding unit".
 上記デコード処理が成功すると(S411でYes)、そのデコード処理により得られたデコード結果がメモリ35に記憶される(S413)。続いて、ステップS415の判定処理にて、コード画像が撮像画像に占める状態が所定の状態であるか否か、具体的には、上述したように、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が所定範囲以上であるか否かについて判定される。 When the decoding process is successful (Yes in S411), the decoding result obtained by the decoding process is stored in the memory 35 (S413). Subsequently, in the determination process of step S415, whether or not the state occupied by the code image in the captured image is a predetermined state, specifically, as described above, the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is a predetermined range. It is judged whether or not it is the above.
 ここで、読取対象の情報コードCに読取口50を向けた直後であることから、例えば、図42(A)に示すように、デコード可能に撮像された情報コードCのコード画像であっても、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が上記所定範囲未満であると、上記ステップS415にてNoと判定される。この場合には、上記ステップS401からの処理がなされて、情報コードをデコードするための撮像処理が継続される。その後に、撮像された情報コードのコード画像についてデコード処理が成功したとしても(S411でYes)、読取対象の情報コードCに読取口50を近づけている途中であることから、例えば、図42(B)に示すように、前回のコード画像より大きくなっても、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が上記所定範囲未満であると、上記ステップS415にてNoと判定される。この場合も、上記ステップS401からの処理がなされて、情報コードをデコードするための撮像処理が継続される。すなわち、撮像部により連続的に撮像される複数の連続撮像画像において、同じ情報コードのコード画像が検出され、この検出されているコード画像が撮像画像に占める状態に応じて、当該コード画像が読取対象であるか否かについて判定される。 Here, since the reading port 50 has just been pointed at the information code C to be read, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), even if the code image of the information code C is imaged so that it can be decoded. If the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is less than the predetermined range, it is determined as No in step S415. In this case, the process from step S401 is performed, and the imaging process for decoding the information code is continued. After that, even if the decoding process of the captured information code code image is successful (Yes in S411), since the reading port 50 is in the process of being brought close to the information code C to be read, for example, FIG. As shown in B), if the range of the code image occupying the captured image is less than the predetermined range even if it is larger than the previous code image, it is determined as No in step S415. In this case as well, the processing from step S401 is performed, and the imaging process for decoding the information code is continued. That is, a code image having the same information code is detected in a plurality of continuously captured images continuously captured by the imaging unit, and the code image is read according to the state in which the detected code image occupies the captured image. It is judged whether or not it is a target.
 そして、読取対象の情報コードに読取口50を接近させたことから、例えば、図42(C)に示すように、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が上記所定範囲以上になると、上記ステップS415にてYesと判定される。この場合には、ステップS417に示すデコード結果出力処理がなされて、デコード結果を利用した所定の処理として、そのデコード結果が上位機器等に出力される。続いて、ステップS419の報知処理がなされ、デコード処理の成功に応じた所定の報知として、報知部として機能する発光部46が所定の点灯状態となる。なお、上記デコード結果を出力する処理(S417)を行う制御回路40は、デコード結果を利用した所定の処理を行うための「処理部」の一例に相当し得る。また、デコード処理の成功に応じた所定の報知は、ブザー44の鳴動やバイブレータ45の振動を利用して行ってもよく、この場合には、ブザー44やバイブレータ45は、「報知部」の一例に相当し得る。 Then, since the reading port 50 is brought close to the information code to be read, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), when the range of the code image occupied in the captured image exceeds the predetermined range, the step S415 is performed. Is determined to be Yes. In this case, the decoding result output process shown in step S417 is performed, and the decoding result is output to a higher-level device or the like as a predetermined process using the decoding result. Subsequently, the notification process of step S419 is performed, and the light emitting unit 46 functioning as the notification unit is brought into a predetermined lighting state as a predetermined notification according to the success of the decoding process. The control circuit 40 that performs the process (S417) of outputting the decoding result can correspond to an example of a "processing unit" for performing a predetermined process using the decoding result. Further, the predetermined notification according to the success of the decoding process may be performed by using the sound of the buzzer 44 or the vibration of the vibrator 45. In this case, the buzzer 44 or the vibrator 45 is an example of the "notification unit". Can correspond to.
 以上説明したように、本実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置10では、撮像部により連続的に撮像される複数の連続撮像画像において、同じ情報コードのコード画像が検出され、この検出されているコード画像が撮像画像に占める状態に応じて、当該コード画像が読取対象であるか否かについて読取対象判定部により判定される。そして、読取対象であると判定されたコード画像のデコード処理が成功していることでデコード結果が得られていると(S411,S415でYes)、このデコード結果を利用して処理部により所定の処理が行われて、報知部により所定の報知が行われる。 As described above, in the optical information reading device 10 according to the present embodiment, code images having the same information code are detected in a plurality of continuously captured images continuously captured by the imaging unit, and these are detected. Depending on the state in which the code image occupies the captured image, the reading target determination unit determines whether or not the code image is the reading target. Then, when the decoding result is obtained by successfully decoding the code image determined to be the reading target (Yes in S411 and S415), the processing unit uses this decoding result to determine. Processing is performed, and a predetermined notification is performed by the notification unit.
 これにより、デコードタイミングを指示するためのトリガースイッチ等を有しない光学的情報読取装置であっても、使用者が読み取ろうとする情報コードに読取口50を向けることで、その情報コードのコード画像が撮像画像に占める状態が所定の条件を満たす場合(本実施形態では、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が所定範囲以上となる場合)に、そのコード画像が読取対象である判定することができる。このため、読取対象と判定されたコード画像から得られたデコード結果を利用して所定の処理を行うとともに、デコード成功に応じた所定の報知を行うことで、トリガースイッチ等を利用することなく常時行われる読取処理において情報コードを狙い読みできる光学的情報読取装置を実現することができる。 As a result, even in an optical information reading device that does not have a trigger switch or the like for instructing the decoding timing, by pointing the reading port 50 at the information code to be read by the user, the code image of the information code can be displayed. When the state occupied in the captured image satisfies a predetermined condition (in the present embodiment, the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is equal to or larger than the predetermined range), it can be determined that the code image is the reading target. Therefore, by performing a predetermined process using the decoding result obtained from the code image determined to be the reading target and performing a predetermined notification according to the success of the decoding, the trigger switch or the like is not used at all times. It is possible to realize an optical information reading device capable of aiming and reading an information code in the reading process to be performed.
 なお、上記ステップS415の判定処理では、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が所定範囲以上となる場合に、コード画像が撮像画像に占める状態が所定の状態であるとして肯定判定されることに限らず、例えば、検出されたコード画像がほぼ移動することなく所定時間連続して検出される場合に、コード画像が撮像画像に占める状態が所定の状態であるとして肯定判定されてもよい。また、上記ステップS415の判定処理では、検出されたコード画像の一辺の長さが所定値以上となる場合に、コード画像が撮像画像に占める状態が所定の状態であるとして肯定判定されてもよい。 In the determination process of step S415, when the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is equal to or larger than the predetermined range, the state occupied by the code image in the captured image is not limited to the affirmative determination as the predetermined state. For example, when the detected code image is continuously detected for a predetermined time without moving substantially, the state in which the code image occupies the captured image may be positively determined as a predetermined state. Further, in the determination process of step S415, when the length of one side of the detected code image is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, a positive determination may be made as the state occupied by the code image in the captured image is a predetermined state. ..
 すなわち、検出されているコード画像の一部に相当する部分が撮像部による撮像視野から外れた場合でも、撮像視野内のコード画像の残部の状態が所定の条件を満たすと、コード画像が読取対象であると判定することができる。例えば、図43(A)及び図43(B)に示すように、デコード可能に撮像された情報コードCのコード画像であっても、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が上記所定範囲未満であるために(S415でNo)、デコード結果が出力されない場合を想定する。この場合、その後に、図43(C)に示すように、検出されているコード画像の一部に相当する部分が撮像部による撮像視野から外れた場合でも、撮像視野内のコード画像の残部に関してコード画像の一辺の長さが所定値以上となると、コード画像が撮像画像に占める状態が所定の状態であるとして(S415でYes)、デコード結果を出力することができる。 That is, even if a part corresponding to a part of the detected code image deviates from the imaging field of view by the imaging unit, if the state of the remaining part of the code image in the imaging field satisfies a predetermined condition, the code image is read. Can be determined to be. For example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (A) and 43 (B), even in the code image of the information code C captured decodably, the range of the code image occupied in the captured image is less than the above-mentioned predetermined range. Therefore (No in S415), it is assumed that the decoding result is not output. In this case, after that, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), even if a part corresponding to a part of the detected code image deviates from the imaging field of view by the imaging unit, the rest of the code image in the imaging field of view When the length of one side of the code image is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the decoding result can be output assuming that the state occupied by the code image in the captured image is a predetermined state (Yes in S415).
 これにより、使用者が狙い読みしようとしている情報コードの一部が撮像視野外となっただけで直ちにそのコード画像が読取対象外と判定されてしまうこともないので、より正確にそのコード画像が読取対象であるか否かについて判定することができる。 As a result, even if a part of the information code that the user is trying to read is out of the imaging field of view, the code image is not immediately determined to be out of the reading target, so that the code image can be more accurately read. It can be determined whether or not it is a reading target.
 次に、本実施形態の第1変形例について、図44に示すフローチャートを参照して説明する。
 本実施形態の第1変形例における読取処理では、デコードが成功していない状態でも検出されたコード画像が読取対象であるか否かについて判定する。具体的には、図44に示すフローチャートのように、コード画像の検出に成功しても(図44のS405でYes)、そのコード画像についてデコードが失敗すると(S411でNo)、ステップS421の判定処理にて、コード画像が撮像画像に占める状態が所定の状態であるか否かについて判定する。そのデコードに失敗したコード画像が上記所定の状態である場合には(S421でYes)、そのコード画像について1度もデコードが成功していないと(S423でNo)、そのコード画像が上記所定の状態になったことを示すフラグFcが「1」に設
定されて(S425)、上記ステップS401からの処理がなされる。一方、デコードに失敗したコード画像が上記所定の状態となった場合に(S421でYes)、そのコード画像について1度でもデコードが成功していると(S423でYes)、デコード結果が出力されるとともに(S417)、発光部46などの報知部が所定の報知状態となる(S419)。
Next, a first modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
In the reading process in the first modification of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the detected code image is the reading target even in the state where the decoding is not successful. Specifically, as shown in the flowchart shown in FIG. 44, even if the code image is successfully detected (Yes in S405 of FIG. 44), if the decoding of the code image fails (No in S411), the determination in step S421 is made. In the process, it is determined whether or not the state in which the code image occupies the captured image is a predetermined state. If the code image that failed to be decoded is in the above-mentioned predetermined state (Yes in S421), and if the code image has never been successfully decoded (No in S423), the code image is in the above-mentioned predetermined state. The flag Fc indicating that the state has been reached is set to "1" (S425), and the process from step S401 is performed. On the other hand, if the code image that failed to be decoded is in the above-mentioned predetermined state (Yes in S421), and if the code image has been successfully decoded even once (Yes in S423), the decoding result is output. At the same time (S417), the notification unit such as the light emitting unit 46 is brought into a predetermined notification state (S419).
 上述のようにフラグFcが「1」に設定された後、新たに撮像された同じ情報コードのコード画像についてデコードが成功すると(S411でYes)、そのコード画像のフラグFcが「1」に設定されているため、ステップS427の判定処理にてYesと判定されて、デコード結果が出力されるとともに(S417)、発光部46などの報知部が所定の報知状態となる(S419)。 After the flag Fc is set to "1" as described above, if the newly captured code image of the same information code is successfully decoded (Yes in S411), the flag Fc of the code image is set to "1". Therefore, it is determined as Yes in the determination process of step S427, the decoding result is output (S417), and the notification unit such as the light emitting unit 46 is in a predetermined notification state (S419).
 例えば、図45(A)及び図45(B)に示すように、デコード不能であるがファインダパターン等が認識できることで検出できたコード画像であっても、撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が上記所定範囲未満であるために(S421でNo)、デコード結果が出力されない場合を想定する。この場合、その後に、図45(C)に示すように、デコード不能であるがファインダパターン等が認識できることで検出できたコード画像が撮像画像において上記所定範囲以上となると(S421でYes,S423でNo)、フラグFcが「1」に設定されて(S425)、その後も、連続的に撮像された撮像画像からコード画像を検出するための処理が継続される。そして、図45(D)に示すように、フラグFcが「1」に設定されているものの撮像画像に占めるコード画像の範囲が上記所定範囲未満に変わったコード画像のデコードに成功すると(S411でYes,S427でYes)、デコード結果が出力されるとともに(S417)、発光部46などの報知部が所定の報知状態となる(S419)。 For example, as shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B, even if the code image cannot be decoded but can be detected by recognizing the finder pattern or the like, the range of the code image occupying the captured image is the above. It is assumed that the decoding result is not output because it is less than the predetermined range (No in S421). In this case, after that, as shown in FIG. 45 (C), when the code image that cannot be decoded but can be detected by recognizing the finder pattern or the like exceeds the above-mentioned predetermined range in the captured image (Yes, S423 in S421). No), the flag Fc is set to "1" (S425), and thereafter, the process for detecting the code image from the continuously captured images is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (D), when the code image whose flag Fc is set to "1" but the range of the code image occupying the captured image is changed to less than the predetermined range is successfully decoded (in S411). Yes), the decoding result is output (S417), and the notification unit such as the light emitting unit 46 is in a predetermined notification state (S419).
 すなわち、読取対象であると判定された際のコード画像のデコード処理が成功しておらず、当該判定後にそのコード画像のデコード処理が成功すると、その判定後に得られたデコード結果を利用して処理部により所定の処理が行われて、報知部により所定の報知が行われる。これにより、照明等の周囲環境のために、情報コードらしいものが撮像されていると判断できるもののそのデコードが成功しないままそのコード画像が読取対象であると判定された場合でも、その後の周囲環境の変化でそのコード画像のデコードが成功すると、読取対象のコード画像のデコードが成功したとして、その成功タイミングで上記所定の処理及び所定の報知を行うことができる。 That is, if the decoding process of the code image when it is determined to be the reading target is not successful and the decoding process of the code image is successful after the determination, the decoding result obtained after the determination is used for processing. A predetermined process is performed by the unit, and a predetermined notification is performed by the notification unit. As a result, even if it can be determined that an information code-like image has been captured due to the surrounding environment such as lighting, but the code image is determined to be read without successful decoding, the surrounding environment thereafter. If the decoding of the code image is successful due to the change in the above, it is assumed that the decoding of the code image to be read is successful, and the predetermined processing and the predetermined notification can be performed at the success timing.
 なお、本実施形態及び変形例において、図34からわかるように、撮像画像から2つ以上のコード画像が連続して検出される場合には、使用者の狙いが定まっていないとして、デコード結果を出力しないようにしてもよい。 In the present embodiment and the modified example, as can be seen from FIG. 34, when two or more code images are continuously detected from the captured image, it is assumed that the user's aim is not determined, and the decoding result is determined. You may not output it.
[第13実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第13実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第13実施形態では、複数の情報コードがデコード可能に同時に撮像されたとしても、読取対象とすべき情報コードのデコード結果を出力しやすくする点が主に上記第1実施形態と異なる。
[13th Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
The thirteenth embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in that even if a plurality of information codes are imaged at the same time so that they can be decoded, it is easy to output the decoding result of the information code to be read.
 読取対象とすべき情報コードの周囲に1又は2以上の他の情報コードが配置されるために複数の情報コードがデコード可能に同時に撮像された場合には、読取対象とすべき情報コードのデコード結果を出力し、他の情報コードのデコード結果を出力しないようにする必要がある。 When one or two or more other information codes are arranged around the information code to be read and a plurality of information codes are imaged at the same time so that they can be decoded, the information code to be read is decoded. It is necessary to output the result and not to output the decoding result of other information codes.
 そのため、従来では、撮像視野の中心を示すマーカ光を照射することで、読取対象とすべき情報コードのみを撮像視野に入れやすくして、その情報コードのデコード結果のみを出力するようにしている。しかしながら、使用者がマーカ光を視認できない場合、例えば、その情報コードが反射面や液晶画面等に表示される場合には、読取対象とすべき情報コードのみを撮像視野に入れ難くなるという問題がある。具体的には、例えば、複数の情報コードCとして、図46に例示するように、バーコードCc,Cd,Ceが画面表示されていると、その表示画面に照射されるマーカ光を視認し難いために、読取対象とすべきバーコードCdのみを撮像視野に入れ難くなる場合がある。 Therefore, conventionally, by irradiating a marker light indicating the center of the imaging field of view, it is easy to put only the information code to be read into the imaging field of view, and only the decoding result of the information code is output. .. However, when the user cannot visually recognize the marker light, for example, when the information code is displayed on a reflective surface, a liquid crystal screen, or the like, there is a problem that it is difficult to put only the information code to be read into the imaging field of view. is there. Specifically, for example, when the barcodes Cc, Cd, and Ce are displayed on the screen as a plurality of information codes C as illustrated in FIG. 46, it is difficult to visually recognize the marker light emitted on the display screen. Therefore, it may be difficult to put only the barcode Cd to be read into the imaging field of view.
 そこで、本実施形態にてなされる読取処理では、受光センサ28及び結像レンズ27等を撮像部として機能させることでこの撮像部により撮像される撮像画像Pから複数のデコード結果が得られる場合に、その撮像状態によっては、デコード結果の出力を制限する。
具体的には、撮像画像Pの一部(例えば、中央部分)を占めるように設けられる所定の読取エリア(以下、読取エリアPsともいう)に対して、デコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの画像が含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの画像が含まれない場合に、上記1つの情報コードのデコード結果を出力する。
Therefore, in the reading process performed in the present embodiment, when the light receiving sensor 28, the imaging lens 27, and the like function as an imaging unit, and a plurality of decoding results can be obtained from the captured image P imaged by the imaging unit. , The output of the decoding result is limited depending on the imaging state.
Specifically, one information code for which a decoding result is obtained for a predetermined reading area (hereinafter, also referred to as reading area Ps) provided so as to occupy a part (for example, a central part) of the captured image P. When the image of the above one information code is included and the image of the other information code is not included, the decoding result of the above one information code is output.
 以下、本実施形態において、図46に示すバーコードCdを読み取る場合を例に、制御回路40にてなされる読取処理について、図47に示すフローチャートを参照して詳述する。なお、本実施形態では、図48に例示するように、上記撮像部により撮像される撮像画像Pが640画素×480画素であり、読取エリアPsは、320画素×240画素であって、撮像画像Pと中心が一致するように設定される。 Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 47, taking the case of reading the barcode Cd shown in FIG. 46 as an example. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 48, the captured image P captured by the imaging unit is 640 pixels × 480 pixels, and the reading area Ps is 320 pixels × 240 pixels. It is set so that P and the center match.
 所定の操作等に応じて読取処理が開始されると、図47に示すステップS501の撮像処理がなされ、上記撮像部により情報コードをデコードするための撮像画像Pが撮像される。続いて、ステップS503に示すデコード処理にて、上記撮像画像Pに含まれる情報コードをデコードするための処理がなされ、デコードが成功するまで(S505でNo)、上記ステップS501からの処理が繰り返される。なお、上記ステップS503のデコード処理を実行する制御回路40は、「デコード部」の一例に相当し得る。 When the reading process is started in response to a predetermined operation or the like, the imaging process of step S501 shown in FIG. 47 is performed, and the captured image P for decoding the information code is captured by the imaging unit. Subsequently, in the decoding process shown in step S503, a process for decoding the information code included in the captured image P is performed, and the process from step S501 is repeated until the decoding is successful (No in S505). .. The control circuit 40 that executes the decoding process in step S503 can correspond to an example of the “decoding unit”.
 そして、デコードが成功してデコード結果が得られると(S505でYes)、ステップS507の判定処理にて、デコード結果が得られた情報コードの画像が読取エリアPsに含まれるか否かについて判定される。本実施形態では、具体的には、デコード結果が得られた情報コードの画像の全てが読取エリアPsに含まれているか否かについて判定しており、デコード結果が得られた情報コードの画像の一部のみが読取エリアPsに含まれるような場合には、ステップS507にてNoと判定されて、デコード結果が出力されることなく、上記ステップS501からの処理がなされる。 Then, when the decoding is successful and the decoding result is obtained (Yes in S505), it is determined in the determination process of step S507 whether or not the image of the information code for which the decoding result is obtained is included in the reading area Ps. To. In the present embodiment, specifically, it is determined whether or not all the images of the information code for which the decoding result is obtained are included in the reading area Ps, and the image of the information code for which the decoding result is obtained is determined. When only a part of the reading area Ps is included, No is determined in step S507, and the processing from step S501 is performed without outputting the decoding result.
 その後、読取対象のバーコードCdに読取口50を近づける際に、デコード結果が得られた情報コードの画像の全てが読取エリアPsに含まれるようになると(S507でYes)、ステップS509の判定処理にて、読取エリアPsに対して、デコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの画像が含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの画像が含まれない状態(以下、単一コード撮像状態ともいう)であるか否かについて判定される。 After that, when the reading port 50 is brought close to the barcode Cd to be read, if all the images of the information code for which the decoding result is obtained are included in the reading area Ps (Yes in S507), the determination process in step S509 is performed. In the reading area Ps, an image of one information code for which the decoding result was obtained is included, and an image of another information code is not included (hereinafter, also referred to as a single code imaging state). It is determined whether or not it is.
 本実施形態では、具体的には、読取エリアPsに対して、デコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの画像の全てが含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの画像の少なくとも一部が含まれない状態である場合に、単一コード撮像状態であると判定する。ここで、読取対象のバーコードCdに読取口50を近づけている途中であることから、図49に例示するように、読取対象のバーコードCdの画像の全てが読取エリアPsに含まれ、かつ、読取対象外のバーコードCcの画像の一部やバーコードCeの画像の一部が読取エリアPsに含まれるような場合には、単一コード撮像状態でないとして、ステップS509にてNoと判定されて、デコード結果が出力されることなく、上記ステップS501からの処理がなされる。 In the present embodiment, specifically, the reading area Ps includes all of the images of one information code for which the decoding result is obtained, and at least a part of the images of the other information codes. If there is no state, it is determined that the single code imaging state is in effect. Here, since the reading port 50 is being brought closer to the barcode Cd to be read, as illustrated in FIG. 49, all the images of the barcode Cd to be read are included in the reading area Ps, and the reading area Ps is included. If a part of the barcode Cc image or a part of the barcode Ce image that is not to be read is included in the reading area Ps, it is determined that the reading area is not in the single code imaging state, and No is determined in step S509. Then, the processing from step S501 is performed without outputting the decoding result.
 一方、読取対象のバーコードCdに読取口50を近づけ終えたことで、図50に例示するように、読取対象のバーコードCdの画像の全てが読取エリアPsに含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの画像の少なくとも一部が読取エリアPsに含まれない場合、すなわち、読取対象のバーコードCdの画像のみが読取エリアPsに含まれる場合には、単一コード撮像状態であるとして、ステップS509にてYesと判定される。 On the other hand, since the reading port 50 has been brought close to the barcode Cd to be read, as illustrated in FIG. 50, all the images of the barcode Cd to be read are included in the reading area Ps, and other information. When at least a part of the code image is not included in the reading area Ps, that is, when only the image of the barcode Cd to be read is included in the reading area Ps, it is assumed that the single code imaging state is in step S509. Is determined as Yes.
 この場合には、ステップS511のデコード結果出力処理にて、読取エリアPsに含まれるバーコードCdのデコード結果が上位機器等に出力される。なお、上記ステップS511のデコード結果出力処理を実行する制御回路40は、「出力部」の一例に相当し得る。 In this case, in the decoding result output process of step S511, the decoding result of the barcode Cd included in the reading area Ps is output to the host device or the like. The control circuit 40 that executes the decoding result output process in step S511 may correspond to an example of the “output unit”.
 以上説明したように、本実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置10では、撮像画像Pの一部を占めるように設けられる所定の読取エリアPsに対して、デコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの画像が含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの画像が含まれない場合に(S509でYes)、上記1つの情報コードのデコード結果が出力される(S511)。 As described above, in the optical information reading device 10 according to the present embodiment, one information code for which a decoding result is obtained for a predetermined reading area Ps provided so as to occupy a part of the captured image P. When the image of the above is included and the image of the other information code is not included (Yes in S509), the decoding result of the above one information code is output (S511).
 これにより、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されているためにそれぞれデコード結果が得られるような場合でも、読取エリアPsに含まれない情報コードのデコード結果が出力されないだけでなく、2以上の情報コードが所定の読取エリアPsに含まれてしまう場合にもデコード結果が出力されなくなる。すなわち、複数の情報コードがデコード可能に撮像されたとしても、読取対象とすべき情報コードの画像のみが読取エリアPsに含まれる場合に限ってその情報コードのデコード結果が出力されるので、読取対象とすべき情報コードに読取口50を向けている途中で撮像された別の情報コードのデコード結果など、意図せずに読み取った情報コードのデコード結果の出力を制限することができる。 As a result, even if the decoding results are obtained because the plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged, not only the decoding results of the information codes not included in the reading area Ps are output, but also two or more information codes are not output. Is included in the predetermined reading area Ps, the decoding result is not output. That is, even if a plurality of information codes are imaged so that they can be decoded, the decoding result of the information code is output only when only the image of the information code to be read is included in the reading area Ps. It is possible to limit the output of the decoding result of the information code read unintentionally, such as the decoding result of another information code captured while the reading port 50 is directed to the information code to be the target.
 特に、所定の読取エリアPsに対して、デコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの画像の全てが含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの画像の少なくとも一部が含まれない場合に、上記1つの情報コードのデコード結果が出力する。 In particular, when all the images of one information code for which the decoding result is obtained are included in the predetermined reading area Ps, and at least a part of the images of the other information codes is not included, the above 1 The decoding result of one information code is output.
 これにより、上述のように、読取対象とすべき情報コードに読取口50を向けている途中で、読取対象外の情報コードの一部の画像のみが読取エリアPsに含まれたとしても、その読取対象外の情報コードのデコード結果が出力されることもない。また、読取対象外の情報コードの全ての画像が読取エリアPsに含まれてしまったとしても、読取対象とすべき情報コードの少なくとも一部の画像が読取エリアPsに含まれていれば、それぞれのデコード結果が出力されることもない。このため、読取対象とすべき情報コードの近くに他の情報コードが配置されるような場合であっても、読取対象とすべき情報コードのデコード結果を出力しやすくすることができる。 As a result, as described above, even if only a part of the images of the information code not to be read is included in the reading area Ps while the reading port 50 is being directed to the information code to be read. The decoding result of the information code not to be read is not output. Further, even if all the images of the information code not to be read are included in the reading area Ps, if at least a part of the images of the information code to be read is included in the reading area Ps, respectively. The decoding result of is not output. Therefore, even when another information code is arranged near the information code to be read, it is possible to easily output the decoding result of the information code to be read.
 なお、作業環境等によっては、上記ステップS509の判定処理では、読取エリアPsに対して、デコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの画像の全てが含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの画像の全てが含まれない状態である場合に、単一コード撮像状態であると判定してもよい。また、読取エリアPsに対して、デコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの画像の少なくとも一部が含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの画像の少なくとも一部が含まれない状態である場合に、単一コード撮像状態であると判定してもよい。 Depending on the work environment and the like, in the determination process of step S509, the read area Ps includes all the images of one information code for which the decoding result is obtained, and the images of other information codes. When not all are included, it may be determined that the single code imaging state is in effect. Further, when the reading area Ps includes at least a part of the image of one information code for which the decoding result is obtained and at least a part of the image of the other information code is not included. , It may be determined that it is in the single code imaging state.
 本実施形態の変形例として、QRコードのFPパターンのように、各種のセルが配置されるコード領域において特定の位置に配置される特定パターンを有する情報コードを読取対象とする場合には、上記ステップS509の判定処理では、特定パターンの画像を利用して単一コード撮像状態であるか否かについて判定してもよい。すなわち、読取エリアPsに対して、デコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの特定パターンの画像が含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの特定パターンの画像が含まれない場合に、上記1つの情報コードのデコード結果を出力するようにしてもよい。 As a modification of the present embodiment, when an information code having a specific pattern arranged at a specific position in a code area where various cells are arranged is targeted for reading, such as an FP pattern of a QR code, the above In the determination process of step S509, it may be determined whether or not the image is in the single code imaging state by using the image of the specific pattern. That is, when the image of the specific pattern of one information code for which the decoding result is obtained is included in the reading area Ps and the image of the specific pattern of another information code is not included, the above-mentioned one information The decoding result of the code may be output.
 具体的には、例えば、読取エリアPsに対して、デコード結果が得られた情報コードの全ての特定パターンの画像が含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの特定パターンの画像が1つも含まれない状態である場合に、単一コード撮像状態であると判定してもよい。この場合には、例えば、図51に例示するように、読取エリアPsに対して、QRコードCfの全ての特定パターンFP1~FP3の画像が含まれ、QRコードCgの特定パターンFP1,FP2の画像が含まれる状態では、単一コード撮像状態でないと判定される。 Specifically, for example, the reading area Ps includes all the images of the specific pattern of the information code for which the decoding result is obtained, and does not include any image of the specific pattern of the other information code. When it is in the state, it may be determined that it is in the single code imaging state. In this case, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 51, the images of all the specific patterns FP1 to FP3 of the QR code Cf are included in the reading area Ps, and the images of the specific patterns FP1 and FP2 of the QR code Cg are included. In the state including, it is determined that the state is not a single code imaging state.
 これにより、上記ステップS509の判定処理では、認識しやすい情報コードの特定パターンを基準にその情報コードの画像が所定の読取エリアに含まれているか否かについて判定できるので、容易かつ精度良く判定することができる。 As a result, in the determination process of step S509, it can be determined whether or not the image of the information code is included in the predetermined reading area based on the specific pattern of the information code that is easy to recognize, so that the determination can be made easily and accurately. be able to.
[第14実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第14実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第14実施形態では、マーカ光が撮像されない場合には、撮像画像においてデコード対象エリア内に位置する情報コードのデコード結果を出力する点が主に上記第4実施形態と異なる。
[14th Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the 14th embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
The 14th embodiment is mainly different from the 4th embodiment in that when the marker light is not captured, the decoding result of the information code located in the decoding target area in the captured image is output.
 読取対象とすべき情報コードの周囲に1又は2以上の他の情報コードが配置されるために複数の情報コードがデコード可能に同時に撮像された場合には、読取対象とすべき情報コードのデコード結果を出力し、他の情報コードのデコード結果を出力しないようにする場合がある。 When one or two or more other information codes are arranged around the information code to be read and a plurality of information codes are imaged at the same time so that they can be decoded, the information code to be read is decoded. The result may be output, and the decoding result of other information codes may not be output.
 このような場合、従来では、撮像視野の中心に向けてマーカ光Lmを照射するマーカ光照射部29を設けることで、読取対象とすべき情報コードのみを撮像視野に入れやすくして、その情報コードのデコード結果のみを出力するようにしている。しかしながら、読取対象の情報コードを含めた複数の情報コードが画面表示される場合、照射されたマーカ光は自ら発光する表示画面では反射されないために、読取装置では撮像された複数の情報コードのうちどの情報コードが読取対象であるかわからないという問題がある。具体的には、例えば、配信されたクーポン用の情報コードが他の情報コードに隣接するようにスマートフォン等にて画面表示される場合、マーカ光が撮像されないために、クーポン用の情報コードのデコード結果のみを得ることができない場合がある。 In such a case, conventionally, by providing the marker light irradiation unit 29 that irradiates the marker light Lm toward the center of the imaging field of view, it is easy to put only the information code to be read into the imaging field of view, and the information is provided. Only the decoding result of the code is output. However, when a plurality of information codes including the information code to be read are displayed on the screen, the irradiated marker light is not reflected on the display screen that emits light by itself, and therefore, among the plurality of information codes imaged by the reading device. There is a problem that it is not known which information code is to be read. Specifically, for example, when the distributed information code for the coupon is displayed on the screen on a smartphone or the like so as to be adjacent to another information code, the marker light is not imaged, so that the information code for the coupon is decoded. It may not be possible to obtain only the results.
 そこで、本実施形態にてなされる読取処理では、受光センサ28及び結像レンズ27等を撮像部として機能させることでこの撮像部により撮像される撮像画像Pからマーカ光Lmが検出されない場合に、撮像画像Pの一部に相当するデコード対象エリアPd内に位置していると判定された情報コードであり、かつ、予め設定されたコード種別(指定コード種別)となる情報コードのデコード結果を出力する。本実施形態では、上記デコード対象エリアPdは、図52及び図53に例示するように、撮像画像Pの全体のうち使用者から見て奥側となるエリアに予め設定されている。筐体11を把持する使用者は、読取口50の周縁51のうち遠くに位置する一側縁部52を基準にしてその読取口50を読取対象の情報コードにかざそうとするからである。また、上記指定コード種別は、例えば、EAN-13に設定することができる。 Therefore, in the reading process performed in the present embodiment, when the light receiving sensor 28, the imaging lens 27, and the like function as an imaging unit and the marker light Lm is not detected from the image captured image P captured by the imaging unit, Outputs the decoding result of the information code that is the information code determined to be located in the decoding target area Pd corresponding to a part of the captured image P and that is the preset code type (designated code type). To do. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 52 and 53, the decoding target area Pd is preset in an area on the back side of the entire captured image P when viewed from the user. This is because the user who grips the housing 11 tries to hold the reading port 50 over the information code to be read with reference to the one side edge portion 52 located far away from the peripheral edge 51 of the reading port 50. Further, the designated code type can be set to, for example, EAN-13.
 以下、本実施形態において、制御回路40にてなされる読取処理について、図54に示すフローチャートを参照して詳述する。
 所定の操作等に応じて読取処理が開始されると、図54に示すステップS601の撮像処理がなされ、上記撮像部により情報コードをデコードするための撮像画像Pが撮像される。続いて、ステップS603のマーカ光検出処理にて、撮像画像Pからマーカ光Lmを検出するための処理がなされた後、ステップS605のデコード処理にて、上記撮像画像Pに含まれる情報コードをデコードするための処理がなされ、デコードが成功するまで(S607でNo)、上記ステップS601からの処理が繰り返される。なお、上記ステップS605のデコード処理を実行する制御回路40は、「デコード部」の一例に相当し得る。
Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 54.
When the reading process is started in response to a predetermined operation or the like, the imaging process of step S601 shown in FIG. 54 is performed, and the captured image P for decoding the information code is captured by the imaging unit. Subsequently, in the marker light detection process of step S603, a process for detecting the marker light Lm from the captured image P is performed, and then in the decoding process of step S605, the information code included in the captured image P is decoded. The process from step S601 is repeated until the process is performed and the decoding is successful (No in S607). The control circuit 40 that executes the decoding process in step S605 may correspond to an example of the “decoding unit”.
 そして、デコードが成功してデコード結果が得られると(S607でYes)、ステップS609の判定処理にて、上記デコード処理に応じて複数のデコード結果が得られているか否かについて判定される。ここで、1つのデコード結果が得られている場合には、ステップS609の判定処理にてNoと判定されて、ステップS617の第1デコード結果出力処理がなされ、デコード処理により得られた全てのデコード結果が上位機器等に出力される。上述のように1つのデコード結果が得られている場合には、第1デコード結果出力処理にてその1つのデコード結果が上位機器等に出力される。なお、上記第1デコード結果出力処理及び第2デコード結果出力処理を実行する制御回路40は、「出力部」の一例に相当し得る。 Then, when the decoding is successful and the decoding result is obtained (Yes in S607), it is determined in the determination process of step S609 whether or not a plurality of decoding results are obtained according to the decoding process. Here, when one decoding result is obtained, it is determined as No in the determination process of step S609, the first decoding result output process of step S617 is performed, and all the decodings obtained by the decoding process are performed. The result is output to the host device. When one decoding result is obtained as described above, the one decoding result is output to a higher-level device or the like in the first decoding result output process. The control circuit 40 that executes the first decoding result output processing and the second decoding result output processing may correspond to an example of the “output unit”.
 一方、複数のデコード結果が得られている場合には(S609でYes)、ステップS611の判定処理にて、上述したマーカ光検出処理にて撮像画像Pからマーカ光Lmが検出されているか否かについて判定される。ここで、撮像画像Pからマーカ光Lmが検出されている場合には(S611でYes)、画面表示された情報コードではなく、紙媒体に印刷等されている情報コードを読み取っているとして、上記デコード処理にて得られた全てのデコード結果が上位機器等に出力される(S617)。 On the other hand, when a plurality of decoding results are obtained (Yes in S609), whether or not the marker light Lm is detected from the captured image P by the marker light detection process described above in the determination process of step S611. Is judged about. Here, when the marker light Lm is detected from the captured image P (Yes in S611), it is assumed that the information code printed on the paper medium is read instead of the information code displayed on the screen. All the decoding results obtained by the decoding process are output to the host device or the like (S617).
 これに対して、複数のデコード結果が得られている場合であっても(S609でYes)、撮像画像Pからマーカ光Lmが検出されない場合には(S611でNo)、ステップS613の判定処理にて、デコード対象エリアPd内にデコード結果が得られた情報コードが1つ位置しているか否かについて判定される。なお、ステップS613の判定処理を実行する制御回路40は、デコードされた情報コードがデコード対象エリアPd内に位置しているか否かについて判定する「コード位置判定部」の一例に相当し得る。 On the other hand, even when a plurality of decoding results are obtained (Yes in S609), if the marker light Lm is not detected from the captured image P (No in S611), the determination process in step S613 is performed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not one information code for which the decoding result is obtained is located in the decoding target area Pd. The control circuit 40 that executes the determination process in step S613 can correspond to an example of a "code position determination unit" that determines whether or not the decoded information code is located in the decoding target area Pd.
 ここで、図52及び図53に例示するように、デコード対象エリアPd内にデコード結果が得られた情報コードが1つ位置している場合には、ステップS613にてYesと判定される。この場合には、ステップS615の判定処理にて、デコード対象エリアPd内に位置する情報コードのコード種別が予め設定されたコード種別(指定コード種別)であるか否かについて判定される。ここで、デコード対象エリアPd内に位置する情報コードのコード種別が指定コード種別(例えば、EAN-13)である場合には、ステップS615にてYesと判定されて、ステップS619の第2デコード結果出力処理がなされる。この処理では、ステップS605のデコード処理により得られた複数のデコード結果のうち、デコード対象エリアPd内に位置するとともに指定コード種別の情報コードのデコード結果が、上位機器等に出力される。図52及び図53の例では、バーコードCc,Cd,Ceのデコードが成功している場合でも、デコード対象エリアPd内に位置するコードCcのデコード結果のみが上位機器等に出力される。 Here, as illustrated in FIGS. 52 and 53, when one information code for which the decoding result is obtained is located in the decoding target area Pd, it is determined as Yes in step S613. In this case, in the determination process of step S615, it is determined whether or not the code type of the information code located in the decoding target area Pd is a preset code type (designated code type). Here, when the code type of the information code located in the decoding target area Pd is the specified code type (for example, EAN-13), it is determined as Yes in step S615, and the second decoding result in step S619. Output processing is done. In this process, among the plurality of decoding results obtained by the decoding process in step S605, the decoding results of the information code of the designated code type and located in the decoding target area Pd are output to the host device or the like. In the examples of FIGS. 52 and 53, even if the barcodes Cc, Cd, and Ce are successfully decoded, only the decoding result of the code Cc located in the decoding target area Pd is output to the host device or the like.
 一方、デコード対象エリアPd内に位置する情報コードのコード種別が指定コード種別でない場合(S615でNo)、又は、デコード対象エリアPd内にデコード結果が得られた情報コードが1つも位置していない場合には(S613でNo)、上記デコード処理にて得られた全てのデコード結果が上位機器等に出力される(S617)。 On the other hand, when the code type of the information code located in the decoding target area Pd is not the specified code type (No in S615), or no information code for which the decoding result is obtained is located in the decoding target area Pd. In this case (No in S613), all the decoding results obtained by the above decoding process are output to a higher-level device or the like (S617).
 以上説明したように、本実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置10では、撮像部によりマーカ光Lmが撮像されない場合には(S611でNo)、ステップS613の判定処理にてデコード対象エリアPd内に位置していると判定された情報コードであって、ステップS615の判定処理にて指定コード種別と判定された情報コードのデコード結果が出力される(S619)。 As described above, in the optical information reading device 10 according to the present embodiment, when the marker light Lm is not imaged by the imaging unit (No in S611), it is placed in the decoding target area Pd by the determination process in step S613. The decoding result of the information code determined to be located and determined to be the designated code type in the determination process of step S615 is output (S619).
 このように、撮像部によりマーカ光Lmが撮像されない場合には、画面表示された情報コードを読み取っているとして、デコード対象エリアPd内に位置していると判定された情報コードのデコード結果を出力することで、デコード対象エリアPd外の情報コードのデコード結果が出力されなくなる。すなわち、画面表示される複数の情報コードのうち読取対象の情報コードのみがデコード対象エリアPd内に位置するようにその画面に対して読取口50をかざすことで、同じ画面に表示される他の情報コードのデコード結果を出力することなく、読取対象の情報コードのデコード結果を出力することができる。そして、読取対象の情報コードに読取口50をかざす際に撮像画像において読取対象外の情報コードのみがデコード対象エリアPd内に位置したとしても、その読取対象外の情報コードのコード種別が予め設定されたコード種別と異なることで、読取対象外の情報コードのデコード結果が出力されてしまうことを防止することができる。 In this way, when the marker light Lm is not imaged by the imaging unit, it is assumed that the information code displayed on the screen is being read, and the decoding result of the information code determined to be located in the decoding target area Pd is output. By doing so, the decoding result of the information code outside the decoding target area Pd is not output. That is, by holding the reading port 50 over the screen so that only the information code to be read is located in the decoding target area Pd among the plurality of information codes displayed on the screen, other information codes displayed on the same screen. It is possible to output the decoding result of the information code to be read without outputting the decoding result of the information code. Then, even if only the information code not to be read is located in the decoding target area Pd in the captured image when the reading port 50 is held over the information code to be read, the code type of the information code not to be read is set in advance. By different from the code type, it is possible to prevent the decoding result of the information code not to be read from being output.
 さらに、デコード処理により1つの撮像画像から1つのデコード結果が得られた場合には(S609でNo)、その情報コードが読取対象であるか否かについて判断する必要がないので、マーカ光Lmが撮像されているか否かにかかわらず、その1つのデコード結果が出力される。これにより、撮像画像からマーカ光Lmが検出されているか否かについて判定するための処理等が不要となり、デコード結果の出力に関して処理負荷を軽減することができる。 Further, when one decoding result is obtained from one captured image by the decoding process (No in S609), it is not necessary to determine whether or not the information code is the reading target, so that the marker light Lm is used. One of the decoding results is output regardless of whether or not the image is captured. This eliminates the need for processing for determining whether or not the marker light Lm is detected from the captured image, and can reduce the processing load on the output of the decoding result.
[第15実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第15実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第15実施形態では、二度読み防止設定解除条件を変更する点が主に上記第4実施形態と異なる。
[15th Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
The fifteenth embodiment is mainly different from the fourth embodiment in that the double-reading prevention setting cancellation condition is changed.
 従来、同じデコード結果がそれぞれ記録される複数の情報コードを続けて読み取る場合、二度読み防止機能を解除するために、情報コードを撮像視野から外すような解除操作が必要になる。そうすると、エリアセンサのように撮像視野が大きな撮像部を有する読取装置では、その解除操作に要する使用者の動作が大きくなるという問題がある。例えば、コンビニエンスストア等の店舗でのレジ決済において、複数の同一商品購入時にその1つの商品に付されたバーコードを商品購入数に応じて繰り返し読み取る場合では、二度読み防止機能を解除するために、情報コードが撮像されない無地背景等に読取口を向ける操作と商品のバーコードに読取口を向ける操作とを店員が繰り返す必要があり、本来のオペレーションでは期待されていない操作を実施しなければならない課題があった。 Conventionally, when reading a plurality of information codes in which the same decoding result is recorded in succession, a release operation for removing the information code from the imaging field of view is required in order to cancel the double reading prevention function. Then, in a reading device having an imaging unit having a large imaging field of view such as an area sensor, there is a problem that the operation of the user required for the release operation becomes large. For example, in cashier payments at convenience stores and other stores, when the barcode attached to one product is repeatedly read according to the number of products purchased when purchasing multiple identical products, the double-reading prevention function is canceled. In addition, the store clerk needs to repeat the operation of pointing the reading port at a plain background where the information code is not imaged and the operation of pointing the reading port at the barcode of the product, and the operation that is not expected in the original operation must be performed. There was a problem that did not become.
 そこで、本実施形態にてなされる読取処理では、マーカ光が情報コードに向けて照射された状態(以下、コード照射状態ともいう)でその情報コードから読み取られたデコード結果を出力することを前提に、デコード結果が出力された後にコード照射状態でないと判定されると二度読み防止設定を解除する。これにより、デコード結果が出力された情報コードからマーカ光を外す操作によって二度読み防止設定が解除されるので、解除操作に要する使用者の動作を小さくすることができる。 Therefore, in the reading process performed in the present embodiment, it is premised that the decoding result read from the information code is output in a state where the marker light is irradiated toward the information code (hereinafter, also referred to as a code irradiation state). If it is determined that the code is not in the code irradiation state after the decoding result is output, the double reading prevention setting is canceled. As a result, the double-reading prevention setting is canceled by the operation of removing the marker light from the information code in which the decoding result is output, so that the user's operation required for the cancellation operation can be reduced.
 以下、本実施形態において、制御回路40にてなされる読取処理について、図55に示すフローチャートを参照して詳述する。
 所定の操作等に応じて読取処理が開始されると、図55に示すステップS701の撮像処理がなされ、受光センサ28及び結像レンズ27等により構成される撮像部により情報コードをデコードするための撮像画像Pが撮像される。続いて、ステップS703のデコード処理にて、上記撮像画像Pに含まれる情報コードをデコードするための処理がなされ、デコードが成功するまで(S705でNo)、上記ステップS701からの処理が繰り返される。なお、上記ステップS703のデコード処理を実行する制御回路40は、「デコード部」の一例に相当し得る。
Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 55.
When the reading process is started in response to a predetermined operation or the like, the image pickup process of step S701 shown in FIG. 55 is performed, and the information code is decoded by the image pickup unit including the light receiving sensor 28 and the imaging lens 27. The captured image P is captured. Subsequently, in the decoding process of step S703, a process for decoding the information code included in the captured image P is performed, and the process from step S701 is repeated until the decoding is successful (No in S705). The control circuit 40 that executes the decoding process in step S703 can correspond to an example of the “decoding unit”.
 そして、デコードが成功してデコード結果が得られると(S705でYes)、ステップS707の判定処理にて、上記デコード処理にて得られたデコード結果が前回出力されたデコード結果に一致する状態(以下、デコード結果一致状態ともいう)であるか否かについて判定される。ここで、読取処理開始後に初めてデコード成功しているか、前回出力されたデコード結果に一致しない場合には、ステップS707の判定処理にてNoと判定される。なお、上記ステップS707の判定処理を実行する制御回路40は、「デコード結果判定部」の一例に相当し得る。 Then, when the decoding is successful and the decoding result is obtained (Yes in S705), in the determination process of step S707, the decoding result obtained in the above decoding process matches the previously output decoding result (hereinafter, , Also referred to as the decoding result matching state). Here, if the decoding is successful for the first time after the start of the reading process, or if the decoding result does not match the previously output decoding result, the determination process in step S707 determines No. The control circuit 40 that executes the determination process in step S707 may correspond to an example of the “decoding result determination unit”.
 この場合には、ステップS709の判定処理にて、マーカ光Lmが情報コードに向けて照射されたコード照射状態であるか否かについて判定され、撮像画像Pにおいて情報コードが占めるコード領域内にマーカ光Lmの少なくとも一部が入っていることで、コード照射状態であるとしてYesと判定される。そして、ステップS711のデコード結果出力処理がなされて、デコード処理により得られたデコード結果が上位機器等に出力される。なお、上記デコード結果出力処理を実行する制御回路40は、「出力部」の一例に相当し得る。 In this case, in the determination process of step S709, it is determined whether or not the marker light Lm is in the code irradiation state of being irradiated toward the information code, and the marker is within the code region occupied by the information code in the captured image P. Since at least a part of the light Lm is contained, it is determined as Yes in the code irradiation state. Then, the decoding result output processing of step S711 is performed, and the decoding result obtained by the decoding processing is output to a higher-level device or the like. The control circuit 40 that executes the decoding result output process can correspond to an example of the “output unit”.
 このようにデコード結果が出力されると、ステップS713にて二度読み防止設定処理がなされた後、上記ステップS701からの処理がなされる。一方、撮像画像Pにおいて情報コードが占めるコード領域内にマーカ光Lmが入っていない場合には、コード照射状態でないとして(S709でNo)、デコード結果が出力されることなく、上記ステップS701からの処理がなされる。なお、上記二度読み防止設定処理を実行する制御回路40は、「二度読み防止設定部」の一例に相当し得る。 When the decoding result is output in this way, the read prevention setting process is performed twice in step S713, and then the process from step S701 is performed. On the other hand, when the marker light Lm is not included in the code region occupied by the information code in the captured image P, it is assumed that the code is not irradiated (No in S709), and the decoding result is not output, and the above step S701 is performed. Processing is done. The control circuit 40 that executes the double-reading prevention setting process can correspond to an example of the “double-reading prevention setting unit”.
 一方、上記デコード処理にて得られたデコード結果が前回出力されたデコード結果に一致するデコード結果一致状態であると(S707でYes)、ステップS715の判定処理にて、マーカ光Lmが情報コードに向けて照射されたコード照射状態であるか否かについて判定される。ここで、デコード結果を出力した情報コードからマーカ光Lmが外れていない場合には、コード照射状態であるとしてステップS715にてYesと判定される。この場合には、ステップS717の判定処理にて、二度読み防止設定中であるか否かについて判定され、二度読み防止が設定されていることからYesと判定されると、デコード結果が出力されることなく、上記ステップS701からの処理がなされる。なお、上記ステップS715の判定処理を実行する制御回路40は、「マーカ照射状態判定部」の一例に相当し得る。 On the other hand, if the decoding result obtained in the above decoding process is in a decoding result matching state that matches the previously output decoding result (Yes in S707), the marker light Lm is used as the information code in the determination process in step S715. It is determined whether or not the code irradiation state is irradiated toward. Here, if the marker light Lm does not deviate from the information code that outputs the decoding result, it is determined that the code irradiation state is Yes in step S715. In this case, in the determination process of step S717, it is determined whether or not the double-reading prevention is being set, and if it is determined as Yes because the double-reading prevention is set, the decoding result is output. The process from step S701 is performed without being performed. The control circuit 40 that executes the determination process in step S715 may correspond to an example of the “marker irradiation state determination unit”.
 このように、デコード結果が前回出力されたデコード結果に一致するデコード結果一致状態であり、その情報コードに向けてマーカ光Lmが照射されたコード照射状態が継続する間(S707,S715でYes)、二度読み防止が解除されない限り、デコード結果が出力されることはない。 In this way, the decoding result is in the decoding result matching state that matches the previously output decoding result, and while the code irradiation state in which the marker light Lm is irradiated toward the information code continues (Yes in S707 and S715). , The decoding result will not be output unless the read protection is canceled twice.
 これに対して、デコード結果が前回出力されたデコード結果に一致するデコード結果一致状態であっても(S707でYes)、情報コードからマーカ光Lmが外されると(S715でNo)、ステップS719にて二度読み防止設定解除処理がなされて、二度読み防止設定が解除される。このように、二度読み防止設定が解除された後に、上記ステップS701からの処理がなされ、デコード結果が出力された情報コードに再度マーカ光Lmが照射されると(S715でYes)、二度読み防止設定が解除されているため(S717でNo)、そのデコード結果が出力される(S711)。 On the other hand, even if the decoding result is in the decoding result matching state that matches the previously output decoding result (Yes in S707), if the marker light Lm is removed from the information code (No in S715), step S719. The double-reading prevention setting is canceled and the double-reading prevention setting is canceled. In this way, after the double-reading prevention setting is canceled, the processing from step S701 is performed, and when the information code from which the decoding result is output is irradiated with the marker light Lm again (Yes in S715), it is twice. Since the read prevention setting is canceled (No in S717), the decoding result is output (S711).
 このように二度読み防止設定が解除される具体例について、図56(A)~(C)を参照して説明する。なお、読取対象となるQRコードCf,Cgは、隣接するように配置されて同じ情報が記録されているものとする。 A specific example in which the double-reading prevention setting is canceled in this way will be described with reference to FIGS. 56A to 56C. It is assumed that the QR codes Cf and Cg to be read are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other and the same information is recorded.
 図56(A)に示す撮像画像Pに対してデコード処理がなされることで、マーカ光Lmが照射されたQRコードCfのデコード結果が出力されると、二度読み防止設定がなされて(S713)、そのQRコードCfにマーカ光Lmが照射されるコード照射状態が継続する間、QRコードCfのデコード結果が再度出力されることはない。その後、図56(B)に示す撮像画像Pのように、読取口50をQRコードCgに向けるように光学的情報読取装置10を移動させることで、QRコードCfからマーカ光Lmが外れると(S715でNo)、二度読み防止設定が解除される(S719)。そして、図56(C)に示す撮像画像Pのように、マーカ光LmがQRコードCgに照射されてそのデコードが成功すると、デコード結果一致状態であっても(S707でYes)、二度読み防止設定が解除されているため(S717でNo)、そのデコード結果が出力される(S711)。 When the decoding process is performed on the captured image P shown in FIG. 56 (A) and the decoding result of the QR code Cf irradiated with the marker light Lm is output, the double-reading prevention setting is made (S713). ), The decoding result of the QR code Cf is not output again while the code irradiation state in which the marker light Lm is irradiated to the QR code Cf continues. After that, as shown in the captured image P shown in FIG. 56 (B), by moving the optical information reading device 10 so that the reading port 50 points toward the QR code Cg, the marker light Lm deviates from the QR code Cf ( No) in S715, the double-reading prevention setting is canceled (S719). Then, as shown in the captured image P shown in FIG. 56 (C), when the QR code Cg is irradiated with the marker light Lm and the decoding is successful, even if the decoding results are in the matching state (Yes in S707), the QR code is read twice. Since the prevention setting is canceled (No in S717), the decoding result is output (S711).
 以上説明したように、本実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置10では、デコード結果が出力された後にコード照射状態でないと判定されると(S715でNo)、二度読み防止設定が解除される(S719)。そして、二度読み防止設定が行われていると(S717でYes)、デコード結果一致状態であると判定されたデコード結果が出力対象外とされ、二度読み防止設定が解除されると(S717でNo)、デコード結果一致状態であると判定されたデコード結果であっても出力対象とされる(S711)。 As described above, in the optical information reading device 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the code irradiation state is not obtained after the decoding result is output (No in S715), the double reading prevention setting is canceled. (S719). Then, when the double-reading prevention setting is set (Yes in S717), the decoding result determined to be in the decoding result matching state is excluded from the output target, and when the double-reading prevention setting is canceled (S717). No), even if the decoding result is determined to be in the decoding result matching state, it is output as an output target (S711).
 このように、デコード結果が出力された後にコード照射状態でないと判定されると二度読み防止設定を解除することで、デコード結果が出力された情報コードからマーカ光Lmを外す操作によって二度読み防止設定が解除されるので、解除操作に要する使用者の動作を小さくすることができる。 In this way, if it is determined that the code is not in the code irradiation state after the decoding result is output, the double reading prevention setting is canceled, and the marker light Lm is read twice by removing the marker light Lm from the information code in which the decoding result is output. Since the prevention setting is canceled, the user's operation required for the release operation can be reduced.
[第16実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第16実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第16実施形態では、二度読み防止設定解除条件を不要に解除されなくするように変更する点が主に上記第15実施形態と異なる。
[16th Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the 16th embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
The 16th embodiment is mainly different from the 15th embodiment in that the double-reading prevention setting cancellation condition is changed so as not to be canceled unnecessarily.
 上記第15実施形態のように、デコード結果が出力された情報コードからマーカ光Lmが外れただけで二度読み防止設定を解除すると、手振れ等によってマーカ光Lmが一度外れた情報コードに再度照射されたために、使用者が意図しない二度読みが生じてしまう場合がある。 As in the fifteenth embodiment, if the marker light Lm is removed from the information code for which the decoding result is output and the read prevention setting is canceled twice, the information code for which the marker light Lm is once removed due to camera shake or the like is irradiated again. As a result, double reading may occur unintentionally by the user.
 そこで、本実施形態では、情報コードを構成するコード領域が含まれるコード周辺領域Acを基準として、このコード周辺領域Acに向けてマーカ光Lmが照射されている状態でない場合に、二度読み防止設定を解除することで、不要な二度読み防止設定の解除を抑制する。 Therefore, in the present embodiment, the marker light Lm is not irradiated toward the code peripheral area Ac with reference to the code peripheral area Ac including the code area constituting the information code, and the double reading is prevented. By canceling the setting, it is possible to suppress the cancellation of unnecessary double-reading prevention settings.
 以下、本実施形態において、制御回路40にてなされる読取処理について、図57に示すフローチャートを参照して詳述する。なお、本実施形態では、コード周辺領域Acは、その外縁が、情報コードを構成するコード領域の外縁から予め設定されたセル数分に相当する距離(以下、周辺距離Adともいう)だけ離れるようにして設定されているが、これに限らず、例えば、コード領域の外縁から予め設定された画素分に相当する距離だけ離れるようにして設定されてもよい。 Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 57. In the present embodiment, the outer edge of the code peripheral area Ac is separated from the outer edge of the code area constituting the information code by a distance corresponding to a preset number of cells (hereinafter, also referred to as a peripheral distance Ad). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be set so as to be separated from the outer edge of the code area by a distance corresponding to a preset pixel amount.
 上記第15実施形態と同様にして読取処理が開始されて、デコードが成功し(図57のS705でYes)、デコード処理にて得られたデコード結果が前回出力されたデコード結果に一致するデコード結果一致状態であると(S707でYes)、ステップS715aの判定処理にて、マーカ光Lmがコード周辺領域Acに向けて照射された状態(以下、コード周辺照射状態ともいう)であるか否かについて判定される。 The reading process is started in the same manner as in the fifteenth embodiment, the decoding is successful (Yes in S705 of FIG. 57), and the decoding result obtained by the decoding process matches the previously output decoding result. If it is in the matching state (Yes in S707), whether or not the marker light Lm is irradiated toward the cord peripheral region Ac in the determination process in step S715a (hereinafter, also referred to as the cord peripheral irradiation state). It is judged.
 ここで、デコード結果を出力した情報コードについて設定されるコード周辺領域Acからマーカ光Lmの少なくとも一部が外れていない場合には、コード周辺照射状態であるとしてステップS715aにてYesと判定されて、上記ステップS717以降の処理がなされる。 Here, if at least a part of the marker light Lm is not deviated from the code peripheral region Ac set for the information code that outputs the decoding result, it is determined that the code peripheral irradiation state is Yes in step S715a. , The processing after step S717 is performed.
 一方、デコード結果を出力した情報コードについて設定されるコード周辺領域Acからマーカ光Lmが外れていると、コード周辺照射状態でないとしてステップS715aにてNoと判定されて、二度読み防止設定が解除される(S719)。 On the other hand, if the marker light Lm deviates from the code peripheral region Ac set for the information code that outputs the decoding result, it is determined as No in step S715a as not in the code peripheral irradiation state, and the double reading prevention setting is canceled. (S719).
 このように二度読み防止設定が解除される具体例について、図58(A)~(C)を参照して説明する。
 図58(A)に示す撮像画像Pのように、マーカ光Lmが照射されたQRコードCfのデコード結果が出力されると、二度読み防止設定がなされて(S713)、そのQRコードCfにマーカ光Lmが照射されるコード照射状態が継続する間、QRコードCfのデコード結果が再度出力されることはない。その際、図58(B)に示す撮像画像Pのように、手振れ等によってマーカ光LmがQRコードCfから外れてもコード周辺領域Acに少なくとも一部が入っている場合には、コード周辺照射状態であるとして(S715aでYes)、二度読み防止設定が解除されることはない。そして、図58(C)に示す撮像画像Pのように、マーカ光Lmがコード周辺領域Acから外れることで、コード周辺照射状態でないとして(S715aでNo)、二度読み防止設定が解除される(S719)。
A specific example in which the double-reading prevention setting is canceled in this way will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (C).
When the decoding result of the QR code Cf irradiated with the marker light Lm is output as in the captured image P shown in FIG. 58 (A), the double reading prevention setting is made (S713), and the QR code Cf is set. The decoding result of the QR code Cf is not output again while the code irradiation state in which the marker light Lm is irradiated continues. At that time, as shown in the captured image P shown in FIG. 58 (B), even if the marker light Lm deviates from the QR code Cf due to camera shake or the like, if at least a part is contained in the code peripheral region Ac, the cord peripheral irradiation is performed. Even if it is in the state (Yes in S715a), the double-reading prevention setting is not canceled. Then, as shown in the captured image P shown in FIG. 58 (C), when the marker light Lm deviates from the cord peripheral region Ac, it is assumed that the cord peripheral irradiation state is not obtained (No in S715a), and the double reading prevention setting is released. (S719).
 以上説明したように、本実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置10では、デコード結果が出力された後に、その情報コードを構成するコード領域を含めたコード周辺領域Acに向けてマーカ光Lmが照射されている状態でないと判定されると(S715aでNo)、二度読み防止設定が解除される(S719)。 As described above, in the optical information reading device 10 according to the present embodiment, after the decoding result is output, the marker light Lm irradiates the code peripheral region Ac including the code region constituting the information code. When it is determined that the state is not set (No in S715a), the double-reading prevention setting is canceled (S719).
 これにより、手振れ等に起因して誤って二度読み防止設定が解除されることを抑制でき、手振れ等に対するロバスト性を高めることができる。 As a result, it is possible to prevent the double-reading prevention setting from being accidentally canceled due to camera shake or the like, and it is possible to enhance the robustness against camera shake or the like.
 なお、本実施形態の変形例として、コード周辺領域Acは、撮像画像Pに占める情報コードの大きさに応じて、情報コードに対する大きさが変化するように設定されてもよい。 As a modification of the present embodiment, the code peripheral region Ac may be set so that the size of the information code changes according to the size of the information code occupying the captured image P.
 撮像画像に占める情報コード及びコード周辺領域Acの大きさが大きくなると、そのコード周辺領域Acからマーカ光Lmを外す操作に要する使用者の動作が大きくなってしまう場合がある。このため、例えば、情報コードが比較的大きく撮像される場合には、上記コード周辺領域Acの大きさを比較的小さく設定する等、撮像画像Pに占める情報コードの大きさに応じてコード周辺領域Acの大きさを変化させることで、解除操作に要する使用者の動作が大きくなることを抑制することができる。 If the size of the information code and the code peripheral area Ac occupying the captured image becomes large, the user's operation required for the operation of removing the marker light Lm from the code peripheral area Ac may become large. Therefore, for example, when the information code is imaged in a relatively large size, the size of the code peripheral area Ac is set to be relatively small, and the code peripheral area is set according to the size of the information code in the captured image P. By changing the size of the Ac, it is possible to prevent the user's movement required for the release operation from becoming large.
 例えば、図59(A)に例示する撮像画像Pのように、撮像画像Pに占める情報コードの大きさが大きくなる場合には、周辺距離Adを短くするようにして情報コードに対するコード周辺領域Acを小さくすることができる。また、例えば、図59(B)に例示する撮像画像Pのように、撮像画像Pに占める情報コードの大きさが小さくなる場合には、周辺距離Adを長くするようにして情報コードに対するコード周辺領域Acを大きくすることができる。 For example, as in the captured image P illustrated in FIG. 59 (A), when the size of the information code occupying the captured image P becomes large, the peripheral distance Ad is shortened so that the code peripheral region Ac with respect to the information code Can be made smaller. Further, for example, when the size of the information code occupying the captured image P becomes small as in the captured image P illustrated in FIG. 59 (B), the peripheral distance Ad is lengthened to be around the code with respect to the information code. The region Ac can be increased.
 より具体的には、例えば、デコードが成功するごとに、そのデコードに成功した情報コードを構成するコード領域が撮像画像Pに占める割合(以下、コード割合Apともいう)を求めて、図60に例示するように予め設定されるテーブルを参照して、求めたコード割合Apに応じた周辺距離Adとなるようにコード周辺領域Acを設定することができる。
図60の例では、コード割合Apが7%であれば、周辺距離Adが「15」セル数となるようにコード周辺領域Acが設定され、コード割合Apが18%であれば、周辺距離Adが「5」セル数となるようにコード周辺領域Acが設定される。
More specifically, for example, every time the decoding is successful, the ratio of the code region constituting the successfully decoded information code to the captured image P (hereinafter, also referred to as the code ratio Ap) is obtained, and FIG. By referring to the preset table as illustrated, the code peripheral area Ac can be set so that the peripheral distance Ad corresponds to the obtained code ratio Ap.
In the example of FIG. 60, if the code ratio Ap is 7%, the code peripheral area Ac is set so that the peripheral distance Ad is the number of “15” cells, and if the code ratio Ap is 18%, the peripheral distance Ad is set. The code peripheral area Ac is set so that the number of cells is "5".
[第17実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第17実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第17実施形態では、一部画像での画像変化の有無に応じてデコード処理の要否を判
断する点が主に上記第1実施形態と異なる。
[17th Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the 17th embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
The 17th embodiment is mainly different from the 1st embodiment in that the necessity of decoding processing is determined according to the presence or absence of an image change in a part of the image.
 従来、二度読み防止のため、撮像画像に対するデコード処理に応じてデコード結果が得られると、そのデコード結果と前回出力されたデコード結果とを比較する処理がなされていた。このようにデコード結果が得られるごとにデコード結果の比較を行うような処理では、読取口を速く移動させていると、情報コードの読みこぼしが生じる場合がある。特に、エリアセンサのように撮像視野が大きな撮像部を有する読取装置では、図61に例示するように、撮像画像にデコード可能な情報コードが含まれているか確認等するための画像解析処理に要する処理時間が長くなり、デコード処理まで行うために読み取りサイクルが長くなる結果、上記問題がより一層顕著になる。 Conventionally, in order to prevent double reading, when a decoding result is obtained according to the decoding process for the captured image, a process of comparing the decoded result with the previously output decoded result has been performed. In the process of comparing the decoding results each time the decoding results are obtained in this way, if the reading port is moved quickly, the information code may be missed. In particular, in a reading device having an imaging unit having a large imaging field of view such as an area sensor, as illustrated in FIG. 61, it is necessary for an image analysis process for confirming whether the captured image contains a decodeable information code. As a result of the long processing time and the long reading cycle due to the decoding processing, the above problem becomes even more remarkable.
 なお、図61では、2回目の撮像(図61の時刻t11)での撮像画像にデコード可能な情報コードが含まれており、デコード結果出力後の3回目の撮像(図61の時刻t12)での撮像画像から同じデコード結果が得られたためにそのデコード結果が出力されず、4回目の撮像(図61の時刻t13)での撮像画像から異なるデコード結果が得られて出力される例を図示している。 In FIG. 61, the image captured in the second imaging (time t11 in FIG. 61) includes a decodeable information code, and in the third imaging (time t12 in FIG. 61) after the decoding result is output. Since the same decoding result was obtained from the captured image of, the decoding result is not output, and a different decoding result is obtained and output from the captured image at the fourth imaging (time t13 in FIG. 61). ing.
 そこで、本実施形態にてなされる読取処理では、デコード結果が出力された後、撮像部による撮像画像Pの一部(予め設定された所定の範囲)に相当する一部画像Pbについて画像が変化していないとみなされる状態(以下、一部画像一致状態ともいう)であるか否かについて判定し、一部画像一致状態である場合には、デコード処理を行わないようにする。一部画像一致状態である場合、すなわち、画像がほぼ変化していないことから、デコード結果を得た情報コードから読取口50を外すような光学的情報読取装置10の移動が想定されないような場合には、上記画像解析処理やデコード処理を行わないことで、読み取りサイクルが短縮されるので、情報コードの読みこぼしを抑制することができる。 Therefore, in the scanning process performed in the present embodiment, after the decoding result is output, the image changes for a part of the image Pb corresponding to a part of the image P captured by the imaging unit (a predetermined range set in advance). It is determined whether or not it is in a state deemed not to be performed (hereinafter, also referred to as a partial image matching state), and if it is in a partial image matching state, the decoding process is not performed. When the image is partially matched, that is, when the image is almost unchanged and the optical information reading device 10 is not expected to move so as to remove the reading port 50 from the information code obtained from the decoding result. By not performing the image analysis process or the decoding process, the reading cycle is shortened, so that it is possible to suppress the omission of the information code.
 具体的には、本実施形態では、今回撮像処理にて取り込まれた一部画像Pbと、前回の撮像処理にて取り込まれた一部画像Pbとに関して、明色系が占める範囲と暗色系が占める範囲との比率をそれぞれ算出して比較し、それぞれの算出値の差が所定値以内となる場合に、一部画像一致状態であると判定する。なお、一部画像一致状態に関する判定では、明色系が占める範囲と暗色系が占める範囲との比率に基づいて判定することに限らず、他の画像的特徴点に基づいて判定してもよい。 Specifically, in the present embodiment, the range occupied by the light color system and the dark color system are defined with respect to the partial image Pb captured in the imaging process this time and the partial image Pb captured in the previous imaging process. The ratios to the occupied range are calculated and compared, and when the difference between the calculated values is within a predetermined value, it is determined that the image is partially matched. The determination regarding the partial image matching state is not limited to the determination based on the ratio between the range occupied by the light color system and the range occupied by the dark color system, and may be determined based on other image feature points. ..
 特に、本実施形態では、一部画像Pbは、撮像画像Pに占める範囲が、当該撮像画像Pの中央部分に相当するように設定されている。このため、図62(A)に例示する撮像画像PのようにQRコードCfが撮像される場合、一部画像Pbは、例えば、図62(B)に示すように設定される。 In particular, in the present embodiment, a part of the image Pb is set so that the range occupied by the captured image P corresponds to the central portion of the captured image P. Therefore, when the QR code Cf is imaged as in the captured image P illustrated in FIG. 62 (A), the partial image Pb is set as shown in FIG. 62 (B), for example.
 以下、本実施形態において、制御回路40にてなされる読取処理について、図63に示すフローチャートを参照して詳述する。
 所定の操作等に応じて読取処理が開始されると、図63に示すステップS801の一部画像撮像処理がなされ、受光センサ28及び結像レンズ27等により構成される撮像部により、上述のように設定された範囲での取り込みに応じて一部画像Pbが撮像される。
Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the reading process performed by the control circuit 40 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
When the reading process is started in response to a predetermined operation or the like, the partial image imaging process of step S801 shown in FIG. 63 is performed, and the imaging unit including the light receiving sensor 28, the imaging lens 27, etc., as described above. A part of the image Pb is imaged according to the capture in the range set to.
 続いて、ステップS803に示す一部画像解析処理にて、撮像された一部画像Pbが解析されると、ステップS805の判定処理にて、一部画像Pbが前回の一部画像Pbから変化していないとみなされる一部画像一致状態であるか否かについて判定される。なお、上記ステップS805の判定処理を実行する制御回路40は、「画像状態判定部」の一例に相当し得る。 Subsequently, when the captured partial image Pb is analyzed by the partial image analysis process shown in step S803, the partial image Pb changes from the previous partial image Pb in the determination process of step S805. It is determined whether or not there is a partial image matching state that is considered not to be present. The control circuit 40 that executes the determination process in step S805 can correspond to an example of the “image state determination unit”.
 ここで、最初の撮像であり、デコード結果が出力されていない状態では、一部画像一致状態でないとしてステップS805にてNoと判定されて、二度読み防止設定が解除されると(S807)、ステップS809の全画像撮像処理がなされて、撮像画像Pが撮像される。続いて、ステップS811の全画像解析処理がなされ、撮像画像Pにデコード可能な情報コードが含まれているか確認等される。 Here, in the state where the decoding result is not output in the first imaging, it is determined that No in step S805 because it is not in the partial image matching state, and the double reading prevention setting is canceled (S807). The whole image imaging process of step S809 is performed, and the captured image P is captured. Subsequently, the entire image analysis process of step S811 is performed, and it is confirmed whether or not the captured image P includes a decodable information code.
 そして、撮像画像Pにデコード可能な情報コードが含まれていない場合には、情報コードを撮像していないとしてステップS813の判定処理にてNoと判定されて、上記ステップS801からの処理がなされる。一方、撮像画像Pにデコード可能な情報コードが含まれている場合には、情報コードを撮像しているとしてステップS813の判定処理にてYesと判定されて、ステップS815のデコード処理にて、上記撮像画像Pに含まれる情報コードをデコードするための処理がなされる。なお、上記ステップS815のデコード処理を実行する制御回路40は、「デコード部」の一例に相当し得る。 If the captured image P does not include a decodable information code, it is determined that the information code has not been imaged and the determination process in step S813 determines No, and the process from step S801 is performed. .. On the other hand, when the captured image P includes an information code that can be decoded, it is determined that the image code is being imaged and the determination process in step S813 is Yes, and the decoding process in step S815 describes the above. A process for decoding the information code included in the captured image P is performed. The control circuit 40 that executes the decoding process in step S815 can correspond to an example of the “decoding unit”.
 続いて、ステップS817の判定処理にて、上記デコード処理により得られたデコード結果が前回出力されたデコード結果と一致するデコード結果一致状態であるか否かについて判定される。ここで、読取処理を開始してから最初にデコード結果が得られているか前回と異なるデコード結果が得られている場合には、デコード結果一致状態でないとして(S817でNo)、ステップS819のデコード結果出力処理がなされて、デコード処理により得られたデコード結果が上位機器等に出力される。なお、上記デコード結果出力処理を実行する制御回路40は、「出力部」の一例に相当し得る。 Subsequently, in the determination process of step S817, it is determined whether or not the decoding result obtained by the above decoding process is in a decoding result matching state that matches the previously output decoding result. Here, if the decoding result is first obtained after the reading process is started or a decoding result different from the previous one is obtained, it is assumed that the decoding result does not match (No in S817), and the decoding result in step S819. The output process is performed, and the decoding result obtained by the decoding process is output to a higher-level device or the like. The control circuit 40 that executes the decoding result output process can correspond to an example of the “output unit”.
 このようにデコード結果が出力されると、ステップS821にて二度読み防止設定処理がなされた後、読み取り終了操作等がなされていない場合には(S823でNo)、上記ステップS801からの処理がなされる。 When the decoding result is output in this way, after the read prevention setting process is performed twice in step S821, if the read end operation or the like is not performed (No in S823), the process from step S801 is performed. Be done.
 そして、デコード結果が出力された直後では、デコード結果が出力された情報コードに読取口50が向けられた状態が維持されているので、撮像された一部画像Pbが前回の一部画像Pbから変化していないとみなされる一部画像一致状態であるとしてステップS805の判定処理にてYesと判定される。この場合には、二度読み防止設定が解除されることなく、上記ステップS801からの処理がなされる。すなわち、一部画像Pbの画像変化が小さい場合には、デコード結果が出力された情報コードに読取口50が向けられたままであるとして、ステップS805にてYesとの判定が繰り返されて、デコード処理が行われなくなる。このように、撮像画像Pの全体の画像解析処理が行われることなく一部画像Pbの画像解析処理が継続されることで、読み取りサイクルが短縮される。 Immediately after the decoding result is output, the state in which the reading port 50 is directed to the information code from which the decoding result is output is maintained, so that the captured partial image Pb is from the previous partial image Pb. It is determined as Yes in the determination process of step S805 on the assumption that the partial image matching state is considered to have not changed. In this case, the process from step S801 is performed without canceling the double-reading prevention setting. That is, when the image change of a part of the image Pb is small, it is assumed that the reading port 50 is still directed to the information code to which the decoding result is output, and the determination of Yes is repeated in step S805, and the decoding process is performed. Will not be done. As described above, the reading cycle is shortened by continuing the image analysis processing of a part of the image Pb without performing the image analysis processing of the entire captured image P.
 その後、次の情報コードに読取口50を向けようとしたことから、撮像された一部画像Pbが前回の一部画像Pbから変化しているとみなされる結果が得られると、ステップS805にてNoと判定されて、二度読み防止設定が解除された後(S807)、ステップS809の全画像撮像処理がなされる。 After that, since the reading port 50 was directed to the next information code, when the result that the captured partial image Pb was considered to be changed from the previous partial image Pb was obtained, in step S805, After the determination is No and the double-reading prevention setting is canceled (S807), the entire image imaging process in step S809 is performed.
 以下、図64に示すタイムチャートを参照して、読み取りサイクルが短縮される具体例を説明する。
 図61と同様に、2回目の撮像(図64の時刻t21)での撮像画像にデコード可能な情報コードが含まれており、デコード結果出力後に3回目の撮像がなされると(図64の時刻t22)、その一部画像Pbについて一部画像一致状態であるか否かについて判定される。そして、一部画像一致状態であると判定されたために(S805でYes)、4回目の撮像がなされ(図64の時刻t23)、その一部画像Pbでも一部画像一致状態であると判定されると(S805でYes)、5回目の撮像がなされる(図64の時刻t24)。この一部画像Pbにて一部画像一致状態でないと判定されると(S805でNo)、6回目で撮像画像Pが撮像されて(S809:図64の時刻t25)、その撮像画像Pの全体を解析対象とするように全画像解析処理がなされる(S811)。このように、3回目の撮像から5回目の撮像まで、一部画像Pbについて画像解析が行われて全画像解析処理が行われないことで、図61の例と比較して、読み取りサイクルを短縮することができる。
Hereinafter, a specific example in which the reading cycle is shortened will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG.
Similar to FIG. 61, the image captured in the second imaging (time t21 in FIG. 64) contains a decodeable information code, and when the third imaging is performed after the decoding result is output (time in FIG. 64). t22), it is determined whether or not the partial image Pb is in a partial image matching state. Then, since it was determined that the partial image was in the matching state (Yes in S805), the fourth imaging was performed (time t23 in FIG. 64), and the partial image Pb was also determined to be in the partial image matching state. Then (Yes in S805), the fifth image is taken (time t24 in FIG. 64). When it is determined in the partial image Pb that the partial image does not match (No in S805), the captured image P is captured at the sixth time (S809: time t25 in FIG. 64), and the entire captured image P is captured. The whole image analysis process is performed so as to analyze the above (S811). In this way, from the third imaging to the fifth imaging, image analysis is performed on some image Pb and not all image analysis processing is performed, so that the reading cycle is shortened as compared with the example of FIG. can do.
 以上説明したように、本実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置10では、デコード結果が出力されると、撮像部による撮像画像Pの一部に相当する一部画像Pbについて画像が変化していないとみなされる一部画像一致状態であると判定されるまで全画像解析処理やデコード処理が行われない。 As described above, in the optical information reading device 10 according to the present embodiment, when the decoding result is output, the image of the partial image Pb corresponding to a part of the captured image P by the imaging unit is not changed. All image analysis processing and decoding processing are not performed until it is determined that a partial image matching state is considered.
 このため、デコード結果が出力されると、一部画像Pbが変化しているとみなされるような状態にならない限り、撮像画像全体の画像解析処理やデコード処理がなされることもないので、二度読み防止のために撮像ごとにデコード結果を比較する処理を行う必要もない。これにより、二度読み防止等のための処理負荷の軽減が図られるだけでなく処理時間の短縮が図られるため、読み取りサイクルを短縮することができる。 Therefore, when the decoding result is output, the image analysis processing and the decoding processing of the entire captured image are not performed unless a state in which a part of the image Pb is considered to be changed is not performed. It is not necessary to perform a process of comparing the decoding results for each image capture to prevent reading. As a result, not only the processing load for preventing double reading can be reduced, but also the processing time can be shortened, so that the reading cycle can be shortened.
 なお、一部画像Pbは、撮像画像Pに占める範囲が、当該撮像画像Pの中央部分に設定されることに限らず、当該撮像画像Pの他の範囲に設定されてもよい。また、一部画像Pbは、図65に例示するように、撮像画像Pに占める範囲が、当該撮像画像Pでのマーカ光Lmの位置を基準に設定されてもよい。 Note that the range occupied by the captured image P is not limited to the central portion of the captured image P, and the partial image Pb may be set to another range of the captured image P. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 65, the range occupied by the captured image P of the partial image Pb may be set based on the position of the marker light Lm on the captured image P.
 また、一部画像Pbは、撮像画像Pに占める範囲が、前回デコードに成功した情報コードを基準に設定されてもよい。例えば、前回デコードに成功した情報コードのコード領域に一致するように一部画像Pbが設定されてもよい。これにより、前回デコードに成功した情報コードの位置を基準に撮像画像Pに占める一部画像Pbの範囲を設定することで、情報コードを構成する各セルの明暗等を基準に上記一部画像Pbが変化しているか判定できるので、判定精度を高めることができる。 Further, the range occupied by the captured image P of some images Pb may be set based on the information code that was successfully decoded last time. For example, a part of the image Pb may be set so as to match the code area of the information code that was successfully decoded last time. As a result, by setting the range of the partial image Pb occupying the captured image P based on the position of the information code that was successfully decoded last time, the partial image Pb described above is based on the brightness and darkness of each cell constituting the information code. Since it can be determined whether or not is changed, the determination accuracy can be improved.
[第18実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第18実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置について、以下に説明する。
 本第18実施形態では、読取口を構成する縁部の保護構造に関して組み付け性を向上させる点が主に上記第4実施形態と異なる。
[18th Embodiment]
Next, the optical information reading device according to the 18th embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
The 18th embodiment is mainly different from the 4th embodiment in that the assembling property is improved with respect to the protective structure of the edge portion constituting the reading port.
 従来、携帯型の光学的情報読取装置では、落下等に対する保護や読み取るべき情報コードが表示される表示画面の保護等を目的に、読取口を構成する縁部にゴム等の保護部材が組み付けられる。この保護部材は、通常、縁部に組み付けた後に簡単に外れないようにするため、縁部に設けた係合部位等にて引っ掛けるようにして組み付けられる。その一方で、上述のように係合部位を利用して組み付ける構成では、大型化を招くことなく強固な組み付けを実現することが困難であるため、小型化や強固な組み付けが求められる場合には、両面テープのような接着部材を用いることで保護部材が縁部に組み付けられる。 Conventionally, in a portable optical information reading device, a protective member such as rubber is attached to the edge portion constituting the reading port for the purpose of protecting against dropping or the like and protecting the display screen on which the information code to be read is displayed. .. This protective member is usually assembled by hooking it at an engaging portion or the like provided on the edge portion in order to prevent it from being easily disengaged after being assembled on the edge portion. On the other hand, in the configuration using the engaging portion as described above, it is difficult to realize a strong assembly without inviting an increase in size. Therefore, when miniaturization or a strong assembly is required, , The protective member is attached to the edge by using an adhesive member such as double-sided tape.
 しかしながら、保護部材を縁部に押し込むようにして接着する組付作業が必要となる保護構造では、組み付け途中で被接着部と異なる部位が両面テープ等と接着されないようにする必要があり、組付作業が煩雑になるという問題がある。 However, in a protective structure that requires an assembly work in which the protective member is pushed into the edge portion to be bonded, it is necessary to prevent a part different from the bonded portion from being adhered to the double-sided tape or the like during assembly. There is a problem that the work becomes complicated.
 そこで、本実施形態に係る光学的情報読取装置では、縁部の接着部が配置される部位よりも先端側を突出させて、この突出部を乗り越えた保護部材の被接着部が縁部の接着部に接着する保護構造を採用する。 Therefore, in the optical information reading device according to the present embodiment, the tip side is projected from the portion where the adhesive portion of the edge portion is arranged, and the bonded portion of the protective member that overcomes the protruding portion adheres to the edge portion. Adopt a protective structure that adheres to the part.
 具体的には、図66に示す光学的情報読取装置200のように、読取口250を構成する縁部251には、外側及び内側の双方から弾性的に挟持するようにして保護する保護部材260が組み付けられる。なお、図66では、保護部材260が組み付けられる縁部251の近傍(図66の一点鎖線の枠内参照)を、拡大した断面にて図示している。 Specifically, like the optical information reading device 200 shown in FIG. 66, the protective member 260 that elastically sandwiches and protects the edge portion 251 constituting the reading port 250 from both the outside and the inside. Is assembled. In FIG. 66, the vicinity of the edge portion 251 to which the protective member 260 is assembled (see the inside of the frame of the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 66) is shown in an enlarged cross section.
 保護部材260は、縁部251の外側を覆う外側保護部270と、縁部251の内側を覆う内側保護部280と、外側保護部270と内側保護部280とを弾性的に連結する連結部290と、を有するように構成される。 The protective member 260 is a connecting portion 290 that elastically connects the outer protective portion 270 that covers the outer side of the edge portion 251 and the inner protective portion 280 that covers the inner side of the edge portion 251 and the outer protective portion 270 and the inner protective portion 280. And are configured to have.
 また、縁部251の外側には、外側保護部270が接着される接着部252と接着部252よりも先端側に位置して当該接着部252よりも外側に突出する突出部253とが設けられる。突出部253は、接着部252に近づくほど外側への突出高さが高くなるように形成されている。また、突出部253は、接着部252側の端面253aが、保護部材260を縁部251に組み付ける組付方向(後述する図67(A)の矢印α参照)に対して垂直に近くなるように形成されている。本実施形態では、接着部252として両面テープが採用されており、突出部253の端面253a近傍に設けられる溝部に配置されている。なお、接着部252として、両面テープが採用されることに限らず、例えば、接着剤等が採用されてもよい。 Further, on the outside of the edge portion 251, an adhesive portion 252 to which the outer protective portion 270 is adhered and a protruding portion 253 located on the tip side of the adhesive portion 252 and projecting outward from the adhesive portion 252 are provided. .. The protruding portion 253 is formed so that the protruding height to the outside increases as it approaches the adhesive portion 252. Further, the protruding portion 253 is arranged so that the end surface 253a on the adhesive portion 252 side is close to perpendicular to the assembling direction (see arrow α in FIG. 67 (A) described later) for assembling the protective member 260 to the edge portion 251. It is formed. In the present embodiment, the double-sided tape is adopted as the adhesive portion 252, and is arranged in the groove portion provided in the vicinity of the end surface 253a of the protruding portion 253. The double-sided tape is not limited to the adhesive portion 252, and for example, an adhesive or the like may be adopted.
 そして、外側保護部270は、接着部252に接着される被接着部271と、この被接着部271と接着部252との接着時に突出部253に僅かな隙間を介して対向する薄肉状の対向部272と、を有するように形成される。 Then, the outer protective portion 270 is a thin-walled facing portion that faces the bonded portion 271 that is adhered to the bonded portion 252 and the protruding portion 253 at the time of bonding between the bonded portion 271 and the bonded portion 252 with a slight gap. It is formed to have a portion 272 and.
 このように構成される縁部251に対する保護部材260の組み付けについて、図67(A)~(C)を参照して詳述する。
 保護部材260を縁部251に組み付ける場合には、まず、図67(A)に示すように、被接着部271と突出部253とが接触するように、外側保護部270と内側保護部280との間に縁部251を挿入する。このように縁部251が挿入された保護部材260を、図67(A)の組付方向αに沿うように押し込むことで、被接着部271が接着部252に接着されることなく突出部253と摺接する状態が維持される。
The assembly of the protective member 260 to the edge portion 251 configured in this way will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 67A to 67C.
When assembling the protective member 260 to the edge portion 251 first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the outer protective portion 270 and the inner protective portion 280 are combined so that the bonded portion 271 and the protruding portion 253 come into contact with each other. The edge 251 is inserted between the two. By pushing the protective member 260 into which the edge portion 251 is inserted in this way along the assembly direction α in FIG. 67 (A), the bonded portion 271 is not adhered to the bonded portion 252 and the protruding portion 253. The state of sliding contact with is maintained.
 そして、保護部材260をさらに押し込むことで、図67(B)に示すように、被接着部271が突出部253を乗り越えると、連結部290による弾性力等に応じて外側保護部270が内側保護部280に近づこうとするため、被接着部271が接着部252に接着される(図67(C)参照)。 Then, by further pushing the protective member 260, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), when the bonded portion 271 gets over the protruding portion 253, the outer protective portion 270 is protected inside according to the elastic force of the connecting portion 290 and the like. The bonded portion 271 is adhered to the bonded portion 252 in order to approach the portion 280 (see FIG. 67 (C)).
 このように、被接着部271は、突出部253を乗り越えるまでは接着部252に接着されないため、保護部材260を縁部251に押し込むようにして接着する組付作業であっても、押し込む途中で接着されてしまうこともないので、容易に組付作業を実施することができる。 In this way, the bonded portion 271 is not adhered to the bonded portion 252 until it gets over the protruding portion 253. Since it is not adhered, the assembly work can be easily carried out.
 特に、突出部253は、接着部252に近づくほど外側への突出高さが高くなるように形成されるので、被接着部271が突出部253を乗り越えやすくなり、組付作業の更なる容易化を図ることができる。 In particular, since the protruding portion 253 is formed so that the protruding height becomes higher as it approaches the bonded portion 252, the bonded portion 271 can easily get over the protruding portion 253, further facilitating the assembling work. Can be planned.
 さらに、突出部253は、接着部252側の端面253aが、保護部材260を縁部251に組み付ける組付方向α(図67(A)参照)に対して垂直に近くなるように形成される。これにより、保護部材260が接着された縁部251から外れようとしても、被接着部271が突出部253の端面253aに当たって外れ難くなるので、保護部材260を縁部251に対して強固に組み付けることができる。 Further, the protruding portion 253 is formed so that the end surface 253a on the adhesive portion 252 side is close to perpendicular to the assembling direction α (see FIG. 67 (A)) for assembling the protective member 260 to the edge portion 251. As a result, even if the protective member 260 tries to come off from the bonded edge portion 251 but the bonded portion 271 hits the end surface 253a of the protruding portion 253 and is difficult to come off, the protective member 260 should be firmly assembled to the edge portion 251. Can be done.
 本実施形態の変形例として、図68に例示する保護部材260a及び縁部251aのように、接着箇所をさらに内側保護部280aにも設けてもよい。具体的には、縁部251aの内側には、内側保護部280aが接着される第2接着部254とこの第2接着部254よりも先端側に位置して当該第2接着部254よりも内側に突出する第2突出部255とが設けられ、内側保護部280aは、第2接着部254に接着される第2被接着部281と、この第2被接着部281と第2接着部254との接着時に第2突出部255に僅かな隙間を介して対向する薄肉状の第2対向部282と、を有するように形成される。 As a modification of the present embodiment, an adhesive portion may be further provided on the inner protective portion 280a as in the protective member 260a and the edge portion 251a illustrated in FIG. 68. Specifically, inside the edge portion 251a, the second adhesive portion 254 to which the inner protective portion 280a is adhered and the tip side of the second adhesive portion 254 are located inside the second adhesive portion 254. A second protruding portion 255 is provided, and the inner protective portion 280a includes a second bonded portion 281 bonded to the second bonded portion 254, and the second bonded portion 281 and the second bonded portion 254. Is formed so as to have a thin-walled second facing portion 282 facing the second protruding portion 255 with a slight gap at the time of bonding.
 そして、第2被接着部281は、被接着部271が突出部253を乗り越える際に、第2突出部255を乗り越えるように配置される。 Then, the second bonded portion 281 is arranged so as to get over the second protruding portion 255 when the bonded portion 271 gets over the protruding portion 253.
 これにより、接着力等を高めるために縁部の外側だけでなく内側でも接着する保護部材260aであっても、容易に組付作業を実施することができる。 As a result, the assembling work can be easily carried out even with the protective member 260a that adheres not only to the outside of the edge but also to the inside in order to increase the adhesive force.
 なお、読取口の縁部を保護する本実施形態及び変形例の特徴的構成は、他の実施形態にも適用することができる。 Note that the characteristic configurations of the present embodiment and the modified example that protect the edge of the reading port can be applied to other embodiments.
[他の実施形態]
 なお、本発明は上記各実施形態および変形例に限定されるものではなく、例えば、以下のように具体化してもよい。
(1)情報コードからの反射光を取り込む読取口50は、上述したように略台形状に開口するように形成されることに限らず、他の開口形状、例えば、一側縁部52が他側縁部53よりも長くなるT字状に開口するように形成されてもよい。このように読取口50が構成される場合であっても、周縁51のうち把持部13から、前記長手方向LTにおいて最も離れた一側縁部52に当該長手方向LT、即ち把持部13の胴体部分に対して斜め下方に沿って突出する壁部56が設けられることで、上記効果を奏する。
[Other Embodiments]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments and modifications, and may be embodied as follows, for example.
(1) The reading port 50 that takes in the reflected light from the information code is not limited to being formed so as to open in a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, and other opening shapes, for example, one side edge portion 52, etc. It may be formed so as to open in a T shape longer than the side edge portion 53. Even when the reading port 50 is configured in this way, the longitudinal LT, that is, the body of the grip portion 13, is located at the one side edge portion 52 farthest from the grip portion 13 of the peripheral edge 51 in the longitudinal direction LT. The above effect is obtained by providing the wall portion 56 that projects diagonally downward with respect to the portion.
(2)表示面Rに表示される情報コードCを読み取る際、突出端部56aを表示面Rに接触させて情報コードCを読み取ることに限らず、使用環境等によっては、突出端部56aを表示面Rから僅かに浮かせるようにして情報コードCを読み取ってもよい。 (2) When reading the information code C displayed on the display surface R, the protruding end portion 56a is not limited to being brought into contact with the display surface R to read the information code C, and the protruding end portion 56a may be read depending on the usage environment or the like. The information code C may be read so as to be slightly floated from the display surface R.
(3)さらに、前述した各種の態様に係る構成は、一次元コードや二次元コード等の情報コードを光学的に且つ非接触で読み取る光学的情報読取装置に適用されることに限らず、例えば、情報コードだけでなく文字情報等を光学的に読み取り可能な光学的情報読取装置に適用されてもよい。勿論、スマートフォンなどの携帯端末の画面(表示面)やコンピュータモニタの画面(表示面)に情報コードCが表示されている場合、この情報コードCを読み取る装置として、前述した各種の態様に係る光学的情報読取装置を用いてもよい。 (3) Further, the configurations according to the various aspects described above are not limited to being applied to an optical information reading device that optically and non-contactly reads an information code such as a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code, for example. , It may be applied to an optical information reading device capable of optically reading not only an information code but also character information and the like. Of course, when the information code C is displayed on the screen (display surface) of a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or the screen (display surface) of a computer monitor, the device for reading the information code C is an optical device according to the above-mentioned various aspects. An information reading device may be used.
(4)さらに、トリガースイッチ42に対する所定の操作に応じて読取処理が行なわれる光学的情報読取装置10に採用されることに限らず、一定時間読取処理が常時行われる光学的情報読取装置に採用されてもよい。 (4) Further, the device is not limited to the optical information reading device 10 in which the reading process is performed according to a predetermined operation of the trigger switch 42, but is also used in the optical information reading device in which the reading process is constantly performed for a certain period of time. May be done.
 10…光学的情報読取装置
 11…筐体
 12…読取部
 12a…延出端部
 13…把持部
 13TIP…把持部の長手方向の先端側端部(一側の端部)
 21…照明光源(照明部)
 27…結像レンズ(撮像部)
 28…受光センサ(撮像部)
 50…読取口
 51…周縁
 52…一側縁部
 56…壁部
 57a,57b…対向部
 C…情報コード
 C1…バーコード(一次元コード)
 C2…QRコード(二次元コード)
 Lf…照明光
 R…読取り対象である対象物の表示面
10 ... Optical information reader 11 ... Housing 12 ... Reading part 12a ... Extension end 13 ... Grip 13 TIP ... Tip side end in the longitudinal direction of the grip (one end)
21 ... Illumination light source (illumination unit)
27 ... Imaging lens (imaging unit)
28 ... Light receiving sensor (imaging unit)
50 ... Reading port 51 ... Peripheral 52 ... One side edge 56 ... Wall 57a, 57b ... Opposing part C ... Information code C1 ... Bar code (one-dimensional code)
C2 ... QR code (two-dimensional code)
Lf ... Illumination light R ... Display surface of the object to be read

Claims (41)

  1.  表示面に表示される又は配置される情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、
     照明光を照射する照明部と、
     前記撮像部及び前記照明部が内部に収容され、前記照明部からの前記照明光を出射して前記情報コードからの光を内部に導入する読取口が設けられる筐体と、
     を備え、
     前記表示面から前記読取口を離した状態で前記情報コードを前記撮像部にて撮像して読み取る光学的情報読取装置であって、
     前記筐体は、
     前記読取口が形成された読取部と、
     前記読取口を前記情報コードに向ける際に把持され、かつ前記読取部と一体に形成された把持部と、
     を備え、
     前記読取部は、前記把持部の長手方向一側の端部から当該長手方向の斜め下方に延出して、その先端に延出端部を有するように構成され、
     前記延出端部は、前記読取口を有し、
     前記読取口は前記情報コードに向けられる周縁を有し、
     前記周縁は前記長手方向において前記把持部から離れた一側縁部を有し、
     前記一側縁部には前記斜め下方に沿って突出する壁部が設けられる、ことを特徴とする光学的情報読取装置。
    An imaging unit that captures an information code displayed or placed on the display surface,
    The lighting unit that irradiates the illumination light and
    A housing in which the image pickup unit and the illumination unit are housed therein, and a housing provided with a reading port for emitting the illumination light from the illumination unit and introducing the light from the information code into the inside.
    With
    An optical information reading device that captures and reads the information code with the imaging unit while the reading port is separated from the display surface.
    The housing is
    The reading unit on which the reading port is formed and
    A grip portion that is gripped when the reading port is directed toward the information code and is integrally formed with the reading portion.
    With
    The reading portion is configured to extend diagonally downward in the longitudinal direction from an end portion on one side in the longitudinal direction of the grip portion and have an extending end portion at the tip thereof.
    The extending end portion has the reading port and has the reading port.
    The reading port has a peripheral edge directed to the information code.
    The peripheral edge has one side edge away from the grip in the longitudinal direction.
    An optical information reading device characterized in that a wall portion projecting diagonally downward is provided on the one side edge portion.
  2.  前記読取口の前記周縁には、当該読取口を介して対向しそれぞれ前記壁部に連なる一対の対向部が設けられることを特徴とする請求項1に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 The optical information reading device according to claim 1, wherein a pair of facing portions facing each other via the reading port and connected to the wall portion are provided on the peripheral edge of the reading port.
  3.  前記照明部は、前記照明光を前記壁部に向けて照射するように配置されることを特徴とする請求項1又は2に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 The optical information reading device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the illumination unit is arranged so as to irradiate the illumination light toward the wall portion.
  4.  前記壁部は、前記一側縁部から突出端部までの突出長さが、当該突出端部を接触させた前記所定の表示面に表示される前記情報コードの撮像に適した距離に応じた長さとなるように形成されていることを特徴とする請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 The protrusion length from the one side edge portion to the protruding end portion of the wall portion corresponds to a distance suitable for imaging the information code displayed on the predetermined display surface in contact with the protruding end portion. The optical information reading device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the optical information reading device is formed so as to have a length.
  5.  前記照明部は前記照明光を照射する第1及び第2の照明部を備え、
     前記撮像部は、受光センサと、前記読取口を介して入射する入射光を集光して前記受光センサの受光面に像を結像させるための結像レンズとを備え、
     前記結像レンズは、前記受光センサの受光面に対して前記第1照明部及び前記第2照明部から離れる方向にずれて配置されることを特徴とする請求項1~4のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    The illumination unit includes first and second illumination units that irradiate the illumination light.
    The imaging unit includes a light receiving sensor and an imaging lens for collecting incident light incident through the reading port and forming an image on the light receiving surface of the light receiving sensor.
    Any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the imaging lens is arranged so as to be displaced from the light receiving surface of the light receiving sensor in a direction away from the first illumination unit and the second illumination unit. The optical information reader according to the above.
  6.  前記読取口には、前記撮像部及び前記照明部を保護する保護部材が設けられ、
     前記保護部材には、前記照明光が透過する第1透過部と、前記情報コードからの反射光が透過する第2透過部と、が形成され、
     前記筐体には、前記保護部材を外面側から囲うようにして保持する保持部が設けられ、
     前記保持部は、前記第1透過部を前記外面側に露出させる露出幅と前記第2透過部を前記外面側に露出させる露出幅とが使用者の指の幅よりも小さくなるように形成されることを特徴とする請求項1~5のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    The reading port is provided with a protective member that protects the image pickup unit and the illumination unit.
    The protective member is formed with a first transmitting portion through which the illumination light is transmitted and a second transmitting portion through which the reflected light from the information code is transmitted.
    The housing is provided with a holding portion that holds the protective member so as to surround it from the outer surface side.
    The holding portion is formed so that the exposure width for exposing the first transmission portion to the outer surface side and the exposure width for exposing the second transmission portion to the outer surface side are smaller than the width of the user's finger. The optical information reading device according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the optical information reading device is characterized.
  7.  前記読取口には、前記撮像部及び前記照明部を保護する保護部材が設けられ、
     前記保護部材には、前記照明光が透過する第1透過部と、前記第1透過部を環状に囲うように外方に突出する第1環状部と、前記情報コードからの反射光が透過する第2透過部と、前記第2透過部を環状に囲うように外方に突出する第2環状部と、が形成されることを特徴とする請求項1~5のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    The reading port is provided with a protective member that protects the image pickup unit and the illumination unit.
    The protective member transmits the first transmitting portion through which the illumination light is transmitted, the first annular portion that projects outward so as to surround the first transmitting portion in an annular shape, and the reflected light from the information code. The invention according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein a second penetrating portion and a second annular portion projecting outward so as to enclose the second transmissive portion in an annular shape are formed. Optical information reader.
  8.  前記撮像部による撮像視野を示すマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部と、
     前記撮像部による撮像画像において前記マーカ光が所定の状態で撮像されるマーカ撮像状態であるか否かについて判定するマーカ撮像判定部と、
     前記マーカ撮像判定部の判定結果に応じて前記照明部を制御する照明制御部と、
     を備えることを特徴とする請求項1~7のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A marker light irradiation unit that irradiates a marker light indicating an imaging field of view by the imaging unit,
    A marker imaging determination unit that determines whether or not the marker light is captured in a predetermined state in the image captured by the imaging unit.
    A lighting control unit that controls the lighting unit according to the determination result of the marker imaging determination unit,
    The optical information reading device according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the optical information reading device is provided.
  9.  前記照明制御部は、前記マーカ撮像判定部により前記マーカ撮像状態であると判定されると、前記照明光が照射されるように前記照明部を制御し、前記マーカ撮像判定部により前記マーカ撮像状態でないと判定されると、前記照明光の照射を停止するように前記照明部を制御することを特徴とする請求項8に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 When the marker imaging determination unit determines that the lighting control unit is in the marker imaging state, the illumination control unit controls the lighting unit so that the illumination light is irradiated, and the marker imaging determination unit controls the marker imaging state. The optical information reading device according to claim 8, wherein if it is determined that the lighting unit is not, the lighting unit is controlled so as to stop the irradiation of the illumination light.
  10.  前記照明制御部は、前記マーカ撮像判定部により前記マーカ撮像状態であると判定されると、前記照明光が照射されるように前記照明部を制御し、前記マーカ撮像判定部により前記マーカ撮像状態でないと判定されると、前記マーカ撮像状態であると判定される場合よりも暗くなる状態で前記照明光が照射されるように前記照明部を制御することを特徴とする請求項8に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 When the marker imaging determination unit determines that the lighting control unit is in the marker imaging state, the illumination control unit controls the lighting unit so that the illumination light is irradiated, and the marker imaging determination unit controls the marker imaging state. The eighth aspect of claim 8, wherein if it is determined that the lighting unit is not, the illumination unit is controlled so that the illumination light is irradiated in a state darker than in the case where it is determined that the marker is in the imaging state. Optical information reader.
  11.  前記撮像部より撮像される画像が変化しているか否かについて判定する画像変化判定部を備え、
     前記マーカ光照射部は、前記画像変化判定部により前記撮像部より撮像される画像が変化していると判定される場合に、前記マーカ光を照射することを特徴とする請求項8~10のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    An image change determination unit for determining whether or not the image captured by the image pickup unit has changed is provided.
    Claims 8 to 10, wherein the marker light irradiating unit irradiates the marker light when it is determined by the image change determining unit that the image captured by the imaging unit has changed. The optical information reader according to any one of the following items.
  12.  前記マーカ撮像判定部は、前記撮像画像のうち前記マーカ光が撮像される可能性のある範囲について、前記マーカ光が前記所定の状態で撮像される前記マーカ撮像状態であるか否かについて判定することを特徴とする請求項8~11のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 The marker imaging determination unit determines whether or not the marker light is in the marker imaging state in which the marker light is imaged in the predetermined state in a range of the captured image where the marker light may be imaged. The optical information reading device according to any one of claims 8 to 11.
  13.  前記撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して前記情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、
     複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されているために前記デコード部により1つの撮像画像から複数のデコード結果が得られる場合に、出力するデコード結果を選択する選択部と、
     を備え、
     前記選択部は、予め登録される選択判定用情報が前記デコード結果に含まれているか否かに基づいて、出力するデコード結果を選択することを特徴とする請求項1~12のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code on the captured image captured by the imaging unit, and a decoding unit.
    When a plurality of decoding results can be obtained from one captured image by the decoding unit because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged, a selection unit for selecting an output decoding result and a selection unit.
    With
    Any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the selection unit selects an output decoding result based on whether or not the selection determination information registered in advance is included in the decoding result. The optical information reader according to the above.
  14.  前記選択判定用情報は、所定のURLに含まれる特徴的文字列及び所定のアドレスに含まれる特徴的文字列の少なくともいずれか一方であることを特徴とする請求項13に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 The optical information reading according to claim 13, wherein the selection determination information is at least one of a characteristic character string included in a predetermined URL and a characteristic character string included in a predetermined address. apparatus.
  15.  前記撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して前記情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、
     複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されているために前記デコード部により1つの撮像画像から複数のデコード結果が得られる場合に、出力するデコード結果を選択する選択部と、
     を備え、
     前記選択部は、デコードに成功した前記情報コードのコード種別に基づいて、出力するデコード結果を選択することを特徴とする請求項1~12のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code on the captured image captured by the imaging unit, and a decoding unit.
    When a plurality of decoding results can be obtained from one captured image by the decoding unit because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged, a selection unit for selecting an output decoding result and a selection unit.
    With
    The optical information reading device according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the selection unit selects an output decoding result based on the code type of the information code that has been successfully decoded.
  16.  前記撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して前記情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、
     前記デコード部によるデコード結果を利用した所定の処理を行うための処理部と、
     複数の情報コードが同時に撮像されているために前記デコード部により1つの撮像画像から複数のデコード結果が得られる場合に、2以上の同じデコード結果が得られているか否かついて判定するデコード結果同異判定部と、
     を備え、
     前記処理部は、前記デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合に、前記2以上の同じデコード結果の1つについて前記所定の処理を行うことを特徴とする請求項1~12のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code on the captured image captured by the imaging unit, and a decoding unit.
    A processing unit for performing a predetermined process using the decoding result by the decoding unit, and
    When a plurality of decoding results can be obtained from one captured image by the decoding unit because a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged, it is determined whether or not two or more same decoding results are obtained. Different judgment part and
    With
    When it is determined by the decoding result same / different determination unit that two or more same decoding results are obtained, the processing unit performs the predetermined processing on one of the two or more same decoding results. The optical information reading device according to any one of claims 1 to 12, characterized by this.
  17.  前記処理部によって前記所定の処理が行われたデコード結果が記憶される記憶部を備え、
     前記処理部は、前記デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって、前記記憶部に記憶される情報に基づいて前記同じデコード結果に一致するデコード結果が所定の読取回数以内に前記処理部によって前記所定の処理が行われていない場合に、前記デコード結果について前記所定の処理を行うことを特徴とする請求項16に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A storage unit for storing the decoding result of the predetermined processing performed by the processing unit is provided.
    When it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit, the processing unit matches the same decoding result based on the information stored in the storage unit. The optical information according to claim 16, wherein the predetermined processing is performed on the decoding result when the predetermined processing is not performed by the processing unit within a predetermined reading number of times. Reader.
  18.  前記デコード部によるデコード結果が前記デコード処理を終えたデコード時刻とともに記憶される記憶部を備え、
     前記処理部は、前記デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって、前記同じデコード結果に一致するデコード結果に関連付けられて前記記憶部に記憶される前記デコード時刻からの経過時間が所定時間以上となる場合に、前記デコード結果について前記所定の処理を行うことを特徴とする請求項16に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A storage unit is provided in which the decoding result by the decoding unit is stored together with the decoding time when the decoding process is completed.
    In the case where it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit, the processing unit is associated with the decoding results matching the same decoding results and stored in the storage unit. The optical information reading device according to claim 16, wherein when the elapsed time from the stored decoding time becomes a predetermined time or more, the predetermined processing is performed on the decoding result.
  19.  前記デコード部によるデコードが成功した情報コードが前記撮像部の撮像視野から外されて再び撮像視野内に入り込む回数を撮像回数としてカウントするカウント部と、
     前記処理部によって前記所定の処理が行われたデコード結果が、前記カウント部によりカウントされる前記撮像回数に関連付けられて記憶される記憶部と、を備え、
     前記処理部は、前記デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって、前記同じデコード結果に一致するデコード結果に関連付けられて前記記憶部に記憶される前記撮像回数が所定回数以上となる場合に、前記デコード結果について前記所定の処理を行うことを特徴とする請求項16に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A counting unit that counts the number of times that the information code successfully decoded by the decoding unit is removed from the imaging field of view of the imaging unit and reenters the imaging field of view as the number of imaging times.
    A storage unit is provided, in which the decoding result obtained by performing the predetermined processing by the processing unit is stored in association with the number of imaging times counted by the counting unit.
    When it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit, the processing unit is associated with a decoding result matching the same decoding result and stored in the storage unit. The optical information reading device according to claim 16, wherein when the number of times of imaging to be stored becomes a predetermined number of times or more, the predetermined processing is performed on the decoding result.
  20.  前記デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定された前記情報コードについて、前記撮像部の撮像視野から外された時刻がコード除外時刻として前記デコード結果に関連付けられて記憶される記憶部を備え、
     前記処理部は、前記デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって、前記同じデコード結果に一致するデコード結果に関連付けられて前記記憶部に記憶される前記コード除外時刻からの経過時間が所定時間以上となる場合に、前記デコード結果について前記所定の処理を行うことを特徴とする請求項16に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    With respect to the information code determined to have obtained two or more same decoding results by the decoding result same / different determination unit, the time when the information code is removed from the imaging field of view of the imaging unit is associated with the decoding result as a code exclusion time. Equipped with a storage unit that is stored
    In the case where it is determined that two or more same decoding results are obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit, the processing unit is associated with a decoding result matching the same decoding result and stored in the storage unit. The optical information reading device according to claim 16, wherein when the elapsed time from the stored code exclusion time becomes a predetermined time or more, the predetermined processing is performed on the decoding result.
  21.  前記筐体の姿勢を検出する姿勢検出部を備え、
     前記処理部は、前記デコード結果同異判定部により2以上の同じデコード結果が得られていると判定される場合であって、前記姿勢検出部により検出される前記筐体の姿勢が所定の姿勢状態である場合に、前記デコード結果について前記所定の処理を行うことを特徴とする請求項16に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A posture detection unit for detecting the posture of the housing is provided.
    The processing unit determines that two or more same decoding results have been obtained by the decoding result same / different determination unit, and the posture of the housing detected by the posture detection unit is a predetermined posture. The optical information reading device according to claim 16, wherein when the state is in the state, the predetermined processing is performed on the decoding result.
  22.  情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、
     前記撮像部による撮像画像から前記情報コードをデコードするためのコード画像を検出するコード画像検出部と、
     前記コード画像検出部により検出された前記コード画像に対して前記情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、
     前記デコード部によるデコード結果を利用した所定の処理を行うための処理部と、
     前記デコード処理の成功に応じて所定の報知を行うための報知部と、
     を備える光学的情報読取装置であって、
     前記コード画像検出部は、前記撮像部により連続的に撮像される複数の連続撮像画像において、同じ情報コードの前記コード画像を検出し、
     前記コード画像検出部により検出されている前記コード画像が前記撮像画像に占める状態に応じて、当該コード画像が読取対象であるか否かについて判定する読取対象判定部を備え、
     前記読取対象判定部により読取対象であると判定された前記コード画像のデコード処理が成功していることでデコード結果が得られていると、前記処理部は、前記デコード結果を利用して前記所定の処理を行い、前記報知部は、前記所定の報知を行うことを特徴とする光学的情報読取装置。
    An imaging unit that captures information codes and
    A code image detection unit that detects a code image for decoding the information code from an image captured by the imaging unit, and a code image detection unit.
    A decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code with respect to the code image detected by the code image detection unit, and a decoding unit.
    A processing unit for performing a predetermined process using the decoding result by the decoding unit, and
    A notification unit for performing a predetermined notification according to the success of the decoding process,
    An optical information reader equipped with
    The code image detection unit detects the code image having the same information code in a plurality of continuously captured images continuously captured by the imaging unit.
    A reading target determination unit for determining whether or not the code image is a reading target according to a state in which the code image detected by the code image detecting unit occupies the captured image is provided.
    When the decoding result is obtained by successfully decoding the code image determined to be the reading target by the reading target determination unit, the processing unit uses the decoding result to perform the predetermined determination. The optical information reading device is characterized in that the notification unit performs the above-mentioned processing and performs the predetermined notification.
  23.  前記読取対象判定部は、前記コード画像検出部により検出されている前記コード画像の一部に相当する部分が前記撮像部による撮像視野から外れた場合でも、前記撮像視野内の前記コード画像の残部の状態が所定の条件を満たすと、前記コード画像が読取対象であると判定することを特徴とする請求項22に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 The reading target determination unit is the rest of the code image in the imaging field of view even when a portion corresponding to a part of the code image detected by the code image detecting unit is out of the imaging field of view of the imaging unit. The optical information reading device according to claim 22, wherein when the state of the above condition satisfies a predetermined condition, it is determined that the code image is a reading target.
  24.  前記読取対象判定部により読取対象であると判定された際の前記コード画像のデコード処理が成功しておらず、当該判定後に前記コード画像のデコード処理が成功すると、前記処理部は、前記判定後に得られた前記デコード結果を利用して前記所定の処理を行い、前記報知部は、前記所定の報知を行うことを特徴とする請求項22又は23に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 If the decoding process of the code image when it is determined by the reading target determination unit to be the reading target is not successful and the decoding process of the code image is successful after the determination, the processing unit will perform the determination after the determination. The optical information reading device according to claim 22 or 23, wherein the predetermined processing is performed using the obtained decoding result, and the notification unit performs the predetermined notification.
  25.  前記撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して前記情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、
     前記デコード部によりデコードされたデコード結果を出力するための出力部と、
     を備え、
     前記出力部は、前記撮像画像の一部を占めるように設けられる所定の読取エリアに対して、前記デコード部によりデコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの画像が含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの画像が含まれない場合に、前記1つの情報コードのデコード結果を出力することを特徴とする請求項1~12のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code on the captured image captured by the imaging unit, and a decoding unit.
    An output unit for outputting the decoding result decoded by the decoding unit, and
    With
    The output unit includes an image of one information code for which a decoding result has been obtained by the decoding unit with respect to a predetermined reading area provided so as to occupy a part of the captured image, and other information. The optical information reading device according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the decoding result of the one information code is output when the image of the code is not included.
  26.  前記出力部は、前記所定の読取エリアに対して、前記デコード部によりデコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの画像の全てが含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの画像の少なくとも一部が含まれない場合に、前記1つの情報コードのデコード結果を出力することを特徴とする請求項25に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 The output unit includes all of the images of one information code for which the decoding result has been obtained by the decoding unit for the predetermined reading area, and includes at least a part of the images of the other information code. The optical information reading device according to claim 25, wherein the decoding result of the one information code is output when the result is not obtained.
  27.  前記情報コードは、特定パターンを有し、
     前記出力部は、前記所定の読取エリアに対して、前記デコード部によりデコード結果が得られた1つの情報コードの前記特定パターンの画像が含まれ、かつ、他の情報コードの前記特定パターンの画像が含まれない場合に、前記1つの情報コードのデコード結果を出力することを特徴とする請求項25に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    The information code has a specific pattern and
    The output unit includes an image of the specific pattern of one information code obtained by the decoding unit for the predetermined reading area, and an image of the specific pattern of another information code. 25. The optical information reading device according to claim 25, wherein the decoding result of the one information code is output when is not included.
  28.  前記撮像部による撮像視野に向けてマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部と、
     前記撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して前記情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、
     前記デコード部によりデコードされたデコード結果を出力するための出力部と、
     前記デコード部によりデコードされた前記情報コードが前記撮像画像の一部に相当するデコード対象エリア内に位置しているか否かについて判定するコード位置判定部と、
     を備え、
     前記出力部は、前記撮像部により前記マーカ光が撮像されない場合には、前記コード位置判定部により前記デコード対象エリア内に位置していると判定された情報コードのデコード結果を出力することを特徴とする請求項1~7のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A marker light irradiating unit that irradiates a marker light toward an imaging field of view by the imaging unit,
    A decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code on the captured image captured by the imaging unit, and a decoding unit.
    An output unit for outputting the decoding result decoded by the decoding unit, and
    A code position determination unit that determines whether or not the information code decoded by the decoding unit is located in a decoding target area corresponding to a part of the captured image, and
    With
    The output unit is characterized in that when the marker light is not imaged by the imaging unit, the output unit outputs the decoding result of the information code determined by the code position determining unit to be located in the decoding target area. The optical information reading device according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
  29.  前記出力部は、前記デコード部により1つの撮像画像から1つのデコード結果が得られた場合には、前記マーカ光が撮像されているか否かにかかわらず、前記1つのデコード結果を出力することを特徴とする請求項28に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 When one decoding result is obtained from one captured image by the decoding unit, the output unit outputs the one decoding result regardless of whether or not the marker light is imaged. 28. The optical information reading device according to claim 28.
  30.  前記出力部は、前記撮像部により前記マーカ光が撮像されない場合には、前記コード位置判定部により前記デコード対象エリア内に位置していると判定された情報コードであり、かつ、予め設定されたコード種別となる情報コードのデコード結果を出力することを特徴とする請求項28に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 The output unit is an information code determined by the code position determination unit to be located in the decoding target area when the marker light is not imaged by the imaging unit, and is preset. The optical information reading device according to claim 28, wherein a decoding result of an information code as a code type is output.
  31.  前記撮像部による撮像視野に向けてマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部と、
     前記撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して前記情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、
     デコード結果が得られた前記情報コードに向けて前記マーカ光が照射されている状態であるか否かについて判定するマーカ照射状態判定部と、
     前記マーカ照射状態判定部により前記マーカ光が照射されている状態であると判定された前記情報コードのデコード結果を出力するための出力部と、
     前記デコード部により得られたデコード結果が前記出力部から前回出力されたデコード結果と一致するデコード結果一致状態であるか否かについて判定するデコード結果判定部と、
     前記出力部から前記デコード結果が出力されるごとに、前回出力されたデコード結果に一致するデコード結果が出力されることを防止するための二度読み防止設定を行う二度読み防止設定部と、
     を備え、
     前記二度読み防止設定部は、前記出力部から前記デコード結果が出力された後に前記マーカ照射状態判定部によりデコード結果が得られた前記情報コードに向けて前記マーカ光が照射されている状態でないと判定されると、前記二度読み防止設定を解除し、
     前記出力部は、前記二度読み防止設定部により前記二度読み防止設定が行われていると、前記デコード結果判定部により前記デコード結果一致状態であると判定されたデコード結果を出力対象外とし、前記二度読み防止設定が解除されると、前記デコード結果判定部により前記デコード結果一致状態であると判定されたデコード結果であっても出力対象とすることを特徴とする請求項1~7のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A marker light irradiating unit that irradiates a marker light toward an imaging field of view by the imaging unit,
    A decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code on the captured image captured by the imaging unit, and a decoding unit.
    A marker irradiation state determination unit that determines whether or not the marker light is being irradiated toward the information code from which the decoding result has been obtained, and a marker irradiation state determination unit.
    An output unit for outputting the decoding result of the information code determined to be in the state of being irradiated with the marker light by the marker irradiation state determination unit, and an output unit.
    A decoding result determination unit that determines whether or not the decoding result obtained by the decoding unit is in a decoding result matching state that matches the decoding result previously output from the output unit.
    Each time the decoding result is output from the output unit, the double-reading prevention setting unit that sets the double-reading prevention setting to prevent the decoding result that matches the previously output decoding result is output, and the double-reading prevention setting unit.
    With
    The double-reading prevention setting unit is not in a state in which the marker light is irradiated toward the information code for which the decoding result is obtained by the marker irradiation state determination unit after the decoding result is output from the output unit. If it is determined, the double-reading prevention setting is canceled and
    When the double reading prevention setting is performed by the double reading prevention setting unit, the output unit excludes the decoding result determined by the decoding result determination unit to be in the decoding result matching state as an output target. Claims 1 to 7, wherein when the double-reading prevention setting is canceled, even the decoding result determined by the decoding result determination unit to be in the decoding result matching state is output. The optical information reader according to any one of the above.
  32.  前記二度読み防止設定部は、前記出力部から前記デコード結果が出力された後に、前記情報コードを構成するコード領域を含めたコード周辺領域に向けて前記マーカ光が照射されている状態でないと前記マーカ照射状態判定部により判定されると、前記二度読み防止設定を解除することを特徴とする請求項31に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 After the decoding result is output from the output unit, the double-reading prevention setting unit must be in a state where the marker light is irradiated toward the code peripheral area including the code area constituting the information code. The optical information reading device according to claim 31, wherein when the marker irradiation state determination unit determines the determination, the double-reading prevention setting is canceled.
  33.  前記コード周辺領域は、撮像画像に占める前記情報コードの大きさに応じて、前記情報コードに対する大きさが変化するように設定されることを特徴とする請求項32に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 The optical information reading device according to claim 32, wherein the code peripheral region is set so that the size of the information code changes according to the size of the information code in the captured image. ..
  34.  前記撮像部により撮像された撮像画像に対して前記情報コードをデコードするためのデコード処理を行うデコード部と、
     前記デコード部によりデコードされたデコード結果を出力するための出力部と、
     前記撮像部による撮像画像の一部に相当する一部画像について画像が変化していないとみなされる一部画像一致状態であるか否かについて判定する画像状態判定部と、
     を備え、
     前記デコード部は、前記出力部により前記デコード結果が出力されると、前記画像状態判定部により前記一部画像一致状態と判定されるまで前記デコード処理を行わないことを特徴とする請求項1~12のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A decoding unit that performs decoding processing for decoding the information code on the captured image captured by the imaging unit, and a decoding unit.
    An output unit for outputting the decoding result decoded by the decoding unit, and
    An image state determination unit that determines whether or not a part of the image corresponding to a part of the image captured by the image pickup unit is in a partial image matching state in which the image is considered to have not changed.
    With
    The decoding unit is characterized in that, when the decoding result is output by the output unit, the decoding process is not performed until the image state determination unit determines that the partial image matching state is determined. 12. The optical information reader according to any one of paragraphs 12.
  35.  前記一部画像は、前記撮像画像に占める範囲が、当該撮像画像の中央部分に設定されることを特徴とする請求項34に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 The optical information reading device according to claim 34, wherein the partial image has a range occupied by the captured image set in the central portion of the captured image.
  36.  前記撮像部による撮像視野の中心に向けてマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部を備え、
     前記一部画像は、前記撮像画像に占める範囲が、当該撮像画像での前記マーカ光の位置を基準に設定されることを特徴とする請求項34に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A marker light irradiation unit for irradiating a marker light toward the center of the imaging field of view by the imaging unit is provided.
    The optical information reading device according to claim 34, wherein the partial image is set in a range occupied by the captured image with reference to the position of the marker light in the captured image.
  37.  前記一部画像は、前記撮像画像に占める範囲が、前回デコードに成功した情報コードを基準に設定されることを特徴とする請求項34に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 The optical information reading device according to claim 34, wherein the partial image is set in a range occupied by the captured image based on an information code that was successfully decoded last time.
  38.  前記読取口を構成する縁部を、外側及び内側の双方から弾性的に挟持するようにして保護する保護部材を備え、
     前記保護部材は、前記縁部の外側を覆う外側保護部と、前記縁部の内側を覆う内側保護部と、前記外側保護部と前記内側保護部とを弾性的に連結する連結部と、を有し、
     前記縁部の外側には、前記外側保護部が接着される接着部と前記接着部よりも先端側に位置して当該接着部よりも突出する突出部とが設けられ、
     前記外側保護部は、前記接着部に接着される被接着部と、前記被接着部と前記接着部との接着時に前記突出部に対向する薄肉状の対向部と、を有するように形成されることを特徴とする請求項1~21、及び、25~37のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    A protective member for elastically sandwiching and protecting the edge portion constituting the reading port from both the outside and the inside is provided.
    The protective member includes an outer protective portion that covers the outside of the edge portion, an inner protective portion that covers the inside of the edge portion, and a connecting portion that elastically connects the outer protective portion and the inner protective portion. Have and
    On the outside of the edge portion, an adhesive portion to which the outer protective portion is adhered and a protruding portion located on the tip side of the adhesive portion and protruding from the adhesive portion are provided.
    The outer protective portion is formed so as to have a bonded portion to be adhered to the bonded portion and a thin-walled facing portion facing the protruding portion when the bonded portion is bonded to the bonded portion. The optical information reading device according to any one of claims 1 to 21 and 25 to 37.
  39.  前記突出部は、前記接着部に近づくほど外側への突出高さが高くなるように形成されることを特徴とする請求項38に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 The optical information reading device according to claim 38, wherein the protruding portion is formed so that the protruding height becomes higher as it approaches the adhesive portion.
  40.  前記突出部は、前記接着部側の端面が、前記保護部材を前記縁部に組み付ける組付方向に対して垂直に近くなるように形成されることを特徴とする請求項38又は39に記載の光学的情報読取装置。 38 or 39, wherein the protruding portion is formed so that the end surface on the adhesive portion side is close to perpendicular to the assembling direction in which the protective member is assembled to the edge portion. Optical information reader.
  41.  前記縁部の内側には、前記内側保護部が接着される第2接着部と前記第2接着部よりも先端側に位置して当該第2接着部よりも突出する第2突出部とが設けられ、
     前記内側保護部は、前記第2接着部に接着される第2被接着部と、前記第2被接着部と前記第2接着部との接着時に前記第2突出部に対向する薄肉状の第2対向部と、を有するように形成されることを特徴とする請求項38~40のいずれか一項に記載の光学的情報読取装置。
    Inside the edge portion, a second adhesive portion to which the inner protective portion is adhered and a second projecting portion located on the tip side of the second adhesive portion and protruding from the second adhesive portion are provided. Be,
    The inner protective portion is a thin-walled second portion that faces the second protruding portion when the second bonded portion is bonded to the second bonded portion and the second bonded portion is bonded to the second bonded portion. The optical information reading device according to any one of claims 38 to 40, which is formed so as to have two facing portions.
PCT/JP2020/017775 2019-04-26 2020-04-24 Optical information reading device WO2020218542A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019-084902 2019-04-26
JP2019084902 2019-04-26
JP2019222383 2019-12-09
JP2019-222383 2019-12-09
JP2020073549A JP2021093110A (en) 2019-04-26 2020-04-16 Optical information reader
JP2020-073549 2020-04-16

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020218542A1 true WO2020218542A1 (en) 2020-10-29

Family

ID=72942139

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/017775 WO2020218542A1 (en) 2019-04-26 2020-04-24 Optical information reading device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2020218542A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023142990A1 (en) * 2022-01-30 2023-08-03 支付宝(杭州)信息技术有限公司 Code-scanning recognition

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH07282180A (en) * 1994-04-11 1995-10-27 Asahi Optical Co Ltd Data symbol reader
JPH08315062A (en) * 1995-05-15 1996-11-29 Tec Corp Two-dimensional symbol reader
JP2000298699A (en) * 1999-04-14 2000-10-24 Toshiba Tec Corp Symbol reader
JP2008257462A (en) * 2007-04-04 2008-10-23 Toshiba Tec Corp Commodity sales registration data processor
JP2009151446A (en) * 2007-12-19 2009-07-09 Denso Wave Inc Optical information reading device
JP2013020409A (en) * 2011-07-11 2013-01-31 Denso Wave Inc Information terminal
JP2016110611A (en) * 2014-12-02 2016-06-20 株式会社デンソーウェーブ Optical information reading device

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH07282180A (en) * 1994-04-11 1995-10-27 Asahi Optical Co Ltd Data symbol reader
JPH08315062A (en) * 1995-05-15 1996-11-29 Tec Corp Two-dimensional symbol reader
JP2000298699A (en) * 1999-04-14 2000-10-24 Toshiba Tec Corp Symbol reader
JP2008257462A (en) * 2007-04-04 2008-10-23 Toshiba Tec Corp Commodity sales registration data processor
JP2009151446A (en) * 2007-12-19 2009-07-09 Denso Wave Inc Optical information reading device
JP2013020409A (en) * 2011-07-11 2013-01-31 Denso Wave Inc Information terminal
JP2016110611A (en) * 2014-12-02 2016-06-20 株式会社デンソーウェーブ Optical information reading device

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023142990A1 (en) * 2022-01-30 2023-08-03 支付宝(杭州)信息技术有限公司 Code-scanning recognition

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7798410B2 (en) Hybrid laser scanning and imaging reader
EP3637300B1 (en) Hand-mounted indicia-reading device with finger motion triggering
US5796088A (en) Hand held portable bar code dataform reader having a rotatable reader module portion
EP2463804B1 (en) System for reading visible and/or invisible code symbols in a user-transparent manner using visible/invisible illumination source switching during data capture and processing operations
EP2550797B1 (en) Hand-held scanner
US8534556B2 (en) Arrangement for and method of reducing vertical parallax between an aiming pattern and an imaging field of view in a linear imaging reader
US5552592A (en) Slim scan module with dual detectors
US20080023551A1 (en) System and method for configuring an omnidirectional scanner
CN109902522A (en) Hand-held barcode reader with multiple circuit boards
WO2020218542A1 (en) Optical information reading device
JP2021093110A (en) Optical information reader
JP3020943B1 (en) Portable code reader
JP7469627B2 (en) Optical information reader
JP6624318B2 (en) Optical information reader
JP4047452B2 (en) Handheld symbol reader
US20050077359A1 (en) System and method for configuring an omnidirectional scanner
EP2370930B1 (en) Minimizing misdecodes in electro-optical readers
JP7346897B2 (en) optical information reader
JP6867423B2 (en) Optical information reader
JPH0612511A (en) Hands-free type bar code scanner and operating method for the same
JP6779074B2 (en) Optical information reader
JP2004252600A (en) Image reader, its system, and methods for detecting imaging distance and correcting distortion of image reader
JP4200588B2 (en) Two-dimensional information reader
JP6398809B2 (en) Information code reader
JP2019016315A (en) Information read-out device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20796116

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20796116

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1